Home

User´s Guide RBS 2302

Contents

1. 45_0331C Figure 3510 Multicasting Box 1 Remove the lower sunshield by pressing the fasteners located on the middle on the sunshield Note Make sure that all cables are properly labelled before disconnecting them N Disconnect the antenna cables connected to the radio cabinet D Disconnect the external antenna cable connected to the multicasting box Remove the multicasting box by loosening the three torx screws Mount the new multicasting box Reconnect the external antenna cable Reconnect the antenna cables to the cabinet 90 D wn sr Mount the lower sunshield Set to Operation 1 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 2 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 5 8 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Battery Prior to Replacement 1 De oe NS Maintenance Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the battery 03_0334A Figure 311 Replacing the battery e p N Unscrew the battery cover Replace th
2. P003550A Figure 95 Mounting the multicasting box Note The multicasting box must be mounted before the sunshields For information regarding antenna configuration see allocation drawing 193 26 IPA xxxx in the Site Installation Documentation 1 Mount the multicasting box with three torx screws on the bottom of the cabinet 2 Connect the antenna jumper cables to the TNC connectors on the cabinet TX RX A output to connector X2 and TX RX B output to connector X3 112 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P005538A Figure 96 Connecting antenna cables to the multicasting box 3 Connect the antenna cable s to the antenna system s If only one antenna system A is used the second antenna system B output must be terminated by the built in 50 Q load according to the figure above If a second distributed antenna system B is used connect it to the TX RX ANT B antenna output LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 113 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 5 17 Connecting the External Antenna Jumpers to the RBS optional Sr P005014A Figure 97 Connecting the antenna jumper cable to the RBS For the sake of clarity the cabinet is shown without the sunshields 1 Connect the antenna
3. cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 197 S41 UTERO CIMICUIO Niin aiea a nila a ene aliens Sahai bane 197 8 4 2 Location of the PBC Control Panel cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 197 8 4 3 Control Dav icls cin oie es sents eae ed ha Ee ea 198 8 4 4 Power Switches in the PBC cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 200 8 5 Start up ane MUl COW Misiscceicstictertietta 2 ortceeeds catuhlecd Giaseseterauiasacetietias 201 8 5 1 Start up and shut down of the RBS ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 201 8 5 2 Start up and shut down of the RBS and PBC cccccccecceeeeeeeeeees 202 3 6 Alarms and Commands asirna be eeaeee zs ated es A a EEEE 203 9 6 1 Iintrod cto N aea ee sc ce a aea eG a A ee eA ee 203 8 6 2 Power and Battery Cabinet PBC cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeteeneaes 203 8 7 Connecting the OMT secs wetccctetecesoeceseecisenesceeeeees cee as ecehs alae tees 205 8 8 Test SCQUGNC Cis tet ssc ccsaie tt blesdee ddlic fea etencaiee bindweedtti niente tetett 206 9 8 1 Preparations nnet i a Sad elles Vihar hea leet Rae Sk 206 9 8 2 Flowchart uiddaue seek es ia EEE aE A E Ea aaea 207 8 9 AC Mains Power TG Shs iho Nad a nnet 208 All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 6 10 Fa UNT TeSt aaa meen eon ec a A a aaa ea ea Na aaa aeaii 209 BibT CHECK IDB rore a a a EE moda AE E EESTE 210 8 11 1 OMT related actions OvervieW sss
4. Ericsson Radio Systems AB 423 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 424 488 P003429A Figure 379 Connecting battery 3 and 4 T Connect the battery jumper cable between battery 3 and 4 P003341B Figure 380 Connecting battery 2 and 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Connect the battery jumper cable between battery 2 and 4 Ensure that all cables and hoses are in the correct position so that the door can be closed Ensure that all protective covers are mounted on the battery poles Ensure that the ventilation hoses are not blocked Set the automatic circuit breaker to ON Set the battery switch to the ON position Ensure that no alarms are active on the PBC Verify the battery installation by checking the LED Battery Fault on the DP on the radio cabinet Close the PBC door and screw the 18 torx screws into position Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 6 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 17 18 19 20 Maintenance Tighten the screws and mount the front sunshield Set the radio cabinet to Local Mode and update the IDB with new batteries use the OMT to update the IDB see Site Installation Tests Set the radio cabinet to Remote Mode Close and tighten the installation box doors on the RBS and the PBC Test after corrective action Perfor
5. P003547A Figure 358 Releasing the interface box 11 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box P003798A Figure 359 Loosening the interface box cover LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 413 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 Open the cover of the interface box by removing the 9 torx screws 13 Remove all connection terminal blocks 14 Loosen the Protective Earth in the AC section of the interface box 15 Loosen the two screws on the AC pull relief clamp 16 Dismount the cable gland 17 Pull out the AC cable P003549A Figure 360 Loosening the gland plate 18 Loosen and remove the gland plate by unscrewing the two torx Screws P003168A Figure 361 Removing the earth cable 19 Remove the earth cable on the mounting base 20 Loosen the four nuts securing the mounting base 21 Lift up the mounting base and pull it away from the wall bracket 414 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 22 Maintenance Place the mounting base on the ground P003676A Figure 362 Removing locking washers 23 24 25 26 2T 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Remove the four locking washers with a screwdriver Separate the rear s
6. Switching System SS e Base Station System BSS Operation and Support System OSS Switching System SS The Switching System consists of the following elements Mobile Services Switching Centre MSC The MSC performs the telephony switching functions of the system It controls calls to and from other telephone and data systems and other functions such as network interfacing common channel signalling LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 1 3 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction Gateway MSC A Gateway is a node to interconnect two networks The gateway is often implemented in an MSC Home Location Register HLR The HLR is a database used for storage and management of subscriptions including a subscriber s service profile location information and activity status Visitors Location Register VLR The VLR is a database containing temporary subscribers information needed by the MSC to service visiting subscribers The VLR is always integrated with the MSC When a new mobile station roams into a new MSC area the VLR connected tot he MSC will request data about the mobile station from the HLR Authentication Centre AUC The AUC provides authentication and encryption parameters that verify the user s identity and ensure the confidentiality of each call Equipment Identity Register EIR The EIR is a database containing information about th
7. 80 7 7 1 0 6 Reduced for PCBs and EE covers M 260 15 23 1 1 3 M4 190 15 16 8 Reduced for PCBs and plastic 1 3 covers 540 30 47 8 Battery poles for battery 2 6 wp ero ho CS wp aee pe E 41 2 5 30 2 1 8 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 3 12 Cable connections overview for the PBC o 0 eee gt 0 ec Z 2g O asa aa Ss Alarm output oes 5 to RBS Alarm inputs 2 O ro or master PBC from slave PBC ox c aAom A mT p tty Jumpers required when not cascaded Ald OO QO00000009 JOOQOOOOO ODIO OOO OOOO aE eae ie eee ee ee TT E eS eS 5 Zz Zz 2 ge pal pal Zez Zz oc or or oc Hz E W Lu W Lu a ATAN oo oa Sf gt gt gt gt Il I Ji sts sa r aa LINNAN A ll l l gt gt t ttt OO SKO DBMOOOO aon aon Yy ooaqaa oo oo FALO SIOK OO ANOTOOND Arn ToO AO LO LO LO LO LN LN LO LN LED ODDDDDODO KRKREKEKEKKEKRE lt gt lt XK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KK KK OK X P004575A Figure 282 Cable connections for PBC Note These schematics show all possible connections including the options depending on the configuration at the site 12 4 Fault Localization This section provides information about the fault codes indicated by the units and the procedures to find the faulty unit s Use the Optical Indicators fault code list to identify the indications on the unit s Us
8. Ericsson Radio Systems AB 245 488 All Rights Reserved Optional Tests 9 2 4 246 488 BSCSim Il P004287B Figure 238 Test setup for 4 TRX and 6 TRX configurations 1 Master RBS Follow the instructions in Section Test Setup Procedure 2 TRX Configuration on page 244 2 Extension RBSs Assemble cable C2 adapter Ad1 attenuator A1 and MCB and connect the assembly to each Extension RBS 3 When making a call test connect the mobile station to the RBS that is to be tested Test Sequence Note The time from start until the RBS is operational varies depending on the ambient temperature For example it may take up to 15 minutes at minus 15 C and up to 30 minutes at minus 33 C 1 Start the RBS with diversity A 2 Make a call test 3 Reconfigure the RBS to diversity B 4 Make a call test The test is passed when the following conditions are fulfilled RXqual 0 The tester is satisfied with the speech quality e The RX values do not differ more than 4 dB between TRXs when comparing uplink and downlink respectively provided that the test setup is the same When the test is completed disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the cables to the PCM A socket in the interface box Test through HDSL using the MS and BSC Simulator Note If a HDSL modem is not used perform the setup and the test according to Section 9 2 3 Test using the MS and BSC Simulator on p
9. M l C1 Gl Cd Alt k Os EN BERS GSES SSOSSRS gos Sees SSS CS P P005264A Figure 214 Connecting the OMT When using the OMT connect the OMT cable C1 from a PC COM port to the RBS according to the figure above LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 205 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests Extended OMT cable optional RBS interface box Extended OMT cable OMT converter P005309A Figure 215 Test setup with extended OMT cable An Extended OMT cable can be used for the 32 bits OMT see chapter Tools and Instruments Connect the OMT converter between the Extended OMT cable and a PC or BSC simulator according to the figure above The OMT converter transforms the RS 422 standard to RS 232 standard 8 8 Test Sequence This chapter describes the recommended test sequence for the Site Installation Tests 8 8 1 Preparations Before performing any test the tester must read through the chapter Safety and follow the relevant safety instructions Tools and instruments For information about required test equipment tools and manuals see chapter Tools and Instruments 206 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved 8 8 2 Flowchart AC Mains Power Test
10. Figure 133 Fastening the rope 13 Fasten the rope in the lower cleat Locking pin 11_0361A Figure 134 Releasing the trolley 14 Release the trolley by pulling out the locking pin Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 137 488 Installation of RBS 2302 06_0361A Figure 1355 Moving the trolley 15 Move the trolley towards the mounting base by pulling the inner rope part down and the outer rope part up P004004A Figure 136 Adjusting the height 16 Loosen the inner rope part from the cleat and adjust the height 17 Continue with the instructions from step 2 on page 106and on in Section 5 12 on page 104 138 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet PEEL lL LLL TS PPITIN o fou ow Ul Howe ib oth WT Ho ue tt al tou we oth thal I nonon owt stl ll sil dl II Wow it l I l ilo d I ll I out il ll il H ll PBC Pole Mounted PBC Wall Mounted P003170A Figure 137 Installation alternatives 6 1 Competence requirement In order to do installation work according to this manual in a safe and professional way the work shall be done by skilled person
11. P006185A Ericsson GSM System RBS 2302 User s Guide s ERICSSON amp LZN 302 74 R6B P ERICSSON 2 BINDER LABEL 1 1 Uppgjord ven faktaansvarig om annan Prepared also subject responsible if other Nr No ERA LRN ZP Per Olof H glund 1 001 59 LZN 302 74 Uen Dokansv Godkand Doc respons Approved Kontr Checked Datum Date Rv File ERA LRN ZPC Sture Blom 2000 1 0 03 C J E H l Ericsson GSM f RBS 2302 name oe i 98 65 m User s Guide Fontsize 12 LZB XXX XXX Brac a indinin AAA LZN 302 Zales pontsized0 se Cutting mark H ASGML_docs P_arbeten Martin 1_0059LZN30274R6B doc PS ERICSSON 2 CAPTION LIST Introduction Document No 001 53 LZN 302 74 RBS 2302 User s Guide Date 00 10 03 Rev B Safety Instructions 2 Tools and Instruments 3 Site Planning and Requirements 4 Installation of RBS 2302 5 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 Antenna System Tests 7 Site Installation Tests 8 Optional Tests 9 RBS Site Integration 10 Fault Handling 14 Maintenance 12 Product Data 13 Glossary 14 Spare Parts Catalogue 15 s ERICSSON amp User s Guide RBS 2302 User s Guide RBS 2302 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 1 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 Due
12. AO CON internal fault map class 1A R6 and later Not used AO CON internal fault map class 1B R6 and later Not used AO CON internal fault map class 2A R6 and later Not used AO CON external condition map class 1 R6 and later Fault Fault type 8 LAPD Q CG LAPD queue congestion 15 AO CON external condition map class 2 R6 and later Fault Fault type No 0 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault Handling Fault Fault type No 8 LAPD Q CG LAPD queue congestion 15 AO CON replacement unit map R6 and later Not used See Section SO CF replacement unit map on page 296 for possible HW causing the fault AO TS internal fault map class 1A Not used AO TS internal fault map class 1B Not used AO TS internal fault map class 2A Not used AO TS external condition map class 1 Fault Fault type No 0 1 2 3 TRA Remote transcoder communication lost 15 AO TS external condition map class 2 Not used AO TS replacement unit map Not used AO TF internal fault map class 1A Not used Ericsson Radio Systems AB 301 488 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling AO TF internal fault map class 1B Fault Fault type No 0 Optional synchronisation source 1 DXU optional EEPROM checksum fault 47 AO TF internal fault map class 2A Not used AO TF external condition map class 1
13. 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests closest RBS is to be much stronger than the signal received from the RBS far away To minimise cross talk at the Far End the output signal from the closest RBS is attenuated With this the input signal from both RBSs is kept at the same level at the Far End Manual LBO for Carrier Advised Code In order to manually set the LBO attenuation values in the OMT the operator has to know Carrier Advised Code at the Network Interface NI Line attenuation for the customer cable between the RBS and the NI Example See Table 29 on page 221 Carrier Advise Code at NI is 7 5 dB Line Attenuation between the RBS and the NI is 12 dB RBS Line att 12 dB NI B 7 5 dB P004500A Figure 226 LBO A Long h 0 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB The port B outputs should always have LBO 0 dB Long h 0 dB attenuation for all RBSs Table 29 Line Attenuation dB Carrier Advise Code at NI dB A 0 dB B 7 5 dB C 15dB D 22 5 dB ss b ps pe e zs m m w p _ Manual LBO for maximum input signal level at the Far End In order to manually set the LBO attenuation values in the OMT the operator has to know Maximum input signal level of the equipment at the Far End LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 221 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests Line attenuation between the RBS and the Far End The Line at
14. Installation of RBS 2302 P004384B Figure 110 Routing the alarm cable through the cooling flanges 3 Route the alarm cable according to the figure above down to the interface box through cooling flange number three counting from the right P004383A Figure 111 Mounting the Fan Unit 4 Mount the Fan Unit on the relay bar and fasten it on each side with the screws LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 123 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 P004395A Figure 112 Opening the control box cover 5 Open the control box cover P004394A Figure 113 Adjusting the AC selector switch 6 Adjust the AC selector switch to the correct voltage present 124 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 9 sy a Alarm Cable Z premounted AC Cable poo4489a Figure 114 Cable inlets 7 Adjust the sealing grommet to the AC cable diameter and assemble the inlet details 8 Insert the AC cable through the inlet L Line N Neutral PE Protective Earth Pe P006029A Figure 115 Note Connecting the AC cable and the protective earth PE When connecting the AC cable and the protective earth PE follow the instructions on the
15. P003465A Figure 205 Connecting the ESD wrist strap to the RBS 8 3 Radio Cabinet RBS 2302 8 3 1 Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to familiarize the user with the RBS The location of the Interface is shown and an explanation on how to read the alarms is supplied 8 3 2 Location of the RBS User Interface The RBS user interface including optical indicators power switches and control buttons is located behind the installation box door 192 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests wor Cy ERICSSON zZ 39_0331A Figure 206 Sealing screws and key for the installation box door To open the door loosen the sealing screws and unlock with the key CPU Reset A Fault OK Operational LM Local Mode CAP Reduced capacity T1 Test result for TRX 1 T2 Test result for TRX 2 ON AC power on Battery fault OMT COOCOCOC OO Q C G Transmission External alarm Alarm Local remote Test 13 MHz P003450A Figure 207 RBS user interface 8 3 3 Optical Indicators The purpose of the optical indicators is to provide a quick way of indicating the operational status of the included equipment The general principles are LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 193 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Sit
16. Product Name Mounting Base Cover lid Mounting Plate Set of materials Spare Parts Set Other Available Parts Other Available Parts for RBS 2302 Mechanics Description Excluding Side door for installation box Side door for installation box complete Wall Bracket Pole Mast Fixture set Set for Installation Box Incl Protective covers and screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB 43 59 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts P004623B Figure 16 44 99 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Pos O oa Ww 10 11 Other Available Parts 5 3 Other Available Parts for RBS 2302 Cables Product No RPM 518 974 2 RPM 119 87 1 RPM 518 903 00130 RPM 518 959 1 RPM 518 958 1 RPM 518 962 1 RPM 518 962 3 Product Name Cable with connector Cable with connector Cable with connector Cable with connector Cable with connector Cable with connector Cable with connector Description Coaxial 75 ohm TNC F Jumper N type F Used in Cabinet Internal AC cable For installation box Internal transmission cable 75 alt 100 120 ohm Reversable cable for installation box TXL cable For installation box 4 TRX external cable Optional 6 TRX external cable Optional LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 45 59 All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts P0035
17. Product No SDF 105 11 1 SDF 105 12 2 SDF 105 13 1 SDF 105 10 21 SDF 105 10 22 SDF 105 10 23 SDF 105 10 24 SDF 105 10 25 SDF 105 10 26 NTZ 111 45 02 NTZ 112 86 SH03 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable Sunshields for PBC Product name Description Sun Shield Upper Grey Sun Shield Left Grey Sun Shield Lower Grey Sun Shield Front Grey Sun Shield Front Green Sun Shield Front Blue Sun Shield Front Red Sun Shield Front Ochre Sun Shield Front Yellow Spare Parts Set Rear Sunshield Grey Includes Locking Washers Also included in a complete Mounting Base Spare Parts Set Sun Shield Accessories ncludes front right and left shaft hinge pin and upper end plugs LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 31 59 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P003578A Figure 11 32 99 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 8 Batteries for PBC Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 Batteries See Note Note Local purchase recommended Batteries must comply with the specification document 1301 BKC 861 available from the local Ericsson Company If local purchase not possible use Product No 24 BKC 861 0013 004 Includes 4 batteries LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Syste
18. Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 EMC Board Prior to Replacement 1 ono Me amp amp Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door on the radio cabinet Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the EMC board CAUTION A 77N Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity Open the installation box door on the battery cabinet Ericsson Radio Systems AB 437 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003167A Figure 399 Removing the protective cover 2 Remove the protective cover by loosen the five torx screws P003649B Figure 400 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 3 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD conn
19. The Local Remote button can change a RBS mode to local or remote control The Local Remote button is located on the Distribution Panel DP see Figure 264 on page 319 An RBS in Local Mode cannot communicate with the BSC via the PCM line and is therefore isolated from the BSC The Local Remote button is used to isolate the unit from the BSC for example when exchanging faulty units An RBS cannot be changed to Remote Mode until the database has been downloaded to the Distribution Switch Board DXB See QJ OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 CPU Reset A Fault OK Operational LM Local Mode CAP Reduced capacity T1 Test result for TRX1 __ T2 Test result for TRX 2 ON AC power on Battery fault External alarm OMT L n A Ag Keli oocoocooo0oo0oo0oo0oO Q Transmission Alarm Local remote Test CI G 13 MHz 0 O P003450A Figure 264 Distribution Panel Changing the RBS from Remote to Local Mode Note The Local Mode indicator must be in mode OFF before any action is done 1 Press the Local Remote button LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 319 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 2 6 320 488 2 The Local Mode indicator starts flashing to indicate that a change of RBS mode is in progress 3 The Operational indicator turns off to indicate that the RBS has been taken out of opera
20. The extended OMT is an option With the extended OMT cable the RBS can be accessed without having to climb a ladder if the RBS is mounted on a pole or mast 1 Dismantle the extended OMT cable and mount the cable inlet see Section 5 10 4 on page 84 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 5 10 9 Ext OMT QCQOQOOOOHOOO0O0O E 55555550 5 0505050 Et JOO OOO OO OF COO COCO OHOOOD es E PC OMT_IN_P OMT_OUT_N OMT_IN_N OMT_OUT_P White_X33 3 White_X33 1 Blue_X33 2 Orange_X33 4 P003258B Figure 2 Note 80 Connecting the extended OMT cable Mount the wires to the termination block The two white wires are from two different twin pairs and should not be mixed Closing the Interface Box Figure 1 81 Closing the interface box P003144A Remount the interface box cover by screwing the 8 torx screws back into position Push the interface box upwards and screw the two torx screws situated on the mounting base back into position LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 103 488 Installation of RBS 2302 5 11 Mounting the Power Supply Adapter Optional The RBS 2302 cabinet is delivered with a premounted internal battery In order to use a Power and Battery Cabinet together with the RBS the internal battery must be
21. 01_0354A Figure 10 Climbing the ladder LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 39 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Safety Instructions Climb the ladder facing it When you lean sideways outward from the ladder your navel should never be outside the edge of the ladder s frame Always keep 3 points of contact two feet and one hand two hands one foot with the ladder when working on it This will reduce the risk of falling Never climb the topmost four rungs of a ladder If you have to climb up on a roof the ladder should extend at least one meter above the eaves 2 5 Radio Frequency Radiation CAUTION Radio frequency RF radiation from antenna systems can endanger your health Co ordinate with all mast users to switch off the transmitters when working with or near antennas 2 6 Other Hazards Fire WARNING A Fire may spread to neighboring rooms When working on a radio base station you may have to open cable ducts channels and access holes thereby interfering with the fire sectioning of the building 40 488 Close the cable ducts and fire doors if applicable as soon as possible After completing work on cables seal the cable ducts according to the regulations for the building Minimize the amount of inflammable material Avoid storing empty packaging material on the site Use a powder or carbon dioxide type of fire extinguisher due to the el
22. 3 The RBS will then remain in Local Mode with the communication link disconnected and the Local Mode indicator on Shut down Sequence This is the shut down sequence for RBS 2302 1 Set the RBS to Local Mode Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 2 WY switch AC power Battery switch P003146A Figure 265 Battery and AC power switch in the RBS DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal Note When the AC power supply is turned off with the AC power switch in the RBS there is still AC voltage both on the AC board in the interface box and on the connection board in the installation box up to the power switch 2 Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position 3 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 6 on page 323 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 321 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 322 488 P003174A Figure 266 Battery and AC switch in the PBC DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal Note When the AC powe
23. Fault Fault type No 0 1 PCM sync no usable PCM reference 15 AO TF external condition map class 2 Fault Fault type No 0 1 PCM sync no usable PCM reference 15 AO TF replacement unit map Not used See Section SO CF replacement unit map on page 296 for possible HW causing the fault AO TX internal fault map class 1A Fault Fault type Remark No 0 TX offending R6 and later 302 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Fault No 47 Fault type AO TX internal fault map class 1B Fault No OMAN DUN FPwWN KF OO NN NY NN NWN DN RRR RRR Re NYDN ONFPWNrR TO WAN DN FW WN 47 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault type CU not usable CDU VSWR limits exceeded CDU output power limits exceeded TX antenna VSWR limits exceeded TX EEPROM checksum fault TX configuration table checksum fault TX synthesizer A B unlocked TX synthesizer C unlocked Astra Tracy communication fault TX internal voltage fault TX high temperature TX output power limits exceeded TX saturation Voltage supply fault Power unit not ready TX initiation fault CU HW fault CU SW load start fault CU input power fault CU park fault VSWR Output power supervision lost CU reset power on CU reset communication fault CU reset watchdog CU fine tuning fault TX maximum power restricted TX Auxiliary Equipment Fault Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rig
24. Faulty unit Observations and external factors RBS type Customer Company Corporate ID Information about installation date logfiles and modification requirements P005537C Figure 413 OMT fault log The Blue tag If there is a OMT fault log it should be sent in with the Blue Tag on the faulty unit Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 13 13 1 Product Data Product Data This chapter describes the hardware units for a RBS 2302 site It will form a basis for the site requirements Additional information can be found in QJ Reference Manual Radio Base Station RBS 2302 LZN 302 77 LOE 7g a RBS 2302 Pole mounted RBS 2302 Wall mounted P003145A Figure 414 RBS 2302 RBS 2302 is a member of the RBS 2000 family of base stations It is a small Micro base station that can be placed in both outdoor and indoor environment The base station contains one or two low power transceivers and can be equipped with integrated antennas Integrated sector or omnidirectional antennas are available for that purpose The purpose of the RBS as a stand alone product is to supply hot spot capacity in small areas Versions are available for the 900 1800 and 1900 MHz bands The RBS consists of the following main units Mounting base e Cabinet Antenna options omnidirec
25. International Electric Commission Inter Face Box Internal Interface Switch Internal Fault Map Class 1A Internal Fault Map Class 1B Internal Fault Map Class 2A Joint Technical Committee Local Area Network Link Access Procedures on D channel LAPD is the data link layer layer 2 protocol used for communication between the BSC and the BTS on the Abis interface Abis layer 2 is sometimes used synonymously with LAPD Line Build Out Light Emitting Diode Line Loop Back Low Noise Amplifier The local bus offers communication between a central main RU DXU and distributed main RUs TRU and ECU When the RU is in RU mode Local it is not prepared for BSC communication Using the Local Remote switch an operator orders the RU to enter Local or Remote mode Loss Of Frame Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Glossary Logical Channel A logical channel represents a specified portion of the informationcarrying capacity of a physical channel GSM defines two major categories of logical channels TCHs Traffic CHannels for speech or user data CCHs Control CHannels for control signalling gt Physical Channel gt Channel Combination Logical RU A unit which can be referred to but is not a single physical unit There are three different kinds of logical RUs 1 Buses 2 Antennas 3 Environment LOS Loss Of Signal LV
26. P003146A Figure 88 AC power and battery switches Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 107 488 Installation of RBS 2302 1 Make sure that the AC power and battery switches are in the OFF position Internal Transmission cable x22 002 Internal AC cable P003457A Figure 89 Connecting cables between cabinet and mounting base Cabinet 100 120 ohm Cabinet 75 ohm Secured P003614B Figure 90 Transmission cable 108 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P003773A Figure 91 Connecting the HDSL modem cables 2 Connect the transmission cable Without HDSL e Connect the transmission cable between the connection board and the cabinet If a 75 Q transmission system is used insert the cable end marked Cabinet 75 ohm into the cabinet If a 100 120 2 transmission system is used insert the cable end marked Cabinet 120 ohm into the cabinet Secure it with the slide latch See Figure 89 on page 108and Figure 90 on page 108 With HDSL e Connect the cables from the HDSL door to the respective connector X5 and X8 See Figure 91 on page 109 3 Connect the internal AC cable between the connection board and the cabinet P004
27. P003948A Measure that 115 230 V is present at the connector to the internal AC cable to verify that the connection board is not defective 340 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Table 61 Maintenance P003949A Measure that 115 230 V is present at the connector of the internal AC cable attached to the radio cabinet to verify that the internal AC cable is undamaged If voltage is present replace the radio cabinet Battery Fault Case 1 Internal Backup Battery Case 2 External Power and Battery Cabinet with PSA and AC switch PBC LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 If the yellow LED is lit 24 V supply is missing in the radio cabinet Cause the PSA or the battery is disconnected or low battery voltage in the internal battery If the cabinet has been powered with backup battery it might take up to 24 hours until the battery is fully charged and the LED will turn off ON AC power on a AC power Battery switch switch P003950A Confirm that the battery switch is in the ON position and that AC voltage is present so that the backup battery has not run for so long that it is empty If the battery is faulty it must be replaced 7 OPERATIONANOS FAULT g D AC power switch Battery switch P003952A Ericsson Radio Systems AB 341 488 All Ri
28. P004018A l N al Ma OPERATIONAL Q FAULT P004019A Maintenance P004245A Measure that 155 230 V is present at the connector to the internal AC cable to verify that the EMC board is not faulty P004270A Measure that 155 230 V is present at the connector of the internal AC cable attached to the battery cabinet to verify that the internal AC cable is not faulty If voltage is present replace the battery cabinet AC DC Fault Replace the Cabinet DC DC Overload 1 Take the site out of service according to Section 12 3 9 on page 331 2 On the DC Surge board check the X5 connector and the 48 V DC connector to the antenna for shortcircuits After clearing any shortcircuits start up the PBC e If no alarm appears put the site into service according to Section 12 3 10 on page 334 e f alarm appears replace the Cabinet LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 347 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Ly Vly DC DC Fault Replace the Cabinet OPERATIONAL FAULT P004020A Battery Fault Defective batteries or charging circuits are malfunctioning Replace the batteries power cabinet l Nw Na OPERATIONAL O O FAULT P004021A Battery Disconnected Inspect and verify that all battery cables are connected and that they are intact Check that the automatic circuit break
29. 1 The received signal is measured and the Line Attenuation is calculated in the RBS and can be monitored with the OMT The displayed value is in deci dB 10 deci dB 1 dB 2 From the Line Attenuation and the maximum input signal level at the Far End appropriate LBO value is set automatically Example for Stand Alone The maximum input signal level at the Far End is 15 dB Line Attenuation is not known LBO A Long h ALBO 15 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB Example for Multidrop The maximum input signal level at the Far End is 15 dB Line Attenuation is not known Settings in order to find out the line attenuation between RBS 1 and RBS 2 RBS 1 RBS 2 LBO A Long h ALBO 15 dB Long h ALBO 0 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB Long h 0 dB To enable measuring the line attenuation RBS 2 must be reset The measurement result can be monitored with the OMT When the measurement is completed change to manual LBO and use the values according to Table 30 on page 222 Manual LBO with Multidrop The purpose of setting the LBO parameters in multidrop configurations is to assure that the signal level will not be affected if one or several of the RBSs are in Bypass State powered off or reset Automatic or manual LBO can be used between the Far End and RBS 1 port A as in the Stand Alone case The LBO at port A in the other RBSs must be set manually The LBO parameter at port A of RBS 2 should be set as if RBS 1 was in Bypass State For
30. 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 164 17 17 18 18 3i PCM TS oof oo On Oo DCP 128 429 RXOTRX 130 0 0 131 4 139_IRXOTRX 133 4 0 1 128 159 RXOTRX 130 10 131 132 RXOTRX 133 128 RXOTRX 129 130 20 131 RXOTRX 132 A 133 P004991A Figure 250 An example of a 2 TRX cabinet This is an example of how the exchange data can be arranged for three cascade connected 2 TRX cabinets Definition of Managed Objects 278 488 Command Command Command Command Command Command Ericsson Radio Systems AB RXMOI MO RXOTG 0 COMB HYB RSITE SITE1 SWVER swver RXMOI MO RXOCF 0 TEI 62 RXMOI MO RXOIS 0 RXMOI MO RXOTF 0 TFMODE SA RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 0 TEI 0 DCP1 128 DCP2 129 amp 130 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 1 TEI 1 DCP1 131 DCP2 132 amp 133 All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration RXMOI MO RXOTX 0 0 amp 1 BAND GSM MPWR 40 RXMOI MO RXORX 0 0 amp 1 BAND GSM RXD AB RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 0 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 1 0 am
31. 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 225 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 15 2 226 488 Green Yellow Yellow GARRESEA PAAA a 12345678 P003777C Figure 230 Location of DIP switches LEDs and connectors Table 31 Connector selections for the different link choices HDSL modem Configurations DIP switches HDSL upstream one pair J1 and J2 Table 34 on On On Off page 228 HDSL upstream two pairs JI and J2 Table 34 on On On On page 228 HDSL upstream one Ji and J2 Table 34 on On On Off pair PCM downstream page 228 HDSL upstream two JI and J2 Table 34 on On On On pairs PCM downstream page 228 HDSL upstream HDSL J3 and J4 Table 33 on On On On downstream cascade page 227 PCM upstream HDSL J5 and J6 Table 34 on On Off On downstream one pair page 228 PCM upstream HDSL J5 and J6 Table 34 on On On On downstream two pairs page 228 For ETSI see Table 35 on page 229 Default settings are J3 and J4 If the configuration has been changed the marking of the cover must be updated LED Indicators The LEDs of the HDSL Modem Unit has the following functions Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 15 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation T
32. 59 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable P003574B Figure 2 12 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable 3 2 Power and Battery Cabinet PBC Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 BMK 905 01 1 Battery Cabinet Not including Mounting Base and Battery LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 13 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable P004223A Figure 3 14499 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable 3 3 Optional HDSL Unit for RBS 2302 3 3 1 HDSL Unit Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 ZAT 759 19 101 Modem Complete side door for RBS 2302 Including HDSL modem and internal cables LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 15 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable This page is intentionally left blank 03_0211 16 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable About this Chapter All spare
33. 6 Replace the cabinet lt ee ee 5 Calibrate OK Fault indicator status Off On 8 9 Contact the supervisor Test after corrective action P003612A Figure 352 Internal Synchronization fault localization 1 Locate the faulty Radio cabinet Locate the faulty Radio cabinet according to the work order information 2 Display fault information The fault status of RBS can be determined in two ways eThe red LED indicator labelled Fault on the DP indicates that one or more faults have been detected in the radio cabinet eUse OMT to display faults in the RBS Use OMT to monitor the radio cabinet For more information on the use of OMT see QJ OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 3 Sync Fault Is the alarm Timing Unit VCO ageing in the internal fault map class 2A or Timing unit VCO fault in the internal map class 1A 4 Calibrate the cabinet oscillator LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 407 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 408 488 Calibrate the optional reference oscillator according to instructions in Section 12 7 7 on page 448 Replace the Cabinet Replace the radio cabinet according to instruction in page 377 Calibration OK Is the calibration OK Fault indicator status The red LED indicator labelled Fault on the DP indicates that one or more faults have been detected within the radio cabinet Contact the supervisor Contact the super
34. 8 4 3 198 488 P003174A Figure 210 Location of the control panel in the PBC Control panel OPERATIONAL FAULT Batt Power P003220A Figure 211 PBC control panel Optical Indicators The LED indicators give the following information on the current system status valid for the PBC alarms Table 18 Explanation of the LED indicators Operational Green Fault Red Classification ON OFF OK OFF ON SEVERE ON ON WARNING POWER Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Alarm Display Site Installation Tests The alarms are shown as fault codes on the display The display is divided into three display elements Element 1 D1 Element 2 D2 Element 3 D3 Control Buttons Unit number The unit number is used to identify the faulty unit 0 PBC Unit numbers 1 9 are not used for RBS 2302 Alarm class The alarm is classified according to the degree of severity There are two Classified alarms and one Not classified alarm 0 Not classified used for historical alarms 1 Severe 2 Warning Fault code from the PBC See Table 21 on page 204 or Command that will be executed See Table 22 on page 204 The push buttons on the display panel are used for stepping through the fault codes selecting commands Table 19 Control buttons on the display panel Control button Up Down Menu
35. All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 10 1 10 10 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration Setting the RBS in remote mode Follow this procedure if you want to set the RBS in remote mode Push the Local Remote button on the RBS to change mode The Local Remote mode indicator will start flashing to indicate that the mode has been changed and will keep flashing until contact has been established with the BSC then the MO CF has been taken into service Wait until contact has been established with the BSC the Local mode indicator will then be turned off If contact has not been established within ten minutes turn off the power to the RBS and try again The RBS commissioning staff must have contact with the BSC staff Reference DT files The initial data for all internal cells is in DT file 83000 The external cell data is in DT file 83500 Data for each cell and TG are in DT files 85xxx and 87xxx where xxx is a consecutive number indicating the site Neighboring cell data for each cell are in DT files 86xxx where xxx is a consecutive number indicating the site Data for definition of Abis paths is in the DT file 94xxx Ericsson Radio Systems AB 277 488 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 10 10 3 Example of Exchange data for a 2 TRX cabinets GS ETRBLT 0 RBLT PCM DEV TS 1 1 gt 2 24 3 34 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 a 10 10 11
36. All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 6 8 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003737A Figure 407 Removing the DC Surge board 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Unscrew all screws holding the DC Surge board Mount the new board and tighten the screws Plug in all connection terminal blocks Install the 48V DC cable Remove the ESD wrist strap Mount the cover and tighten the screws Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws Set to Operation 1 2 3 4 5 Switch on the AC Mains Power switch Switch on the AC and Battery switch on the battery cabinet Switch on the AC and Battery switch on the radio cabinet Set the radio cabinet to Remote Mode Close and tighten the installation box doors Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 AC Board Prior to replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door for the radio cabinet Set the RBS to Local Mode Ericsson Radio Systems AB 443 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 444 488 Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 2 N AnA Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the AC board DANGER A
37. CORRECT OX g L NOT ALLOWED P004014A Figure 180 Connecting cable lugs to batteries Note Make sure that the cable lugs are properly mounted If mounted incorrectly the lugs may break Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003319A Figure 181 Installing battery 1 Note Always remember to put on the protective caps to cover the battery poles after each connection Note Remove the precutted tape covering the inlet to the ventilations hose on all batteries 3 Install battery 1 and connect the cable coming from the battery switch panel to the plus pole P003320A Figure 182 Connecting the first and second battery 4 Install battery 2 5 Connect the battery jumper cable between battery 1 and battery 2 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 167 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003321B Figure 183 Connecting the ventilation hose 6 Connect the ventilation hose to battery 1 and 2 and guide it to the ventilation outlet down left at the bottom of the cabinet P003429B Figure 184 Connecting battery 3 and 4 7 Install battery 3 and 4 8 Conn
38. High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal P003730A Figure 408 Loosening the interface box 1 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003744A Figure 409 Loosening the interface box cover 2 Open the cover of the interface box by loosening the 9 torx screws P003649B Figure 410 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 3 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box 4 Remove the connection terminal blocks connected to the AC board LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 445 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003690A Figure 411 Removing the AC board 5 Remove the Protective Earth from the installation box 6 Unscrew the six torx screws holding the AC board 7 Replace the AC board and remount the six screws including the Protective Earth 8 Remount the two AC connection terminal blocks 9 Remove the ESD wrist strap 10 Remount the cover of the interface box and tighten the screws 11 Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws Set to Operation
39. Inner and outer shield Inner shield to the pull relief clamp and the outer shield to the cable gland see Figure 53 on page 86 alternative Inner shield to the termination block and the outer shield to the cable gland see Figure 54 on page 87 Inner shield only Shield to the pull relief clamp see Figure 55 on page 87 Outer shield only Shield to the cable gland see Figure 56 on page 88 The figures below show the corresponding connections POO6561A Figure 53 Inner and outer shield earthing via the pull relief clamp and the cable gland Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Figure 54 P006562B Inner and outer shield alternative earthing via the termination block and the cable gland Figure 55 Inner shield only earthing via the pull relief clamp Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 87 488 P006674A Installation of RBS 2302 P006563A Figure 56 Outer shield only earthing via the cable gland 5 10 5 Connecting the PCM cable Different types of cables can be used for the PCM transmission depending on the transmission to the RBS These cables are presented below The pre assembled 75 Q coaxial cable with DC isolation that can be ordered as an option for 75 Q tran
40. Separate the rear sunshield from the mounting base 27 Mount the new rear sunshield and the new locking washers 28 Remount the mounting base on the mounting plate 29 Tighten the four nuts holding the mounting base 30 Reconnect the earth cable to the mounting base 31 Mount the gland plate and fasten the screws 32 Insert the AC cable and connect the Protective Earth Note You have ten seconds to reinstall the PCM terminal blocks see step 33 on page 366 33 Disconnect the connection board CB21 and remount the connection terminal block for the PCM line on the transmission board 34 Remount the remaining connection terminal blocks 35 Remount the cover of the interface box and tighten the screws 36 Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws 37 To remount the cabinet on the mounting base see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 366 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 5 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Set to Operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 367 2 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC Battery switch to ON position 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 Switch the Battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode Test after corrective action
41. and the green LED OPERATO O O Aus Operational is lit this indicates Warning and a one or more units needs service or i mt replacement Use Table 64 on page 345 Fault 5004240 code list to solve the problem xiz If the green LED Operational is lit but not the OPERATIONAL O _OFAUE red LED Fault this means that the Power and rn Battery Cabinet is operational and that no o l affecting alarms are active None of the two LEDs Operational or Fault OPERATIONAL Q Orum are lit Possible causes VT Vv 1 P004241A LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 P004270A 1 The battery cabinet has no power and the batteries have been discharged Check if 115 230 V is present to the battery cabinet by measuring on the internal AC cable Ericsson Radio Systems AB 343 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003944B 2 The fuses are damaged and the batteries have been discharged Turn off the Mains switch and the AC switch on the battery cabinet Measure the resistance of the fuses with a multimeter to verify that they are undamaged The reistance should be 0 Q P004271A 3 The display cable is faulty If there is 115 230 V present to the battery cabinet verify that the display cable is properly connected and functional This is done by measuring the resistance from pin to pin 344 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved
42. performance of the base station Non destruction refers to a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 5 5 days in a three year period Vibrations The base station withstands vibrations below 0 5 G and shocks below 25 G Acoustic Noise The base station does not emit any acoustic noise Power Supply The RBS can be connected to the nominal mains supply voltages in Table 77 on page 462 The base station shall be connected to a dedicated circuit in the power distribution board The circuit shall be fused with a single fuse if the circuit is between phase and neutral and two fuses if the circuit is between two phases Note All units must be connected to the same phase Note Fuse value must not exceed 10 A The power distribution cable shall have two power supply conductors and one protective earth conductor Conductor size and distribution fuse s must be according to applicable electrical regulations Connections are made on terminals in the interface box on the mounting base The terminal will accept wires having a maximum area of 2 5 mm The mains voltage is connected between two of the terminals The third terminal is a screw terminal on the body used for protective earth The cable gland has capacity for one power cable with an outer sheath diameter of 7 15 mm Ericsson Radio Systems AB 461 488 All Rights Reserved Product Data 13 1 12 462 488 Note A
43. 1 RPM 518 974 2 SEB 104 19 2 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 7 Product No 24 BKC 861 0013 004 BKV 301 321 1 BKB 191 2022 1 BMK 905 01 1 BMY 908 04 1 KRC 161 31 022 KRC 161 31 024 KRC 161 31 032 KRC 161 31 054 KRC 161 31 056 KRC 161 31 064 KRC 161 31 088 KRC 161 31 090 KRC 161 31 094 KRE 101 1556 KRE 101 1557 KRE 101 1558 KRE 101 1559 KRE 101 1560 KRE 101 1561 KRF 201 439 1 NTM 192 08 2 NTZ 111 44 01 NTZ 111 44 02 NTZ 111 44 03 NTZ 111 44 04 NTZ 111 44 05 NTZ 111 44 06 NTZ 111 44 07 NTZ 111 44 08 NTZ 111 45 01 NTZ 111 45 02 NTZ 111 45 03 NTZ 111 45 04 NTZ 111 45 05 NTZ 111 45 06 NTZ 112 86 BA01 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Page 33 25 23 13 23 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 43 49 21 25 25 25 29 29 43 29 37 31 35 35 35 37 41 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Numerical index for RBS 2302 Numerical index for RBS 2302 57 59 Numerical index for RBS 2302 NTZ 112 86 FU01 NTZ 112 86 FU02 NTZ 112 86 SH03 RPM 119 87 1 RPM 518 903 00130 RPM 518 952 1 RPM 518 956 1 RPM 518 958 1 RPM 518 959 1 RPM 518 962 1 RPM 518 962 3 RPM 518 966 1 RPM 518 966 2 RPM 518 974 2 RTK 993 4147 44 RTK 994 04 1 RTK 994 04 7 SEA 910 06 1 SEB 104 19 2 SEB 112 1017 2 SEB 114 100 2 SDD 513 0100 1 SDD 513 0120 1 SDF 105 09 1 SDF 105 09 2 SDF 105 09 3 SDF 105 09 4 SDF 105 09 5 SDF 105 09 6 SDF 105 11 1 SDF 105 12 1 SDF 105 12 2 SDF 105
44. 11 17 7 9 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests 12 Press the TOP soft key and enter 1 2 for topscale and press ENTER 13 Wait while the Site Master calculates 8 sec For feeder length measurements proceed with steps 14 to 15 For fault finding proceed with step 16 14 Identify the near and the far end of the feeder 15 Place markers on the near and the far end and note the difference between the markers see examples in Section 7 7 on page 183 Enter the difference as the feeder length in the Test Record see Figure 203 on page 189 Proceed with step 20 to 21 If the SWR Test indicated reflections that are too large proceed with the following steps to locate the fault 16 Press the LIMIT soft key and enter 1 05 as the limit and press ENTER Note Ensure that Limit is not in the OFF mode 17 Observe the waveform and look for reflections above 1 05 SWR 31 5 dB RL Note The antenna may have a greater reflection than 1 05 SWR but the system is still approved as long as the cables are below the limit 18 Identify the fault see examples in Section 7 7 on page 183 and correct the fault 19 Start the measurement again and check that no reflections are above 1 05 SWR 31 5 dB RL 20 Save the measurement by pressing the SAVE DISPLAY key The saved display can later be used for the cable attenuation calculation see Section 7 9 on page 187 21 Type in a unique trace name using the alpha numeri
45. 13 1 SDF 105 10 1 SDF 105 10 2 SDF 105 10 3 SDF 105 10 4 SDF 105 10 5 SDF 105 10 6 SDF 105 10 21 SDF 105 10 22 58 59 37 29 21 45 51 51 45 45 45 45 47 47 45 53 53 53 47 49 43 43 43 49 19 19 19 19 19 19 21 21 31 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 31 31 37 31 49 31 31 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 SDF 105 10 23 SDF 105 10 24 SDF 105 10 25 SDF 105 10 26 SDF 105 21 2 ZAT 759 19 101 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 31 31 31 31 49 15 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Numerical index for RBS 2302 59 59
46. 14 Mounting the Sunshields 7 Batt l Cabinet E2 Upper sunshield Left sunshield Installation box Interface box Mounting base Front sunshield Lower sunshield P003439A Figure 189 Main units 6 14 1 Upper Sunshield I t LLL oT by Cl Figure 190 Mounting the upper sunshield 1 Hook on the upper sunshield on the left side 2 Push it down until it snaps into position 3 Seal the two holes intended for the handle with the supplied screw plugs LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 171 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Note The plugs are to be screwed not pressed 6 14 2 Left Sunshield P003812A Figure 191 Mounting the left sunshield 1 Tilt the sunshield to the right and hook it on to the cabinet 2 Push the sunshield forward so that it clears from the hinges 3 Push on the lower left part of the sunshield until it snaps into 6 14 3 Lower Sunshield position P003201A Figure 192 Mounting the lower sunshield Note The lower sunshield can only be mounted if the left sunshield is mounted 1 Hook on the lower sunshield on the cabinets left side 172 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302
47. 2 3 5 2 4 66 488 P003465A Figure 21 Connecting the ESD wrist strap Preconditions for wall mounted RBS 2302 Make sure that the selected bolt is suitable for the type of wall material that the cabinet is to be mounted on e Make sure that the wall surface is even Preconditions for pole mounted RBS 2302 The pole must have the required dimension 60 114 mm in diameter Documents Ensure that the following documents are available Filled in and approved record prepared during site preparation Site installation documentation prepared by the Installation Engineering department QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 Tools and Instruments The tools needed for the RBS 2302 installation may be found in the chapter Tools and Instruments Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 3 5 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Table 5 Recommended Torque Torang Notes 80 7 7 1 0 6 e for e a covers 190 15 16 8 1 3 for aaa covers Overview The recommended installation procedure includes the following activities Unpack and verify against the packing list that the correct material has been delivered Mount the RBS 2302 mounting plate Mount the RBS 2302 mounting base Mount the Power Supply Adapter if applicable Connect earth and lightni
48. 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Introduction 1 Introduction P003783A Figure 1 RBS 2302 and PBC wallmounted The RBS 2302 is a high quality micro base station which enables a simpler site search process whilst at the same time allowing for cost efficient implementations of high capacity radio networks This makes the RBS 2302 very landlord friendly and easy to place wherever you need it The RBS 2302 can be mounted on a pole like a lamp post or in an antenna tower or directly on the wall In itself the RBS 2302 is a complete BTS site including transmission integrated power supply optionally integrated antennas and a optional battery backed power supply The RBS 2302 User s Guide consists of the chapters listed below A brief summary of the chapters is presented Introduction This chapter Safety Contains information that shows the system used for presenting safety instructions Tools and Instruments Contains lists of all recommended tools and instruments Site Planning and Requirements Describes the installation engineering process for the RBS 2302 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 17 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Introduction 1 1 18 488 Installation of RBS 2302 Describes activities for the installation of the mounting base connection of cables external antenna and mounting the radio
49. 7 5 dB between 0 and 22 5 dB 8 14 1 Defining Short Haul parameters Short Haul Find out the cable length between the RBS and DSX 1 Yes o Find out the cable length between the RBSs Define LBO parameters with the OMT Short Haul Install the IDB P004486A Figure 220 Defining Short Haul 0 655 feet The purpose of the Short Haul functionality is to reach a signal level of 0 dB at the DSX 1 cross connect point LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 217 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 218 488 The length of the cable between the RBS and the DSX 1 must be known to be able to perform Short Haul If DSX 1 is not used choose 0 133 feet RBS gt __ 3to 6dB 0 655 feet dm Short Haul P004495A Figure 221 The Short Haul principle In order to reach 0 dB at the cross connect point DSX 1 level the PCM port output signal can be amplified in five different levels In the OMT the signal level is chosen according to the cable length between the RBS and the DSX 1 interface The reference cable is a multi pair 22 AWG office cable with overall outer shield The following values are supported 0 133 feet 133 266 feet 266 399 feet 399 533 feet 533 655 feet DSX 1 RBS 1 RBS 2 200 feet lt 100 feet P004496A Figure 222 The Short Haul Multidrop principle Example LBO pa
50. 7 8 on page 186 3 Perform a DTF measurement on the X3 feeder system Table 14 Start and stop frequencies for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems System oS Hi Stop freq MHz GSM 900 GSM 1800 1710 1880 GSM 1900 1850 1990 184 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests Measurement examples m DTF DTF2 ANTENNA CALON LIMON 130 POINTS RECALL M LELLE 0 0 DIST m 50 0 ALL M1 1 06 42 2m M3 OFF OFF M2 OFF M4 OFF P007397A Figure 201 Example of an approved Antenna System DTF DTF4 BAD CONN CALON LIMON 259 POINTS RECALL M fe elelele 0 0 DIST m 50 0 ALL M1 1 06 42 2m M3 OFF M2 OFF M4 OFF P007399A Figure 202 Example of an unapproved Antenna System with a bad connector at the antenna jumper 7 7 2 Entering Cable Parameters To achieve accurate DTF test results the correct cable parameters must be entered Enter the velocity factor and attenuation dB m for the cable type in the feeder system 1 Press MODE and select DTF SWR by using the Up Down arrow key Press ENTER LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 185 488 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests 2 Press the DTF AID soft key 3 Use the Up Down arrow key to select CABLE LOSS Press ENTER 4 Enter the cable loss in dB per metre see table below for the type of cable being teste
51. 8 3 5 Power Switches in the RBS A AC power Battery switch switch P003146A Figure 208 Power switches in the RBS 196 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal Note When the AC power supply is turned off with the power switch in the RBS there is still AC voltage both on the AC board in the interface box and on the connection board in the installation box up to the AC power switch 8 4 Power and Battery Cabinet Optional 8 4 1 Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to familiarize the user with the Power and Battery Cabinet PBC The location of the control panel is shown and an explanation on how to read the alarms and executed command on the PBC display is supplied 8 4 2 Location of the PBC Control Panel The PBC control panel including optical indicators power switches and control buttons is located behind the installation box door P003166A Figure 209 Sealing screws and key for the installation box door To open the door loosen the screws and unlock with the key LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 197 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests
52. AB All Rights Reserved 73 488 Installation of RBS 2302 P003151A Figure 32 Placing the mounting plate correctly 4 Place the mounting plate at the correct height on the pole and mount the clamp halves 5 Make sure that the washers are mounted correctly see Figure 31 on page 73 6 Mount the screws and tighten them alternately right and left side in order to avoid bending the screws 5 6 Mounting the Mounting Base P003127A Figure 33 Mounting the mounting base on the mounting plate 1 Mount the mounting base on the four screws situated on the mounting plate Ensure that the fastening screws are properly fitted in the key holes 74 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 7 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Locking Nut Fastening screws Distance Nut Inner Nut Fastening screws Locking Nut Distance Nut A Nut P003484A Figure 34 Adjusting the distance nuts 2 Alter the vertical inclination of the mounting base relative to the mounting plate by adjusting the four distance nuts This can only be done with the mounting base dismounted The locking nuts may remain on the fastening screws Note Do not loosen the inner nuts The inner nuts secure the fastening screws in the mounting plate 3 When the mounting base is correctly adjusted ti
53. BTS Repair Delivery Note Blue Tag When a faulty unit is returned it must always be accompanied by a repair delivery note When the repair delivery note has been completed it must be attached to the faulty unit before sending it for repair The repair delivery note LZF 084 84 can be ordered from the local FSC A repair delivery note is presented in chapter Maintenance Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Optional Tests Optional Tests Preconditions These tests are already performed in the factory and are therefore optional Previous Tests Before performing any optional test make sure all tests in chapter Site Installation Tests have been performed successfully Tester qualifications This instruction is intended for testers with experience of the simulator The tester should also have knowledge of the different types of base stations in the RBS 2000 family and be familiar with the different cell and link configurations that the base stations might have Electrostatic Discharge Always use an approved antistatic bracelet to avoid damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies P003465A Figure 235 Connecting the ESD wrist strap to the RBS Ericsson Radio Systems AB 241 488 All Rights Reserved Optional Tests 9 2 MS Call Test using BSC Si
54. Connecting Earth and Lightning Protection 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 6 10 Connecting External Cables cccccccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessennaeeees 151 6 10 1 Opening the Interface BOX scsi cise cee ceieecce eects elvereconiuasiie sakes eects 152 6 10 2 Connection the AC Mains cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeee 154 All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 6 10 3 Loosening the Interface Box Gland Plate e cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 156 6 10 4 Assembling the Cable Gland ccccccsceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeees 157 6 10 5 Connecting the 24 V DC Power Supply Adapter ceeeee 158 6 10 6 Connecting the Alarm Cable ccccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeennaeeees 159 6 10 7 Closing the Interface BOX iaicacecico uta eis eed 160 611 MOUnTING INE CADINGT s sess e cee eaaa E AAA 160 6 12 Connecting Internal Cables ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeees 163 6 13 Installing the Batteries ct orci tat bo seaedete bce erttene teehee duate voateseBhe eben tutes 164 6 14 Mounting the SunSniGla sete citsess cc cccntanincianitesiuieadeeaieadoneiebeatentiaciinied 171 6 14 1 Upper SUMS lie aioe se ice dart ese ected egeciga fact edeh seen areelenn ap dease 171 6 14 2 Left SunSMIGlO wacttee cee Mat iit een anna aire eaten ale 172 6 14 3 Lower SUnSIIGIA sis cles dscns e a E ea a a Aa a Ee 172 6 14 4 Fron
55. Connecting External Cables Antenna System Tests e Subsection Anritsu Site Master has been updated minor changes Site Installation Tests Information regarding the use of ESD wrist strap added In section Test Sequence there have been structural changes In section Test Sequence the subsection Flowchart has been updated In section Test Sequence the subsection formerly called Multidrop has changed name to Network Configuration Also the information has been updated In section Test Sequence the subsection formerly called LBO Parameter Settings T1 has been divided into to subsections Define PCM Parameters E1 120 2 and Define PCM Parameters T1 100 2 Also the information has been updated In section Test Sequence the subsection Network Integration Test has been updated and moved to the new chapter RBS Site Integration In section Test Sequence the subsection Handover Test has been updated and moved to the new chapter RBS Site Integration In section Test Sequence the subsection HDSL Configuration has been updated and moved here from chapter Installation of RBS 2302 Optional Tests Information regarding the use of ESD wrist strap added The subsection Test through HDSL using the MS and BSC Simulator has been added Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 1 4 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction RBS Site Integration This
56. Fan Unit Test i Check IDB Define Tei T1Type of SE PCM Define PCM parameters T1 100Q Define PCM parameters Yes HDSL Configuration Install IDB Fault Status Reading External Alarm Tests Battery Backup Test Battery Backup Test RBS with internal battery RBS with extemal battery PBC Concluding Routines Figure 216 Flowchart P006116D Ericsson Radio Systems AB Site Installation Tests 207 488 Site Installation Tests 8 9 AC Mains Power Test DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal 1 Make sure that the correct nominal AC mains voltage 115 230 V has been selected See description in chapter Product Data 2 Switch on the incoming AC Mains Power Make sure that all external AC switches are in ON position 3 Measure with a multimeter to verify that the RBS has correct voltage on the AC terminal in the interface box P003945A 4 Measure with a multimeter to verify that the PBC has correct voltage on the AC terminal in the interface box P004244A 208 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests 8 10 Fan Unit Test If a Fan Unit is used perform the test accord
57. Fault Cases and External Alarms cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeees 314 12 2 Maintenance General for RBS 2302 cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeees 315 1220 CTU OCICHON asec chalet ee RS 2 es EAs SI rate as ee A 315 12 2 2 Location of the RBS User Interface cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 315 1232 9 Optical IMGIGatOrs ienien eee e a aa E i 316 12 2 4 Switches and COnnectosrs cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeees 318 12 2 5 Changing the RBS Local Remote Mode cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 319 12 26 Sh t down Seq Ese eei lati tras od ae iets cae ees pec dah es ET EES 320 12 2 7 Start up SEQUENCE ntl Bical aera etn a ees codes te 323 12 2 8 Tightening Torques for RBS 2302 cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeees 325 12 2 9 Cable connections overview for RBS 2802 0 ccceseeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 325 12 3 Maintenance General for the PBC eceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneees 326 123 TT CIC Oi sarees cet cla ho eae Saar ene a len Seanlbaa ae cic tata cates 326 12 3 2 Location of the PBC User Interface cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 326 W293 COTO Rae sesh hs al a a RNs Si ek ha 327 12 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 12 3 4 Supervision of the PBC uci ae ha a es ak al a 329 12 3 5 PBC originated Alarms to the RBS ccccsceeee
58. Figure 338 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 3 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box Note You have ten seconds to perform step 4 on page 396to maintain the PCM link between the BSC and the other RBS that are cascade connected This step is only valid when the PCM B is used in a cascade connection LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 395 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 396 488 P003816A Figure 339 4 Mounting the CB21 connection board Remove the connection terminal blocks for the PCM lines and mount the connection board CB21 on the two PCM terminal blocks Remove all remaining connection terminal blocks connected except for the AC terminal block Loosen the two screws holding the transmission connector located at the top left of the interface box Remove the connector Transmission board P003689A Figure 340 Loosening the transmission board 8 10 11 Unscrew all six screws holding the transmission board and remove the transmission board Mount the new transmission board and tighten the screws Connect the transmission connector located on top of the interface box and tighten the screws Connect all the connection terminal blocks except for the PCM lines Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Note You have ten
59. If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 387 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position 2 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 7 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Connection Board Prior to Replacement 1 Open the installation box door on the radio cabinet 2 Switch the RBS battery switch to the OFF position 3 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 6 on page 387 4 Switch the PBC battery switch to OFF position 5 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 6 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Ericsson Radio Systems AB 387 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 388 488 Replacing the connection board CAUTION A Atas Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity MT P003448A Figure 328 Removing the outer protective cover 1 Remove the outer protective cover by unsnapping it Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P0
60. Inspect the sunshields Every time the PBC unit is controlled or repaired 2 Clean the cooling flanges 3 5 years between cleaning 3 Exchange the batteries Exchange the batteries at 5 year intervals 4 Exchange the EMC board Exchange the EMC board at 10 year intervals 5 Exchange the DC Surge board Exchange the DC surge board at 10 year intervals 6 Exchange the AC board Exchange the AC board at 10 year intervals Sunshields For information regarding exchanging sunshields see Section 12 6 1 on page 409 Table 72 Checklist sunshield Checklist 1 Are the sunshields dirty koae Ca Ee a E o ery a E 4 Are the sunshields mounted correctly aoe ieee Ga Corrective actions 1 Clean the sunshield with a mild detergent 2 Exchange the sunshields if they are damaged discoloured or deformed due to high temperature Cooling flanges 1 Remove the sunshields see Section 12 6 1 on page 409 2 Clean the cooling flanges on the front with a soft brush 3 Clean the sunshield if necessary 4 Clean the cooling flanges on the back of the battery cabinet Batteries For information regarding exchanging the batteries see Section 12 6 2 on page 416 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 451 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 8 4 12 8 5 12 8 6 12 9 452 488 Table 73 Battery checklist Checklist 1 Are the batteries and battery compartment free from dirt excessive grease oxidation and corrosio
61. Maintenance P003731A Figure 364 Battery switch 2 Switch off the battery switch 3 Remove the front sunshield P003273A Figure 365 Opening the Battery cabinet door 4 Open the Battery cabinet door by unscrewing the 18 torx screws Make sure that the screws are disengaged LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 417 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003442A Figure 366 Automatic circuit breaker 5 Switch off the automatic circuit breaker P003275A Figure 367 Battery position overview P003341B Figure 368 Disconnecting the plus pole of battery 4 418 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 6 Disconnect the battery jumper cable on the plus pole of battery 4 P003686A Figure 369 Disconnecting the plus pole of battery 3 7 Disconnect the battery jumper cable on the plus pole of battery 3 and remove battery 4 P003706A Figure 370 Disconne
62. On is off The PBC alarm 020 is indicated Table 38 Switch settings during test 2 TRX Sector configuration 4 Switch on the incoming AC for the PBC and the RBS Check on the RBS that the AC Power On indicator lights up yellow The PBC alarm 020 disappears Test Procedure 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations 1 Make sure that the PBC has been powered up for at least 15 minutes before starting the test After 24 hours the battery is fully charged 2 Make sure that the AC and battery power for the RBS and the PBC is switched on and the Battery Fault indicator is off on the RBS Ensure that no faults are displayed on the PBC 3 Switch on the AC and battery power on all RBSs and PBCs Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests RBS 1 PBC 1 4 Switch off the incoming AC for RBS 1 and PBC 1 Power switch settings according to Table 39 on page 235 5 Check on RBS 1 that the Battery Fault indicator is off Alarm code 020 is displayed on PBC 1 6 Switch on the incoming AC for RBS 1 and PBC 1 Check on RBS 1 that the AC Power On indicator lights up yellow The PBC 1 alarm 020 disappears Table 39 Switch settings during test of RBS 1 PBC 1 If 4 TRX or 6 TRX configuration is used continue with step 7 below RBS 2 PBC 2 7 Switch off the incoming AC for RBS 2 and PBC 2 Power switch settings according to Table 40 on
63. P007595A Figure 383 Loosening the AC cable and the Display cable 4 Disconnect the Display cable and the AC Power cable Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003173A Figure 384 Loosening the installation box 5 Loosen the installation box from the cabinet by loosening the screws inside the installation box P003273A Figure 385 Opening the Battery cabinet door 6 Open the Battery cabinet door by unscrewing the 18 torx screws Make sure that the screws are disengaged LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 429 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003442A Figure 386 Automatic circuit breaker 7 Switch off the automatic circuit breaker P003275A Figure 387 Battery position overview P003341B Figure 388 Disconnecting the plus pole of battery 4 430 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 8 Disco
64. Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction Defining areas of responsibility between the buyer and teh contractor Producing site specific information in the Radio Site Installation Documentation Installation and Integration The work involved in this process is performed by Installation personnel and Test and Integration personnel Installation personnel are responsible for the following activities Installing the RBS on the ground on a wall Earthing the RBS Connecting a power supply to the RBS Connecting the antenna system to the RBS Installing cable ladders and cable ducts Installing battery back up Installing PCM cables The Test and Integration personnel are responsible for the following activities Performing the tests specified in the contract and integrating the site Troubleshooting if tests indicate a fault Documenting the test results in the Radio Site Installation Documentation which is returned to the Engineering personnel Ericsson Radio Systems AB 21 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction 1 3 1 3 1 22 488 The Mobile Telephone System Overview Public services Telephone Network ae MSC VLR P005021B Figure 3 GSM System Overview Ericsson s GSM System is a mobile telephone system containing the frequency bands GSM 900 GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 The GSM network is divided up into three major systems
65. Site Integration For more information about external alarm testing see chapter Site Installation Test 10 8 Leaving Site Routines Save the IDB The purpose is to save the configuration of the IDB on a diskette 1 Save the configured IDB on the empty diskette 2 Label the disc according to Table 45 on page 274 Table 45 IDB diskette label tem Description lt Date gt Current date YYMMDD Revision state of the product lt RBS serial number gt Serial number of the RBS lt backup date gt Date of backup YYMMDD Checklist The following checklist is not mandatory but strongly recommended Local procedures and safety regulations must be evaluated and included in this checklist Table 46 Checklist Checklist Jok O D E 9 All tools have been accounted for 10 The cabinet has been locked 11 External air intake is free from obstructions 12 Defective part packed for shipment including Repair Delivery Note 13 All other necessary paper work has been completed Signature 274 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration 10 9 Handover Test P006043A Figure 248 A forced handover test using the TEMS Purpose To verify that handovers between cells are functioning at a site The test will verify that the coverage of the cell is according to cell planning Note The test should be performed at least 50 m from the BTS
66. Terrestrial traffic channel fault RF loop test fault RU database corrupted X bus communication fault Initiation fault X interface fault DSP fault Reset DXU link lost HW and IDB inconsistent R6 and later LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 297 488 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling Fault Fault type Remark No 21 Internal configuration failed R6 and later 47 SO TRXC internal fault map class 1B Fault Fault type Remark No 0 CDU not usable R6 and later 1 Indoor temperature out of safe range 2 3 DC voltage out of range 4 Indoor temperature above safe range 5 Indoor temperature below safe range 47 SO TRXC internal fault map class 2A Fault Fault type Remark No 0 RX cable disconnected 1 RX EEPROM checksum fault 2 RX configuration table checksum fault 3 RX synthesizer unlocked 4 RX internal voltage fault 5 Astra Dixie communication fault 6 Astra Tracy communication fault 7 TX EEPROM checksum fault 8 TX configuration table checksum fault 9 TX synthesizer unlocked 10 TX internal voltage fault 11 TX high temperature 12 TX output power limits exceeded 13 TX saturation 14 Voltage supply fault 15 VSWR output power supervision lost 16 Non volatile memory corrupted 17 Loadfile missing in TRU R7 18 DSP fault 298 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB TZN 20272 AGB All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault No 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2
67. U U U ring wrench 19 mm U U ring wrench 24 mm Torque wrench 4 20 Nm Torque wrench 10 55 Nm Spirit level Socket set 3 8 ESD wrist strap Description Product No Cordless hammer drill machine tool set 230 V LTT 601 12 2 Cordless hammer drill machine tool set 110 V LTT 601 12 1 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 43 488 All Rights Reserved Tools and Instruments Crimping Tool Set LTT 601 86 U ring wrench 15 mm U ring wrench 18 mm U ring wrench 22 mm Eye protectors Hearing protector For safety equipment please refer to chapter Safety Installation Materials Description Product No Sealing Kit 5 NTM 201 230 3 Earthing Set 5 NTM 201 201 3 1 2 Accessories Description Product No Lifting Device Kit Lifting Handle SXK 107 5775 1 included SXK 107 5723 1 Lifting Handle SXK 107 5775 1 The Lifting device may be used for lifting the cabinet up to 5 m and for a weight up to 25 kg The Power and Battery Cabinet can NOT be lifted equipped with batteries The handle can be used to carry the cabinets 3 2 Tools for Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Same tools as for Section 3 1 1 on page 43 3 3 Instruments for Antenna System Tests Table 1 SiteMaster covering GSM 900 1800 1900 one port Antenna test Specification Product No Antenna tester SiteMaster S331B adapters LPK 102 101 5 1 included 3 4 Instruments for Site Installation Tests Different test methods needs various instruments and
68. a multicasting box is mounted under the radio cabinet remove the box from the radio cabinet according to Section 12 5 7 on page 371 If an omnidirectional antenna is mounted under the radio cabinet remove the antenna according to Section Replacing the Omnidirectional Antenna on page 369 If a sector antenna is mounted on the radio cabinet remove it according to Section Replacing the Sector Antenna on page 368 8 Remove the battery see page 373 9 If the optional PBC is used remove the PSA according to Section 12 5 11 on page 383 380 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 07_0331B Figure 320 Mounting the handle 10 If the lifting device is used attach the handle to the cabinet P003083A Figure 321 Loosening the installation box 11 Unscrew the six torx screws in the installation box Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 381 488 Maintenance ml N W P003081A Figure 322 Unscrewing the locking device 12 Unscrew the locking device under behind the radio cabinet by turning the 2 torx screws counterclockwise until they stop Note Sometimes the two locking parts are jammed together causing the screw to move downwards ins
69. between RBS 1 and RBS 2 cascade connection 100 120 22 twisted pair cable The figure above shows the connection for the transmission between RBS 1 and RBS 2 cascade connection for 100 120 Q twisted pair cable See page 86 for earthing options Connecting the PCM cable coaxial to the incoming PCM line 1 Connect the PCM cable connector type TNC to the incoming PCM line 96 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 10 6 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P004307A Figure 70 Connecting and sealing the TNC connector for the PCM 75 2 cable 2 Seal the connector Information about the sealing procedure can be found in QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 HDSL transmission module Installation optional For more information regarding the mounting of the HDSL modem see Section 5 7 on page 75 Definitions Upstream Connection from BSC or previous RBS Downstream Connection to next RBS Connections to the Interface Box of the RBS 2302 Due to the configuration of the HDSL modem see chapter Site Installation Tests the connections to the interface box to the RBS 2302 described in the following sections are possible The details about the physical installation and the grounding procedure for the cables are described in Section 5 10 4 on page 84 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 97 488 In
70. cabinet To avoid this the cabinet should not be left wihout power for more than 48 hours 174 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 7 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests Antenna System Tests The purpose of these tests is to verify that the antenna system is properly installed The tests also include measuring the feeder length to be able to calculate the feeder system loss About these tests The following instructions describe how to make Standing Wave Ratio SWR and Distance To Fault DTF measurements on GSM 900 1800 1900 antenna systems using the Anritsu Site Master 331B Other models of the Anritsu Site Master can be used if already purchased The instructions for these older instruments are not included in this manual The table below lists different Site Master models and wich GSM system they can be used with Table 10 Operating range for different models of the Anritsu Site Master GSM 900 GSM 900 GSM 900 n GSM 1800 GSM 1800 GSM 1800 Gsm 1900 GSM 1900 GSM 1900 After the results are saved in the Site Master the tester can obtain hard copies by importing the wave forms to a PC The necessary software and serial cable are enclosed with the Site Master For more detailed information see QJ Anritsu Site Master User s Guide Ericsson Radio Systems AB 175 488 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests Anritsu Si
71. cabling kits For example 1 The Network Integration Test is marked with number 3 in Table 2 on page 45 2 According to Table 3 on page 45 the test method number 3 requires index C 44 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Tools and Instruments 3 According to Table 4 on page 46 the index C equals a TEMS kit This table also gives you information about the product number and required quantity Information regarding the parts included in the various kits see Section 3 5 on page 46 Table 2 Explanations for the different test methods Transmission Test 1 5 MBit s T1 or 2 0 MBit s E1 Table 3 Test method versus required Instruments amp accessories Ericsson Radio Systems AB 45 488 All Rights Reserved Tools and Instruments 3 5 46 488 Table4 Explanations for Instruments amp accessories Instrument accessory Product No Qty OMT Kit test set NTM 201 2159 1 R6 or NTM 201 2289 1 R7 Cable 4 wire to RS 422 RPM 518 976 1 1 connector 50 m Extended OMT Cable RS 422 connector to RPM 518 964 1 1 RS 232 connector 2 m Extended OMT TEMS GSM Dualband LPB 123 013 2 TEMS GSM 1900 LPB 123 014 2 1 BSCSim II LPP 106 35 11 1 1 Test Accessories Call Test 2 NTM 201 2216 3 1 3 units are required for 4 TRX and 3 units is required for 6 TRX configuration Loop Forward Backward board LPY 10
72. chapter has been added in RSA Fault Handling No changes Maintenance In section Fault Localization information added to the subsections Fault tracing Guidelines for RBS 2302and Fault tracing Guidelines for the PBC Information about the fuses for the Fan Unit added to section Corrective Action for the RBS subsection Fan Unit optional Information that the RBS do not have to be removed from service when changing the front lower left or upper sunshield added to section Corrective Action for the RBS subsection Sunshields Instructions on how to install the fuses with the fuseholder added to section Corrective Action for the RBS subsection Fuses New instructions regarding the fuseholder added to section Corrective Action for the RBS subsection Connection Board The Blue Tag including the instructions has been updated in section Concluding Routines Product Data The section RBS 2302 Overview has been moved to chapter Site Planning and Requirements In section Radio Base Station RBS 2302 subsection Power Supply the values for Heat Generation have been changed In section Power and Battery Cabinet optional subsection Climatic Endurance the temperature range for Normal Condition has been changed Section Lifting Device has been moved to chapter Installation of RBS 2302 R5A to R6A Introduction Release History updated Tools and Instruments The chapter Tools and Instrument
73. control box cover 9 Remove the AC plinth and connect the cables to the plinth 10 Connect the protective earth PE Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 125 488 Installation of RBS 2302 P004494A Figure 116 Remounting the AC plinth 11 Remount the AC plinth 12 Remount the control box cover P004396A Figure 117 Mounting the Fan Unit cover 13 Mount the Fan Unit cover and fasten it with the screws on each side 126 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 es an Unit ower switch Um AC Mains Power switch P004173A Figure 118 Connecting the AC cable 14 Route the AC cable to the current outlet 15 Connect the cable to the outlet Note The fans will automatically start when the ambient temperature is above 40 C Note The test button for the fans is located in the control box see Figure 115 on page 125 To verify that all fans are working press the test button When releasing the test button the fans will turn off If the temperature is above 30 C the fans will still be running due to the hysteresis of the temperature sensor P004431A Figure 119 Pulling down the interface box 16 Loosen the screws securing the interface box placed underneath the RBS and pull down the interface box L
74. discharge Start up Sequence This is the start up sequence for the RBS 2302 Parts of the sequence are also applicable for the PBC Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003684A Figure 279 AC mains power switch turned on 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to the ON position Note Switch on all radio cabinets and all battery cabinets P003685A Figure 280 Battery and AC switch in the PBC 2 Switch the PBC AC switch to the ON position 3 Switch the PBC Battery switch to the ON position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 336 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 335 488 Maintenance 12 3 11 336 488 os AC power Battery switch switch P003683A Figure 281 Battery and AC power switch 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to the ON position 5 Switch the Battery power switch on the RBS to the ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode Tightening Torques for the PBC When replacing units tighten screws nuts according to table below Exceptions are printed circuits boards and plastic covers inside installation boxes and interface boxes These screws must be tightened with a reduced torque Table 58 Recommended Torque Se ae M3 110 7 7 9 7 0 6 H 06
75. ece ci besa ited en fo tet aeteica ead he AeA ceaa eal 256 10 3 Transmission Fest E Uritssah ce tias es Centre a tees ok ia heat rete cay ates toed 256 10 3 2 gt TRANSMISSION test T arenneren niese ai aiaiai 257 10 3 3 Transmission Test E1 with ADSk yas Se ees eee 257 All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 104 PGA ALO MS ee ae cen Ss ate ak a Bail aaa SS 257 MOT Check Of Dale vats axes cost salen aaae e a a aaa S Eaa Aaea 257 10 4 2 Check the BTS Software osnseeeeseeneesesernnrresrernnseerrrnrrrserrnnnrerrrenee 259 10 4 3 Check the Abis P atin ssccsci vs nsceseininaedaieens asaidewodina indeee dann eicner atten 260 10 4 4 Check the Digital Pats ccnca ttectales ioe ance tana a ieee 260 10 5 Connecting the RBS from the BSC eeeeeccceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeees 260 10 5 1 Bring MO s into Service and Deblock cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 260 10 5 2 Activation of BTS PCM Supervision Optional eeeeeeeeeeeees 264 10 5 3 Verification of Downloaded RBS Software ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 265 10 5 4 Activation and Check of Cell ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 265 10 5 5 Agree upon Parameters xa siectinw eras etnies ined Seabee eee ees 266 10 6 Galli Tests On Air IMG ace se tie ease cree aaae ataa ace ends 266 10 6 1 Call Tests using TWAS ies ea a ea 266 10 6 2 Diversity Call Test secccsscsacecieeesencecanentsndenccnessenicncetetes
76. external alarms Ericsson Radio Systems AB 101 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 5 10 7 5 10 8 102 488 Connecting the External and PBC Alarm Cables The RBS 2302 has eight external alarm inputs Four of the eight alarm inputs are reserved for the optional PBC The alarm inputs are numbered from 1 to 8 on the RBS transmission board and it is up to the installation engineer to decide which inputs to use since they are defined in the IDB with the OMT It is recommended to be consistent and use the same inputs for the PBC alarms for example 5 to 8 to simplify the installation and maintenance procedure 1 Dismantle the Alarm cable and mount the cable inlet see Section 5 10 4 on page 84 Figure 79 OCOOOOOHOOCOOD ery ee Ss ey External Alarms Q External Alarms External Alarms 2 2 2 2 E EEE y E E E E a il NNNNDNNNW EEEEEEEE KROGCTVTTCVTS C LILLI C HHHH D xe KK Kx DC lt E Hoodoo oo amp lt T AN a YT O ORN O T LO LO LO LO LO LO O O c MMMmmm E dK 3K EEEE nf OOOO OOOOHO OOOO COCHO 0 OO pa ea A arms_5 RTN arms_6 arms_6 RTN arms_7 arms_7 RTN arms_8 arms_8 RTN arms_5 EXT_A EXT_A EXT_A EXT_A EXT_A EXT_A EXT_A EXT_A PBC_1_POWER_RTN X34 PBC_1_POWER P003806A Connecting external and PBC alarm cables 2 Connect the external alarm cable to the termination block Connecting the Extended OMT cable optional
77. in the position for being locked by the installation box door Close the installation box door tighten all screws and lock Tidy up the site remove the unnecessary materials and waste Note The Site Installation Test should follow directly after the installation In case of ambient temperature changes between hot and cold there is a risk of humidity damages of the components of the cabinet To avoid this the cabinet should not be left wihout power for more than 48 hours Appendix Lifting Device The lifting device has a lifting capacity of 25 kg The following units can be lifted with this device RBS 2301 RBS 2302 e PBC Note The lifting device is not dimensioned for the PBC assembled with batteries Ericsson Radio Systems AB 129 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 P004000A Figure 122 Lifting Device Overview 5 22 1 General The lifting device is optional and has to be ordered separately The lifting device is mounted on the mounting plate only during the mounting of the cabinet When the mounting of one cabinet is completed the lifting device is intended to be dismounted and used for the mounting of another cabinet The lifting device cannot be used for heights over 5 m since the rope is adjusted for a maximum height of 5 m If a skylift or platform lift is available it is recommended to use tha
78. in the tube bracket 7 Insert the lifting device in the tube bracket The stop ring on the lifting device must have contact with the tube bracket Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 05_0361A Figure 130 Loosening the rope 8 Loosen the rope from the upper cleat by first pressing up the release lever and at the same time pushing it against the rope 9 Lower the hook by loosening the rope from the lower cleat 07_0331C Figure 131 Mounting the handle Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 135 488 Installation of RBS 2302 10 Mount the lifting handle on the cabinet WARNING A If a cabinet shall be dismounted hold the lifting rope in one hand before the cabinet is released from the mounting base Automatic break not in operation 08_0331A Figure 132 Securing the hook 11 Insert the hook and secure by turning 90 Make sure that the hook is in the right position If a PBC is to be lifted make sure that the batteries are removed from the cabinet 12 Hoist the cabinet to the same level as the rear sun shield 136 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 07_0361A
79. information contact the supervisor or manager who will take further action for example such as contacting the FSC 12 1 6 Fault Cases and External Alarms Faults are indicated with LEDs a display on the PBC and a RU map 314 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance External Alarms External alarms are customer defined The alarm detector activates the alarm by an open or closed alarm sensor loop It is possible to define and change the setup for each alarm by means of the OMT Operations and Maintenance Terminal The setup is stored in the IDB Installation Data Base in the RBS The yellow indicator marked External alarm on the Distribution Panel DP will light up if any external alarms are activated When an external alarm is activated the OMT must be used for examining the alarm status and the alarm setup RBS 2302 has eight 8 external alarm inputs RBS 2302 with optional PBC has seven 7 external alarm inputs available One alarm input is required for the power surveillance of the PBC 12 2 Maintenance General for RBS 2302 This chapter contains essential information regarding the user interface of the RBS changing the RBS from Remote to Local Mode and Shut down and Start up procedures 12 2 1 Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to familiarize the user with the RBS The location of the Interface is shown and an explanation on how to read
80. is not used proceed to step 4 on page 324 Be AC power Battery switch switch P003683A Figure 270 Battery and AC power switch 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to the ON position 5 Switch the Battery power switch on the RBS to the ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 324 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 2 8 12 2 9 Tightening Torques for RBS 2302 When replacing units tighten screws nuts according to table below Exceptions are printed circuits boards and plastic covers inside installation boxes and interface boxes These screws must be tightened with a reduced torque Table 52 Recommended Torque Torque Notes M3 80 7 7 1 0 6 Reduced for PCBs and plastic covers 1 3 M4 190 15 16 8 Reduced for PCBs and plastic 1 3 covers a E 1 8 Cable connections overview for RBS 2302 PCMB PCMA 2 sv gm Tumors requedonlyfor7ehms External Alarms External Alarms Jumpers required only for 1 ohms he p 000009 IOQOQOOQGDOCIDGQDOO0O000 Ext OMT OOOO e OOOO Do W LU w Lu wu 225 22 2 2 22 wu ZZ Zz2Z2 4 2 EF EF Ee E be amp E EEE vo 49 imaz eonerenrenrtnrtete l I IEAA t t L0 LDO ON N o oO 359026 az r r H E ii elt Zo 56 J ILI DDD LHHHHHNDDH HDHHDHHDHDDD it 43555 222000 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ZEE ZO0O Itoi SOT TCTCT
81. lee ds 47 4 Site Planning and Requirements ccccccsssseeeeeeesseseeeeeeesseneeeeeeeseeeenees 49 4 1 Competence f6Quirement icisecccciceciesceacinees sabcdeanteisstexesteeincecegedisatelavaeeiss 49 4 2 PECONGINONS st sssrini ieena i a aeaiaioe fea yeiai eda 49 42 ADOCUMEMS aeea eset ta a a a he A erat a E Ta 49 4 2 2 Tools and NMSW MENtS siirinsesi aaae aei 49 4 3 Ericsson Product and Document Numbering System ceeeeeee 49 4 3 1 Site le 51 6111 seem eee ee ev eee ere 51 43 2 Site DOCUMENTATION eaaa a A 51 4 4 Installation Planning Overview cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteees 51 4 4 1 Basic MTORMAUO Meagiaann cet tie ee Oates leer Ce a hte tsa tel 52 4 4 2 Proposed Network DeSIQNS 4 sds eetvedin cieveces reed hee ccdneneeete tances eine 53 4 5 Site Investigation see a el eae aa al Re ie dU A ade 53 4 5 1 a C 92 162 11 0 9 yen nee ee eee se ser ae ee ere 53 B52 ONG WISIS EEE E E E 54 4 5 3 Site Investigation Report c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeee 54 4 5 4 Site Preparation a cscssta aden tatisngia ue atawa mick akbaea hisae 55 4 6 Installation Engineering wzccccccs ise ches clos resect casein Sanu tee seeedatecdssulsdeuedseteavelecters 59 4 6 1 Cabinet Material Listing ccccccsceeeeeeeseneeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaees 55 4 6 2 Installation Material eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeerrrrrrerrrrrresssssrerrrennnnnns
82. nc cables Omni directional antenna GSM 1900 nc cables Incl cables Front Sun Shields for Sector Antenna Front radom Grey Front radom Green Front radom Blue Front radom Red Front radom Ochre Front radom Yellow Front Sun Shields for Omni Directional Antenna and External Antennas Front Grey Front Green Front Blue Front Red Front Ochre Front Yellow Ericsson Radio Systems AB 19 59 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P003600A Figure 5 20 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 2 Other Sunshields and Accessories for RBS 2302 Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 SDF 105 11 1 Sun Shield Upper Grey 2 SDF 105 12 1 Sun Shield Left Grey 3 SDF 105 13 1 Sun Shield Lower Grey 4 NTZ 111 44 01 Spare Parts Set Rear Sunshield Grey Includes Locking Washers Also included in a Mounting Base 5 NTZ 112 86 SH03 Spare Parts Set Sun Shield Accessories ncludes front right and left shaft hinge pin and upper end plugs LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 21 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable U i aaan P003575B Figure 6 LZN 302
83. replaced by a Power Supply Adapter PSA P005660A Figure 82 Switching the internal battery to the PSA 1 Open the internal RBS battery compartment by unscrewing the torx screw located on the cover 2 Remove the internal battery 3 Separate the cover from the cabinet by loosening the torx screw that holds the wire 4 Insert the PSA into the battery compartment 5 Place the lip on the cover in the mounting hole and push the cover gently into position Make sure that the cables are not squeezed by the spring 6 Tighten the torx screw and make sure that there is no gap between the cover and cabinet 5 12 Mounting the Cabinet To facilitate the mounting a lifting device may be used see Section 5 22 Appendix Lifting Device on page 129 104 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P003247A Figure 8 amp 3 Mounting the cabinet 07_0331C Figure 8 amp 4 Mounting the lifting handle 1 Mount the lifting handle optional on the RBS 2302 and lift it on to the mounting base LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 105 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 Align 1 i 30 40mm P003079B Figure 85 Facilitating mounting the cabinet
84. seshidenennesoeneatasees 267 10 6 3 Call Test to MS from fixed Network cccccesssccceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeneeeees 273 10 7 Test of External Alanis cess vicdscotsotacystiducneise nicotene atasse vend nesienla 273 10 8 Leaving Site ROUtINGS ccc eeesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 274 10 9 Handover Te Sh sei ririri cictvees secede arna i aain aa Kataa KEE Eria 275 10 10 SISTINE ANIS st oa ae a aaa aie Aaaa Ee Ee Kan ainina 276 10 10 1 Setting the RBS in remote mode cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 277 10 10 2 Reference DT file vcicic cccscecttincnetseeeeasacatt on Gaceliaetavednadeceetecastceeneene 277 10 10 38 Example of Exchange data for a 2 TRX cabinets cseee 278 10 10 4 Example of Exchange data for a 6 TRX cabinet ccceeeeeeeee 281 10 10 5 LAPD Concentration Dae icc susie ee Petes cers eee trcc tees oe teestees ech ees 283 10 10 6 BTS PCM Supervision 2 ese eet ccs eals oe eA cade 283 10 10 7 Digital Path HS A etcetera aad ad a Stee 283 10 10 8 Installation of BTS Software in lOG cccecceeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneeeees 283 10 10 9 Managed Object HierarChy ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeees 285 10 10 10 Managed Object States eee ee sccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaeees 286 VOT Test PROCS meinti ces cate cacti tre ody vcd pate ste paketda waded sdccdsh Eaa ea Eaa 287 10 11 1 Network Element Integration Test eeeec
85. spring locking pin located in the lower left hand corner 3 Pull out the lower part of the cover 4 Carefully bend out the sides at the top of the cover so that the hinge snaps off and the cover can be removed 5 Mount the new front sunshield 6 Carefully bend out the sides on the top so they can snap on to the hinge 7 Fold down the cover Note Make sure that no cables are bent or squeezed 8 Press the lower left hand corner towards the battery cabinet so that the spring locking pin snaps into position 9 Close the installation box door 410 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Replacing the lower sunshield o lo P003700A Figure 3555 Replacing the lower sunshield 1 Open the installation box door 2 Unsnap the sunshield by pressing the fasteners located on the middle on the sunshield Pull the sunshield down and unhook it Mount the new sunshield in its cut out in the left side of the PBC Snap the sunshield into position NS nN gt p Close the installation box door Replacing the left sunshield P004195A Figure 356 Replacing the left sunshield 1 Open the installation box door 2 Remove the lower sunshield LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 411 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 3 Un
86. task or operation that may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or carelessly Therefore read the instructions carefully Strict compliance with the special instructions while performing a task is the best way of preventing accidents Notes Note Notes are used to call the reader s attention to key points that might otherwise be overlooked Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 2 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Safety Instructions Electrical Hazards High Voltage DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal The AC installation must be carried out according to local regulations These regulations may require the work to be carried out by a qualified and authorized electrician Remove wrist watches rings bracelets etc Switch off the power if the cabinet is damp inside Prevent damp entering the equipment during work in bad weather conditions DANGER A Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electrical shock Approved circuit breakers for the AC mains and the cable s cross sectional areas must always be selected in accordance with local laws and regulations Only a qualified and authorized electrician is permitted to install or modify the electrical installation Cable Markings CAUTION A Veri
87. the micro RBSs RBS 2301 and RBS 2302 When using this chapter for CMS 40 the conversion table below applies Table 48 Relation of product releases in CME 20 and CMS 40 Terminology The following terminology is used throughout this chapter Fault Number The fault number is identical with the bit position in the fault map reported over the Abis interface Internal Fault Map Class 1A 11A Faults reported in this class are faults that affect MO functionality Faulty HW is part of the signalling MO Internal Fault Map Class 1B 11B Faults reported in this class are faults that affect MO functionality The origin of the fault is external to the signalling MO Internal Fault Map Class 2A I2A Faults reported in this class are faults that do not affect MO functionality Faulty HW is part of the signalling MO External Condition Map Class 1 EC1 Conditions reported in this class are conditions that affect MO functionality The conditions are TG external External Condition Map Class 2 EC2 Conditions reported in this class are conditions that do not affect MO functionality The conditions are TG external Replacement Unit Map RU Map Units reported in this map are HW units suspected of causing the faults in the internal fault maps described above Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 11 2 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault Handling Logical RU A logi
88. the PCM lines and mount the connection board CB21 on the two PCM terminal blocks 15 Remove all remaining connection terminal blocks including the AC terminal block Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 363 488 Maintenance 364 488 am L Line N Neutral PE Protective Earth P003453A Figure 3503 Loosening the Protective Earth in the AC section of the interface box 16 Loosen the Protective Earth in the AC section of the interface box 17 Loosen the two screws on the AC pull relief clamp 18 Dismount the cable gland 19 Pull out the AC cable P003454A Figure 304 Loosening the gland plate 20 Remove the cable gland plate by unscrewing the two torx screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance ie lt J i x 5 Set O o Earth P003148A Figure 3505 Removing the earth cable 21 22 23 24 Remove the earth cable on the mounting base Loosen the four nuts securing the mounting base Lift up the mounting base and pull it away from the wall bracket Place the mounting base on the ground Ericsson Radio Systems AB 365 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003676A Figure 306 Removing locking washers 25 Remove the four locking washers with a screwdriver 26
89. the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position 5 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 8 on page 361 6 Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position 7 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 8 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch 9 Remove the sunshields front lower left and upper 10 Remove the cabinet see page 377 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 361 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003729A Figure 299 Releasing the interface box 11 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box P003738A Figure 300 Loosening the interface box cover 12 Open the cover of the interface box by removing the 8 torx screws 362 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003465A Figure 3501 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 13 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box Note You have ten seconds to perform step 14 on page 363to maintain the PCM link between the BSC and the other cascade connected radio cabinets This step is only valid when the PCM B is used in a cascade connection P003816A Figure 3502 Mounting the CB21 connection board 14 Remove the connection terminal blocks for
90. the radio equipment transceivers and antennas needed to serve each cell in the network A group of BTSs are controlled by a BSC The Radio Base Station RBS includes all the radio and transmission interface equipment needed on one site Operation and Support System OSS The Operation and Support System OSS is the functional entity from which the network operator monitos and controls the system It is a two level management function with a Network management Centre NMC and subordinate Operation and Maintenance Centres OMC NMC staff concentrate on system wide issues whereas local personnel at each OMC concentrate on short term regional issues The OSS is designed to provide a Management system which supports a number of other network elements the MSC BSC BTS VLR HLR EIR AUC and Mobile Intelligent Network Nodes IN Release History Except editorial changes such as correction of spelling grammar and layout this manual has been revised as follows R2A to R3A The following information of major importance has been added to the binder sections listed below Site Planning and Product Data Block Diagram of PBC updated Chapter Transmission updated Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Dimension sketch included showing the mounting plate and position of the mounted equipment Installation of RBS 2302 Optional HDSL modem 4 TRX and 6 TRX configurations Optional Fan Unit Dimensio
91. to serial connection gt Cascade connections Common Control CHannel Channel combining the following common control channels PCH Paging CHannel RACH Random Access CHannel AGCH Access Grant CHannel Combining and Distribution Unit An area of radio coverage identified by the GSM network by means of the cell identity LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 CEU CF Channel Channel Combination Channel group CM Common Mode CME 20 Cellular Mobile Europe CME 20 Ericsson digital land mobile telecommunication system based on the GSM standards CME 201 Ericsson GSM system comprising Ericsson equipment only CMRU Central Main Replaceable Unit Main RU The RBS is physically connected to the Base Station Controller BSC via the CMRU There is only one CMRU in each RBS CMS 40 Cellular Mobile System Ericsson digital land mobile telecommunication system based on the Joint Technical Committee JTC specification for PCS 1900 CPI Communication and Power Interface CPU Central Processing Unit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CS Coding Scheme CSA Canadian Standards Association CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Second CSU Customer Service Unit Dannie ASIC in the TRU dB decibel Ericsson Radio Systems AB 479 488 Glossary Coverage Extension Unit Central Functions The common term channel denotes the virtual connection consisting of physical and logical channels between BSS and MS du
92. to the Master RBS BSCSim II R2A or later is required Connect the BSC Simulator adapter to the input on the BSC simulator Connect the cables between the BSC simulator and the interface box For El 75 Q 1 Disconnect the existing cables from the PCM A cables that are connected to the interface box 2 Connect the cables C3 to the BNC connector on the BSC Simulator adapter 3 Connect the cables C3 to the PCM A cables that are connected to the interface box see Figure 236 on page 244 For T1 100 Q and E1 120 Q 1 Remove the existing PCM A cables plug from the interface box 2 Connect the BNO connector on cable C4 to the BNO connector on the BSC Simulator adapter 3 Connect the C4 cables plug to the PCM A socket in the interface box see Figure 237 on page 244 Connect cable C2 to the antenna inlet on the mobile and to the adapter Ad1 Connect the adapter Ad1 to the first attenuator A1 Connect the three attenuators Al together Connect the third attenuator Al to the Multicasting Box MCB Make sure that the RBS are switched off or is not transmitting Disconnect the antenna jumper cables from the antenna outputs X2 and X3 on the RBS Connect the cables from the MCB to the antenna outputs on the RBS TX RX Ant A to X2 TX RX Ant B to X3 Switch on the PBC if used RBS and the BSC simulator Test Setup Procedure 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations When this test setup is used one cell per RBS must be defined
93. 00 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 HCE HDLC HDSL HISC HLIN HLOUT HW HWU Glossary External Synchronization Bus ElectroStatic Discharge European Telecommunication Standard External Federal Communications Commission Facility Data Link Feeder Duplexer Unit Function Specification Field Support Centre Filter Unit General Packet Radio Services General Specification GPRS Signalling Link Global System for Mobile communications International standard for a TDMA digital mobile communication system Originally GSM was an abbreviation for Groupe Special Mobile which is a European mobile telecommunication interest group established in 1982 GSM system 900 MHz generic GSM based Digital Communication System 1800 MHz generic GSM based Digital Communication System 1900 MHz generic HDSL Central Equipment High level Data Link Control High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line Highway Splitter Combiner High Level IN High Level OUT HardWare HardWare Unit Ericsson Radio Systems AB 481 488 All Rights Reserved Glossary 482 488 IA ID IDB IEC IF box INT IS TA IIB I2A JTC LAN LAPD LBO LED LLB LNA Local bus Local mode Local Remote switch LOF An HWU consists of one or more SEs An HWU is a functional unit within the RBS The HWU is either active equipped with a processor or passive without processor Immediate Assignment IDentification Installation Data Base
94. 02 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 349 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P004477A Figure 284 Disconnecting the Protective Earth 2 Disconnect the Protective Earth from the HDSL Modem P004576A Figure 285 Dismantling the faulty HDSL Modem 3 Dismantle the faulty HDSL Modem 350 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance P004577A Figure 286 Position of the DIP switches 4 Choose the appropriate settings for the new Modem with the DIP switches located on the printed circuit board according to the settings of the dismantled HDSL modem Complete information about the settings if a reconfiguration is necessary is found in the section about the HDSL modem in the chapter Site Installation Tests 5 Mount the new HDSL Modem by reversing the dismantling procedure Set to operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode D Voe OD P Test after corrective action 1 Wait for the green light on the HDSL Modem 2 Perf
95. 03465A Figure 329 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 2 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box P003692A Figure 330 Disconnecting the transmission cable and AC cable 3 Disconnect the transmission cable and the AC cable from the interface box Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 389 488 Maintenance Internal Transmission cable x22 75 Internal AC cable P003457A Figure 331 Disconnecting internal cables Cabinet 100 120 ohm Cabinet 75 ohm lide tat See Secured ide lat ecco Open P003614B Figure 332 Internal transmission cable P004219A Figure 333 TXL cable 390 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 4 Disconnect the internal AC cable the internal transmission cable and the TXL cable Note The internal transmission cable is secured with slide latches The TXL cable is secured on one end with slide latches and on the other with locking screws Open the latches and the locking screws before removing the cables 5 Remove the fuseholder including the fuses P003727A Figure 334 Removing the inne
96. 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Sector Antenna WARNING Radio frequency radiation The radio frequency radiation from the antenna system might endanger your health Switch off the transmitter when working with antennas or near them Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode Ericsson Radio Systems AB 367 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Replacing the Sector Antenna 26_0331C Figure 307 Sector antenna 1 Remove the front sunshield Note Make sure that all cables are properly labelled before disconnecting them 2 Disconnect the antenna cables 3 Remove the antenna by loosening the four torx screws holding it in place 4 Mount the new antenna Note Make sure that no cables are bent or squeezed Fasten the four torx screws Reconnect the antenna cables 5 6 7 Mount the front sunshield see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 8 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 9 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 368 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 5 5 Omnidirectional Antenna WARNING Radio frequency radiation The radio frequency rad
97. 1 17 Product Data 7 Left sunshield Front sunshield 7 Interface box Lower sunshield Batt Cabinet SSS Upper sunshield Installation box Mounting base P003439A Figure 426 Wall Mounting The mounting plate is used to fix the power and battery cabinet to a flat surface In combination with the pole fixture it is also used to install the PBC on a pole P003183A Figure 427 Mounting base and mounting plate A separate template is available to mark out holes for drilling Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 467 488 Product Data 03_0331B Figure 428 Mounting plate 13 2 2 Pole Mounting The pole fixture is attached to the mounting plate if the PBC is to be mounted on a tubular mast or pole The pole fixture is attached to a round tube having a diameter of 60 114 mm P003151A Figure 429 Pole fixture and mounting plate mounted on a tube LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 468 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 13 2 3 13 2 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Product Data Dimensions and Weight PALL T7777 gt l ERICSSON amp aay Lo oO wo P003212A Figure 430 Dimensions Table 81 Weights Cabinet no batteries 23 kg 51 lb Wall and pole mo
98. 1 port The other two ports should be set to Not used Start the function Test of TCH under Control Fill in the telephone number you use for the test the Frequency number ARCEFN for the Broadcast channel BCCH for the cell and the Frequency number for the Traffic channel TCH Note that for the first TRX in every cell the BCCH number is the same as the TCH number Fill in the boxes for the timeslots TS All the TS used for traffic should be tested With that means every TS in every TRX except for the first TRX In the first TRX there are two TS s that are used for the BCCH timeslot 0 and the SDCCH timeslot determined by the BSC staff and which can therefore not be tested Choose Add and repeat for all TRX s Choose start The TEMS will now perform calls on all preset timeslots The BTS commissioning staff will verify speech quality of each call and mark it Pass or Fail The test is finished when all timeslots are passed Note the results in the test record Diversity Call Test This test do not need to be performed if the Stand Alone Test using the BSC Simulator has been done or if antenna diversity is not supported Configure RXD A 1 N If necessary disable frequency hopping Command RLCHC CELL cell HOP 0FF Printout EXECUTED Make sure that the antenna system is connected Block all TS s and RX s in the TG and take the RX s out of service Command RXBLI MO RXOTS x y 0 amp a
99. 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 PCM Upstream HDSL Downstream Two Pairs A B AMOO KH ANMTMO errr tr NANANA IMMIMMM IMO oD lt lt KK XK OK OK KK OO SEED L UPSTREAM PCM 4 DOWNSTREAM HDSL P004406C Figure 77 One HDSL pair is connected to the PCM B IN i e X32 1 and X32 2 One HDSL pair is connected to the PCM B OUT i e X32 4 and X32 5 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X32 3 and X32 6 ground connections See page 86for earthing options External Alarms of the RBS 2302 used by the HDSL Modem Modul OCOOOOOHOOCOOD Sa ees S External Alarms External Alarms OOO OOOOO O COC OOOO OFYOOOO C E O Z Znonvst Z 2 Z Z t e V ee EE naya l R bs 900 NNN D NNnNnNNNHNNHNNW EEEE 3 EEEEEEEE Sost G KSKH6CKCGTIG i ig kis ds st D HEEE EEEBEBEE ED lt gt lt gt lt X lt lt lt lt lt X lt gt lt gt lt gt lt EE io 0 i i Oo oo a Zax n A N O N O fa LO 19 19 19 Sips Ss tps ts Se tps Ss E E c2 0 0 0 9 090 09 09 090 09 09 OD gs x lt lt x XX KX KKK XX x x lt u y P003775A Figure 78 If the HDSL modem uses the RBS 2302 external alarms the number of customer available external alarms will be reduced by two Covering of External Alarms 1 If in use disconnect the external alarms number 3 and 4 2 Place a cover label to the termination block position 3 and 4 to prevent other usage for these
100. 2000 11 17 Maintenance Fault Code List Table 64 Fault code list Jp Overtemp historical Ambient temperature OPERATIONAL D O raui might have been to high and or circuits overloaded due to long charging of batteries P004025A vl wy When displayed 115 230 V is not present in Grenson C _ Ore the battery cabinet P004017A Battery switch P004243A Confirm that the Mains switch is set to the ON position and that the AC switch on the PBC is set to the ON position P003944B Switch off the Mains switch and the AC switch on the PBC Measure the resistance of the fuses with a multimeter to verify that they are undamaged The resistance should be 0 2 Then switch the power back on LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 345 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P004244A Measure with a voltage meter that 115 230 V is present at the incoming AC plinth on the AC board in the interface box P004246A Measure that 115 230 V is present at the upper AC plinth on the AC board to verify that the AC board is not faulty P003947A Measure that 155 230 V is present at the incoming AC plinth on the EMC board to verify that the cables are not faulty 346 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 l h P i h E OPERATIONAL FAULT
101. 219A Figure 92 TXL cable LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 109 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 4 Connect the TXL cable between the connection board and the cabinet Secure it on one side with the slide latch and on the other with the locking screw 5 Remount the outer protective cover 5 14 Mounting the Sector Antenna optional 26_0331C Figure 93 Mounting the sector antenna 1 Mount the antenna and fasten the four screws Note Make sure that no cables are bent or squeezed 2 Connect the antenna cables 110 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 15 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Mounting the Omnidirectional Antenna optional P003150A Figure 94 Mounting the omnidirectional antenna Note The omnidirectional antenna can only be mounted if the left sunshield is mounted 1 Hook on the omnidirectional antenna on the left side of the cabinet Note Make sure that no cables are bent or squeezed 2 Push it up until it snaps in place The fasteners are situated in the middle 3 Connect the antenna cables Ericsson Radio Systems AB 111 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 5 16 Mounting the Multicasting Box optional
102. 2302 Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 NTZ 111 44 02 Spare Parts Set Connection board nc screws 2 NTZ 111 44 03 Spare Parts Set Transmission board Incl screws 3 NTZ 111 44 04 Spare Parts Set AC board Incl screws LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 27 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 1 E OE 1 P004481A Figure 9 28 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 6 Fuses Screws and Installation Details for RBS 2302 Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 NTZ 111 44 08 Spare Parts Set Fuses for 230 V 6 3A size 5x20 mm slow blow 20 pcs 2 NTZ 112 86 FU02 Spare Parts Set Fuses for 115 V 8A size 6 3 x32 mm slow blow 20 pcs 3 NTZ 111 44 05 Spare Parts Set Set of screws for RBS 2302 ncludes some of the most common screws washers and fixing details 4 NTZ 111 44 06 Spare Parts Set Set for RBS 2302 Interface box Includes terminal blocks cable glands and O rings gland plate with screws and shielding gasket LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 29 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P003593A Figure 10 30 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Pos Aa OO N 4 7
103. 56 4 6 3 Site PLEDAlallOM i aa r A E Ei ea EEE 56 4 6 4 Site Installation Documentation cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 4 6 5 Site Design Documentation cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 57 4 7 Site ASQUIRGING MIS eea e cued tale cated alee co ate 57 Ar is Pn a k caer ese eRe PRE oe OR CE ero RR 58 4 8 Earthing and Lightning Protection ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaaeees 59 4 9 RBS 2302 OVEMIGW scssceivtentictat o20is tein casidactaseeatitaeie nantes ete eleabaecti cs 59 4 9 1 Base Station RBS 2302 eee eeeeseceeceeeeseceeeeeseeeseeeeeenseeeseeeeeens 59 4 9 2 Power and Battery Cabinet PBC cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeees 60 4 10 SCOMMQUPANONS arisen chief ei aca ane reeds cleat A daa eee lu EE ane 61 5 Installation of RBS 2302 acs iniinis cotaetecciicstsastecticsnteteasessnencendstuastvenmesndene 65 All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 5 1 Competence requirement ccccceeeeeeseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 65 9 2 PLS COMCMOM Sinur sass doce cece eaaa anaa aa aaa AA RIES RERE 65 5 2 1 Preconditions for wall mounted RBS 2302 ecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 66 5 2 2 Preconditions for pole mounted RBS 2302 cccccccccceeeeeesseeestteeees 66 Deed DOCUMEN Snae reer teres Ae eet mene a aE E eee eee 66 5 2 4 Tools and INSt ruMents ysis cececccstsestes sirana seann in a
104. 6 47 Fault Handling Fault type Remark High frequency software fault RX initiation fault TX initiation fault CDU bus communication fault Default values used TX maximum power restricted DB Parameter Fault R7 SO TRXC external condition map class 1 Fault No 0 nan A 15 Fault type L R SWI TRU in local mode L R TI Local to remote while link lost SO TRXC external condition map class 2 Not used SO TRXC replacement unit map No Replaceable unit Remark TRU Micro RBS CDU to TRU PFWD cable CDU to TRU PREFL cable CDU to TRU RXA cable CDU to TRU RXB cable Ericsson Radio Systems AB 299 488 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling 11 2 4 300 488 No Replaceable unit Remark 47 AO Fault Lists Fault codes on the Abis interface are defined per MO The SO RU map and the I1A I2A fault maps should be read together The SO fault map denotes which fault it is and the RU map denotes where the fault is located An AO IIB fault has a corresponding SO I2A fault So by reading the I2A fault map and the RU map for SO CF or SO TRXC the HW that is causing the AO IIB fault can be found This is the case when BTS internal HW affects a single AO The AO is not allowed to report the HW itself since this task is assigned to the HW responsible SO One could say that the consequence is reported by the AO I1B fault map and the cause is reported by the SO ILA I2A fault maps and the RU map
105. 7 Transmission Test E1 with HDSL 1 Check that the green LED indicator on the HDSL modem lights steadily 2 Wait for the yellow LED indicators to change from flashing to steady light The number of indicators engaged vary depending on the configuration used For further information regarding the HDSL optical indicators refer to chapter Site Installation Tests Preparations Check of Data Check with these commands that the correct data is loaded in the BSC and if not load it For further information about the DT files see Helpful Hints Section 10 10 on page 276 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 257 488 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration Note Only the most important data is listed 1 Check definition for MO s Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout Command Printout RXMOP MO RXOTG x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOCE x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOCON x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXODP x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOIS x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOTF x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOT
106. 7 Remove all remaining terminal blocks including the AC terminal block PE PE L Line N Neutral PE Protective Earth P003453A Figure 349 Loosening the Protective Earth in the AC section of the interface box 8 Loosen the Protective Earth in the AC section of the interface box 9 Loosen the two screws on the AC pull relief clamp 10 Dismount the cable gland LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 11 Pull out the AC cable P003454A Figure 350 Loosening the gland plate 12 Remove the gland plate by loosening the two torx screws Earth P003148A Figure 351 Remove the Earth Cable 13 Remove the earth cable on the mounting base 14 Loosen the four nuts securing the mounting base 15 Lift up the mounting base and pull it away from the wall bracket 16 Place the mounting base on the ground LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 405 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 17 18 19 20 21 22 Note 23 24 25 26 27 Loosen the gland plate of the new cabinet by loosening the two torx screws Mount the new mounting base on the mounting plate Tighten the four nuts holding the mounting base Reconnect the earth cable to the mounting base Mount the old gland plate Insert the AC cable and connect the Protective Earth You
107. 7 757 1 Fluke 79 III Multimeter LPK 102 024 2 1 MartisDXX HTU 2M ZAT 759 20 101 HDSL Cable Kit KDY 196 48 1 1 Using the OMT SW and TEMS SW A Lap Top PC is needed with following minimum requirements Filter Unit Multi casting box 2 KRF 201 439 1 3 units are required for 4 TRX and 3 units is required for 6 TRX configuration Intel 486 processor 66 MHz 16 MB RAM MS Windows version 95 NT Tools for Maintenance General Maintenance Tools Depending on the maintenace that is to be performed use the appropriate tools and instruments from previous sections Special Maintenance Tools The Loop Forward backward board CB21 Product No LPY 107 757 1 is for example used during change of RBS 2302 mounting base or transmission filter board Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Tools and Instruments The cover plate Product No SXA 117 1926 1 is used to seal the RBS mounting base installation box It is used if the RBS cabinet is changed and it takes time until the new cabinet is mounted Item Product no Loop forward backward board CB21 LPY 107 757 1 Cover plate for mounting base SXA 117 1926 1 Instrument for Calibrate Oscillator Product No LPK 102 102 1 Pos Description Qty 1 Suitcase 1 2 Instrument Set 1 3 Cable 1 4 Euro connector jack to 2x BNC plug 1 4 Cable BNC plug to SMB jack 1 3 6 Kit specification Test Accessories Product No NTM 201 2216 3 Call
108. 71 488 RBS Site Integration 272 488 Command RXESE MO RXORX x y Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT OUT OF SERVICE RESULT Expected Result EXECUTED Repeat for all TRX s Configure diversity parameter to RXD AB if diversity is supported Command RXMOC MO RXORX x y RXD AB OR Configure diversity parameter to RXD A if diversity is NOT supported Repeat for all TRX s Command RXMOC MO RXORX x y RXD A Repeat for all TRX s Bring all RX s in the TG into service and deblock them Command RXESI MO RXORX x y Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected Result LOADED Repeat for all TRX s Command RXBLE MO RXORX x y Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT Expected Result EXECUTED Repeat for all TRX s Command RXBLE MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT Expected result EXECUTED Repeat for all TRX s If necessary enable frequency hopping in the cell Command RLCHC CELL cell HOP ON Expected Result EXECUTED Check the status of the cell Logical channels should be configured Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 6 3 10 7 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration Command RLCRP CELL cell Printout CELL RESOURCES Call Test to M
109. 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 6 14 4 6 15 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 2 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Push it up until it snaps into the fasteners situated on the middle of the cabinet Front Sunshield tT ea P003203A Figure 1935 Mounting the front sunshield 1 Mount the short hinge pin on the left side and the long hinge pin on the right side Hook on the front sunshield on the hinges and fold down the cover Press on the lower left hand corner so that the spring locking pin snaps into position Before leaving the site Note Make sure that all cables are strapped and run in a proper way Make sure that the interface box is pushed up and the screws tightened Make sure that all sunshields are in the position for being locked by the installation box door Close the installation box door tighten all screws and lock Tidy up the site remove the unnecessary materials and waste The Site Installation Test should follow directly after the installation In case of ambient temperature changes between hot and cold there is a risk of humidity damages of the components Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 173 488 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet of the
110. 8 Indicator i Local mode Yellow Reduced Capacity m Yellow Mode OFF ON FLASHING OFF ON T1 Test result for TRX 1 T2 Test result for TRX 2 AC Power On OFF Yellow Battery Fault Yellow External Alarms Yellow ON OFF ON OFF ON ON Extension cabinet and FLASHING Master cabinet a Indicated on all cabinets Switches and Connectors Switches Switch CPU reset button Local remote button Test Description The RBS is in remote mode The RBS is in local mode Change of mode in progress All TRXs are operational At least one TRX is not operational Not used Not used AC power not available AC power available Battery connected Battery disconnected or faulty Low battery DC voltage No external alarm s active External alarm s active External alarm on Extension cabinet s Function Reset of the RBS Change between Local Remote mode Not used Configuration 4 TRX or 6 TRX CPU reset and change of mode can be performed on both Master and Extension cabinet s Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Connectors Connector Function OMT Connector for the OMT cable 13 MHz Connector for RF measurements and calibration Configuration 4 TRX or 6 TRX all cabinets are controlled by the OMT connector on the Master cabinet 12 2 5 Changing the RBS Local Remote Mode
111. 82A Figure 17 46 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts 5 4 Battery Accessories for PBC Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 RPM 518 966 1 Cable with connector For battery 0 06m 2 RPM 518 966 2 Cable with connector For battery 0 11m 3 SEA 910 06 1 Hose Ventilation set for PBC batteries LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 47 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts P003628A Figure 18 48 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts 5 5 Other Available Parts for PBC Mechanics Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 SEB 104 19 2 Mounting Base Complete Mounting Base for PBC 2 SEB 114 100 2 Mounting Plate Wall Bracket 3 NTM 192 08 2 Set of materials Pole Mast Fixture set 4 SDF 105 21 2 Protective cover Incl screws 5 SDD 513 0120 1 Spare Parts set Side door for installation box LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 49 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts P003627A Figure 19 50 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts 5 6 Other Available Parts for PBC Internal Cables Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 RPM 518 952 1 Cable with connector Int
112. 9 10 Save the measurement by pressing the SAVE DISPLAY key 11 Type in a unique trace name using the alpha numeric soft keys for the measurement and press ENTER 182 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests Table 13 Conversion table Return Loss SWR Return Loss Return Loss SWR dB dB dB 7 7 Choosing DTF Test Setup The purpose of the Distance To Fault test DTF is to measure the length of the feeder system to be used in the Feeder Attenuation Calculation The DTF Test can also be used to find bad connections or other faults for example sharp bends in the feeder system if the SWR Test indicates too high reflections This section contains test setups and information about how to connect the test equipment for the DTF Test for a RBS 2302 passive Antenna System LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 183 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests The figure shows how to connect the Site Master and the table shows which frequency range to set 7 7 1 DTF Test Setup for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems TX antenna Feeder ipment RX antenna Jumper Feeder Jumper TX RX P007102A Figure 200 Test Setup for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems 1 Use the table below to select the frequency range 2 Perform a DTF measurement on the X2 feeder system See Section
113. 96 and Section SO TRXC replacement unit map on page 299 for possible HW causing the fault AO IS AO IS is not supervised AO DP R6 and later AO DP is not supervised Note The Digital Path is supervised by PCM supervision Trouble Report A trouble report should be written when system components are not operating as expected or when disturbances occur repeatedly It should not be written for occasional hardware failures A trouble report should also be written when a fault is found in this manual When writing a trouble report always include as much information as possible Write the trouble report as soon as possible preferably at the RBS site The next pages contain an example of a filled in trouble report and a blank trouble report The trouble report should be sent to the nearest FSC Field Support Center for resolution and registration in the Ericsson trouble report system MHS Modification Handling System The FSC should forward the trouble report via the node MHO ERA BTS Special Explanations Product number The product number can be found on the label of the unit Example KRC 131 47 01 R state Revision state found on the label of the unit after the product number Example R1A Site status Can be Installation Test or Operation Ericsson Radio Systems AB 305 488 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling Example of Filled in Trouble Report Trouble Report Company Date W
114. 97 R3C 2000 11 20 22 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 3 Internal Battery and Power Supply Adapter for RBS 2302 Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 BKB 191 2022 1 Battery Unit Not used if PBC attached see below 2 BMY 908 04 1 Adapter PSA power supply adapter kit Includes cover lid cable 5 0 m and other details To be used in RBS 2302 instead of internal battery when PBC attached LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 23 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P004478A Figure 7 24 99 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 4 Optional Fan Unit for RBS 2302 4 4 1 Fan Unit Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 BKV 301 321 1 Fan Unit Complete Unit to be mounted on top of RBS 2302 Including alarm cable Not including power cable LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 25 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P003577A Figure 8 26 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 5 Replaceable Boards for RBS
115. A EEE sets 373 12 5 9 Ca ES a a a tke E ar Ar A santas Cotten Aaea 374 12 5 10 Radio Cabinelcakn aii c eet aie elec Paces 377 Dlr RSA emee E E E T EE 383 o A D E E E E E E E T 385 12 5 13 Connection BOA vc s de decent hate cetense Sent petec Gch bess Git caches biadatee ves Sete 387 12 5414 Transmission BOard ccanincisnessitiiscitnieviastineetee eatas 393 T2515 AC BOAR anpra eiia aeea A A e e EA AEE oiana 397 12 5 16 Mounting Base e eeeeeeeeeeeesesrrrrrrerrestserrrrrrrrrerrrrrreseessrrrrnennnnnns 402 12 5 17 Internal Synchronization Calibrate Oscillator ccceeeeeeeee 407 12 6 Corrective Action for the PBC isc ie seat ee a a a 409 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 13 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 A SUITS St ae eae aa ea cee he ek E ie tle SNS 409 126 2 BANOS desis na a a aeaa ANA OEA ATEA 416 126 3 Gables nnne a a E EEE 425 12 6 4 Battery Cabinets ucsiss t eucnlvecntaysaidicet nied sudden nd pgs atnieavennieerteeiedecs 427 12 09 FUSES rnense ioed i a ee ere Aether ete tee ea seat 435 W266 EMG BOAI Os isa eee ca ated ncet e clue tecai cack ieast cater cts cee 437 12 6 7 DG Surge Oat ise E ae eh eas 440 V2 BLING BOIFA anene Sie hte insan Matted so mecteen etn Saputeben a tekee bee etches 443 12 7 Preventive Maintenance for the RBS ccceesesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 446 V2 EEA SSUNSIIGIAS aair pate a lath caval a ae ee Ar aE irae dt RAE Si 447 12 7 2 Inte
116. Antenna on page 369 Remove the lower sunshield Unsnap the lower part of the left sunshield and unhook the sunshield from the RBS Mount the new left sunshield Mount the lower sunshield Set the RBS in Remote Mode Close the installation box door Replacing the upper sunshield P003090A Figure l 298 Replacing the upper sunshield Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Note If an external antenna is used the RBS does not need to be removed from service 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode 4 Remove the antenna If the used antenna is not an external antenna see Section 12 5 4 Sector Antenna on page 367 and Section 12 5 5 Omnidirectional Antenna on page 369 5 Remove the screwplugs 6 Unsnap the upper sunshield by pressing on the middle 7 Pull the sunshield up and to the right and remove it 8 Mount the new sunshield 9 Seal the two holes with the screwplugs 10 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 11 Close the installation box door Replacing the rear sunshield Note To replace the rear sunshield the cabinet must first be placed on the ground 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode 4 Switch
117. B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Note If an external antenna is used the RBS does not need to be removed from service 2 Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode 4 Remove the antenna If the used antenna is not an external antenna see Section 12 5 4 Sector Antenna on page 367 and Section 12 5 5 Omnidirectional Antenna on page 369 5 Unsnap the sunshield by pressing the fasteners located on the middle on the sunshield 6 Pull the sunshield down and unhook it 7 Mount the new sunshield in its cut out in the left side of the radio cabinet 8 Snap the sunshield into position 9 Set the RBS in Remote Mode 10 Close the installation box door Replacing the left sunshield WD P003089A Figure 297 Replacing the left sunshield LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 359 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 360 488 Note 10 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily If an external antenna is used the RBS does not need to be removed from service Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Remove the antenna If the used antenna is not an external antenna see Section 12 5 4 Sector Antenna on page 367 and Section 12 5 5 Omnidirectional
118. B 2000 11 17 TEMS TF TG Timing bus TLS TM TN O amp M Tora TRA Tracy TRS TRX TS TT TX TXA TXB TXU UAS Glossary TEI is an identification code carried by a LAPD frame as a terminal connection endpoint within a Service Access Point SAP TEst Mobile Station Timing Function Transceiver Group The timing bus carries air timing information from the timing unit in the DXU to the TRUs Terrestrial Link Supervision Transport Module Transport Network Operation and Maintenance in general ASIC in the TRU Transcoder Rate Adapter The TRA Unit in BSC performs transcoding of speech information and rate adaption of data information ASIC in the TRU Transceiver System Transceiver combined transmitter and receiver Time Slot A 0 577 ms period TDMA frame subunit corresponding to 156 25 raw bits of information The eight time slots of each TDMA frame are numbered 0 7 gt Burst Total Time Transmitter Transmitter Antenna branch A Transmitter Antenna branch B Radio Transmitter Unit Unavailable Seconds Underwriters Laboratories Ericsson Radio Systems AB 487 488 All Rights Reserved Glossary 488 488 Uplink UPS VCO VSWR X bus Signalling direction from the MS to the system Uninterrupted Power Supply Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voltage Standing Wave Ratio RF signal measure The quotient between transmitted and reflected power T
119. B has delivered installed and tested the Network Element cece cccecccesecseeeceeeeceseueeeseaeeeeueeeeees as defined in contract a The Network element acceptance has been performed in accordance with the procedures described in the above mentioned contract Further reference should be made to the acceptance documents The Network element passed acceptance with remarks per attached test report Number of remarks within Ericsson s responsibilities that have been made on The Buyer The Contractor Company Name Company Name s Person Responsible Person Responsible P004631B 288 488 Figure 256 Example of a Network Element Acceptance Certificate Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Fault Handling 11 Fault Handling 11 1 Fault Tracing Hints Table 47 Fault tracing hints Fault LED is flashing Reset the RBS CPU Reset button Check BTS Software Install IDB The RBS cannot be integrated Make sure that the transmission cable into the system between the RBS and the Installation Box is correctly connected The OMT will not install IDB e Push the local remote button until the RBS is in local mode e Push the CPU Reset button and try again The OMT will not read IDB e Check that the cable is correctly connected e Reset the RBS CPU Reset button The RBS will not take CF into e Check that the cables are correctly service when using a BSC co
120. BS with full functionality OPerational Instructions Power Amplifier Power Amplifier Module Printed Board Assembly Power and Battery Cabinet Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Paging CHannel Downlink only subchannel of CCCH for system paging of MSs gt CCCH Pulse Coded Modulations used as a name for the G 703 transmission interface Packet Control Unit Packet Data Channel Power Forward LZN 302 74 R6B Physical Channel PIN PLB PREFL PSA PSU RACH RAI RAM RBS RBS 2000 Remote mode RF RLC RLC RSL R state RTN RU Glossary An air interface physical channel carries one or more logical channels A physical channel uses a combination of frequency and time division multiplexing and is defined as a sequence of radio frequency channels and time slots gt TDMA frame gt Logical channel Personal Identification Number Payload Loop Back Power Reflected Power Supply Adapter Power Supply Unit Random Access CHannel Uplink only subchannel of CCCH for MS request for allocation of a dedicated channel gt CCCH Remote Alarm Indication Random Access Memory Radio Base Station All equipment forming one or more Ericsson base stations gt BTS New RBS generation When the RU is in RU mode Remote a link is established between the BCS and the central main RU Radio Frequency Radio Link Control Repair Logistic Centre Radio Signalling Link Release state Return Repl
121. BSC that is to the next base station In stand alone configuration only the PCM A ports are used The PCM B IN port has then to be terminated with a resistor between 10 100 Q Type of Interfaces Tail cable for 75 Q unbalanced line Provided with TNC female connectors Connected to a terminal block in the interface box Balanced line is conneced directly to a terminal block in the interface box Terminators A terminating resistor is mounted on the terminal block in the interface box This resistor terminates the PCM B port The terminating resistor in the interface box is removed when the PCM B connection is used Ericsson Radio Systems AB 463 488 All Rights Reserved Product Data 13 1 15 464 488 Cascading aa LTT ERICSSON amp P004549A Figure 423 Cascaded cabinets RBS 2302 can be cascaded This means that the unused time slots from the first base station in a chain are cascaded to a second base station located at some distance from the first one The cable to the next base station in the chain is connected to the PCM B port The terminator is not mounted in this case Incoming cable from the previous base station in the chain is connected to PCM A port The distance between terminals depends on the type of cable or transmission media External Alarms For supervision of external equipment 8 external alarm circuits can be connected to a terminal bl
122. CTTTCTCTTCTCTCTS zz mmmmmm 200 aalala ala Je T plat FER ER ERK ERREREEEEK s sssss DOOOOG KKK KKK KK KKK KKKKX SESS O080000 WWWWW WWW WW A A A A A O000 OO0O0O00 ooao000 TANO HANQTOONDMANDTOON TNO NNNNA WHOOO t t T S E 90090 NAMNA MMN MMMM m N ice KK KK OK OK XXK LK OK OK KOK KOK OK OKO K X 780 s et gogo CTE E m Zz Z0 l O l Terminated when PCM B is not cascaded If no resistor is available temporarily use 509 a jumper cable TAN aa ae 9 xXx 7 E 7 P004574A Figure 271 Cable connections for RBS 2302 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 325 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Note These schematics show all possible connections including the options depending on the configuration at the site 12 3 Maintenance General for the PBC This chapter contains essential information regarding the user interface of the PBC Shut down and Start up procedures 12 3 1 Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to familiarize the user with the Power and Battery Cabinet PBC The location of the Interface is shown and an explanation is given on how to read the alarms and executed command on the PBC display supplied 12 3 2 Location of the PBC User Interface The PBC user interface including optical indicators power switches and control buttons is located behind the installation box door P003166A Figure 272 Sealing screws and key for the installation b
123. Calibrate at 3 year intervals Sunshields To exchange the sunshields see Section 12 5 3 on page 357 Table 69 Checklist Sunshield Checklist 1 Are the sunshields dirty 2 Are the sunshields damaged 3 Are the sunshields discoloured Corrective actions 1 Clean the sunshield with a mild detergent 2 Exchange the sunshields if they are damaged discoloured or deformed due to high temperature Internal Battery The internal battery is guaranteed to last six years from the manufacturing date year week on the battery label Replace the battery before the date expires manufacturing date six years Depending on the circumstantial facts like temperature frequent power failures etc at the site the maintenance period may need to be shortened See Section 12 5 8 on page 373 Cooling flanges 1 Remove the sunshields see Section 12 5 3 on page 357 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 447 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 7 4 12 7 5 12 7 6 12 7 7 448 488 2 Clean the cooling flanges on the front with a soft brush 3 Clean the sunshield if necessary 4 Clean the cooling flanges on the back of the radio cabinet Connection Board To exchange the RBS Connection board see Section 12 5 13 on page 387 Transmission Board To exchange the RBS transmission board see Section 12 5 14 on page 393 AC Board To exchange the RBS AC board see Section 12 5 15 on page 397 Internal S
124. Carrier Advised Code at the Network Interface point the Line Attenuation is the Line Attenuation between the NI and the RBS 1 added to the Line Attenuation between RBS 1 and RBS 2 For a maximum input signal level at the Far End the total Line Attenuation is the Line Attenuation between the Far End and the RBS 1 added to the Line Attenuation between RBS 1 and RBS 2 The port A of RBS 3 is set as if RBS 1 and RBS 2 were in Bypass State and so on Ericsson Radio Systems AB 223 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests The port B outputs should always have LBO 0 dB Long h 0 dB attenuation for all RBSs RBS 1 RBS 2 RBS 3 Line att 5 dB P004497A Figure 228 Example 1 of multidrop using manual LBO parameters RBS 1 Carrier Advise Code at NI 15 dB and Line Attenuation 5 dB RBS 2 Line Attenuation between RBS 1 and RBS 2 3 dB Line Att between RBS 1 and NI 5 dB 8 dB RBS 3 Line Attenuation between RBS 2 and RBS 3 9 dB Line Att between RBS 2 and RBS 1 3 dB Line Att between RBS 1 and NI 5 dB 17 dB See Table 29 on page 221 LBO parameters for RBS 1 LBO A Long h 15 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB LBO parameters for RBS 2 LBO A Long h 7 5 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB LBO parameters for RBS 3 LBO A Long h 0 dB e LBO B Long h 0 dB Example 2 of multidrop using LBO parameters When none of the following are known Carrier Advise Cod
125. Commissioning Staff 280 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 10 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration Example of Exchange data for a 6 TRX cabinet GS ETRBLT O RBLT PCM DEV TS 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 31 DCP I O R 140 141 142 RXOTRX N 143 RXOTRX 144 a 145 i P004991A Figure 251 An example of an 6 TRX cabinet This is an example of how the exchange data can be arranged for a 6 TRX cabinet This is set up by RXAPI on TG level for the IS towards the BSC and with RXMOI on TRX level for the IS towards the TRX Definition of Managed Objects 1 Create the MOs in the RBS equipment Command Command Command Command Command RXMOI MO RXOTG 0 COMB HYB RSITE SITE1 SWVER swver RXMOI MO RXOCF 0 TEI 62 RXMOI MO RXOCON 0 DCP 64 amp amp 87 RXMOI MO RXOIS 0 RXMOI MO RXOTF 0 TFMODE SA Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 281 488 RBS Site Integration 282 488 2 Definition of Abis paths Note Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 0
126. D EXECUTED 19 Deblock the managed object TX Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOTX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 20 Deblock the managed object RX Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 21 Deblock the managed object TS Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 22 Repeat step 18 on page 264 to step 21 on page 264 for each TRX s 10 5 2 Activation of BTS PCM Supervision Optional This should only be done if BTS PCM Supervision is used That is if the Managed Object DP is defined taken into service and deblocked 1 Deblock the BTS PCM Supervision DIP Command DTBLE DIP modip Expected result EXECUTED 2 Check DIP state the DIP should be working Command DTSTP DIP modip Printout DIGITAL PATH STATE 264 488 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 5 3 10 5 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 3 RBS Site Integration Check that the MO DP state is operational OPER Command RXMSP MO RXODP x y Printo
127. D Low Voltage Directive LVF Low Voltage Filter MAC Medium Access Controller MADT Mean Accumulated DownTime Main RU A main replaceable unit is a replaceable unit that contains one or more processors to which software can be downloaded from the BSC MCB MultiCasting Box MHS Modification Handling System Ericsson trouble report database MMI Man Machine Interface MO Managed Object MRT Mean Repair Time MS Mobile Station MTBF Mean Time Between Failure MTBCF Mean Time Between Catastrophe Failure NCS National Colour System Ericsson Radio Systems AB 483 488 All Rights Reserved Glossary 484 488 NMS Nominal Power NTU O amp M OMC OMT Operation OPI PA PAM PBA PBC PC PCB PCH PCM PCU PDCH PFWD Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Ericsson Network Management System in DXX The nominal power is the power level defined when configuring the transceiver Network Terminating Unit Operation and Maintenance General term for activities such as configuration utilization of channels frequency bands cell planning system supervision hardware and software maintenance subscriber administration and so forth Operation and Maintenance Centre Operation and Maintenance Terminal The OMT is a terminal that supports functions for handling the RBS on site The terminal can be a portable PC Operation is the normal everyday running of the R
128. D OBJECT RESULT Expected result case 1 EXECUTED Expected result case 2 EXECUTED 13 Bring the managed objects TRX into service Command RXESI MO RXOTRX x y Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 MO NOT LOADABLE FROM THE BSC Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 14 Bring the managed objects TX into service Command RXESI MO RXOTX x y Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 15 Bring the managed objects RX into service Command RXESI MO RXORX x y Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 16 Bring the managed objects TS 0 to TS 7 into service Command RXESI MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 17 Repeat step 13 on page 263 to step 16 on page 263 for each TRX s LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 263 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 18 Deblock the managed object TRX Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOTRX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTE
129. D sub connector and secure the connection cover with two screws 13 Fasten all front sunshields and close all installation box doors Mounting the Fan Unit optional DANGER A Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electrical shock Approved circuit breakers for the AC mains and the cable s cross sectional area must always be selected in accordance with local laws and regulations Only a qualified and authorized electrician is permitted to install and modify the electrical installation Protective Earth A reliable incoming Protective Earth must be connected to the earth terminal when connecting power supply The earth terminal is located in the connection box indicated by PE and the earth symbol S Figure 107 Protective Earth The Protective Earth connection is essential Ericsson Radio Systems AB 121 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 Note Make sure the AC Mains is switched off before beginning the AC installation procedure Note The Fan Unit can only be mounted after the sunshields have been mounted P004263A Figure 108 Fan Unit overview 1 Remove the two screw plugs on top of the radio cabinet P004382A Figure 109 Mounting the relay bar 2 Mount the relay bar and fasten it with the 2 screws 122 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17
130. DATA 10 4 2 Check the BTS Software 1 Verify that the correct BTS software version is stored on the harddisc in the IOG11 It is one file with a number of subfiles which should be named btsfilename HEADER Check if it is defined and the SW is loaded Example For a RBS 2000 BTS SW in the CME 20 R6 the btsfilename should be B4311Rxxxx Command INMCT SPG 0 Printout Command INFIP FILE btsfilename Printout FILE ATTRIBUTES Command END Printout 2 Verify that the existing BTS software is defined for the TG Command RXMOP MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 259 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 10 4 3 10 4 4 10 5 10 5 1 260 488 3 Ifthe wrong software version is in use activate the desired BTS software version Command RXMSC MO RXOTG x SWVER correct_btssoftware Expected Result EXECUTED Command RXMSC MO RXOCEF x SWVER DEFAULT Expected Result EXECUTED Command RXMSC MO RXOTRX x y amp amp z SWVER DEFAULT Expected Result EXECUTED 4 Verify that the new BTS software is defined for the TG Command RXMOP MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA Check the Abis Paths Check that the Abis paths are correctly defined for example that the RBLT devices are tied to the correct position in the IS For further information see Helpf
131. DB Define External Alarms Fault Status Reading External Alarm Test Site Name Cell configuration LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ LJ TEI Value RBS 2 RBS 3 GSM Remark RBS type Testers Name 2302 NE STAND ALONE TEST RBS 4 RBS 5 HDSL Configuration RBS 1 Multidrop Stand Alone RBS 1 PCM Parameters Settings Short Haul feet Long Haul dB RBS 2 RBS 3 RBS 4 RBS 5 LBO A Notes POO6056A Figure 234 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Test Record for Stand Alone Tests Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 239 488 Site Installation Tests 8 22 3 8 22 4 240 488 Trouble Report A trouble report should be written when system components are not operating as expected or when disturbances occur repeatedly It should not be written for occasional hardware failures When writing a trouble report always include as much information as possible such as log files and IDB Write the trouble report as soon as possible preferably at the RBS site An example of a filled in trouble report and a trouble report form are included in chapter Fault Handling The trouble report should be sent to the nearest FSC Field Support Centre for resolution and registration in the Ericsson trouble report system MHS Modification Handling System The FSC should forward the trouble report via the node MHO ERA
132. Decoding of Fault Maps Note No decoding of Fault Maps is necessary from RBS 2000 release HRB 105 01 2 revision R7 The Fault Maps will be presented in plain text Fault Type The following instructions can be used when a fault map sent to OMC must be translated into a decimal number An example is when the error log has been printed All fault and replacement unit codes consist of a number of hexadecimal digits in most cases twelve These twelve digits represent Ericsson Radio Systems AB 291 488 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling a map that consists of 48 bits Each bit represents a decimal number and can be translated into a description by using the fault code list and the replacement unit map Excepted from this rule are codes for external faults These codes contain only four hexadecimal digits which means 16 bits The decoding principle is the same as for the twelve digit code Example 1 SO CF has reported an internal class 1A fault The fault code is 000000004100 Table 49 Fault code 000000004100 o fo jo jo fo fo fo jo 4 jh fo Jo Bits number 8 and 14 are set to 1 which means that faults number 8 and 14 are active in the CF class 1A fault list Translating the numbers by using the information in the fault list gives the two faults Timing unit VCO fault fault number 8 and Local bus fault fault number 14 Example 2 SO TRXC has reported a replacement unit code 000000000001 Tab
133. Enter LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Action Digit step up Digit step down Activates command selection Executes commands Ericsson Radio Systems AB 199 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 4 4 200 488 Fault messages OPERATIONAL FAULT P003298A Figure 212 Display view if no faults are detected If there are no faults this is indicated on the alarm display as shown in Figure 212 on page 200 If a fault occurs the relevant fault code is automatically displayed see page 204 To detect if there are several faults step through the fault codes using the push buttons Up and Down see Table 19 on page 199 Except for temperature alarms all alarm codes originate from active faults that is no fault history is stored Power Switches in the PBC P003174A Figure 213 Location of power switches in the PBC Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 5 8 5 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal Note When the AC power is turned off with the AC power switch in the PBC there is still AC voltage both on the AC board in the interface box and on the EMC board in the installation box up to
134. HDSL pair is connected to the PCM A OUT i e X31 4 and X31 5 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X31 3 and X31 6 ground connections See page 86for earthing options Ericsson Radio Systems AB 99 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 100 488 HDSL Cascading Upstream One Pair Downstream One Pair B NMO KH NYNTWHOO NHN ANNAN KK KKK K KKK KK gt lOO CIelatetelerete stolefotolelere COOCOOC CPOO OC COOC CPOOOOD a E ES UPSTREAM Shield DOWNSTREAM HDSL HDSL P004402B Figure 75 Upstream pair is connected to the PCM A IN i e X31 1 and X31 2 Shield if available is connected to X31 3 ground connection Downstream pair is connected to the PCM B OUT i e X32 4 and X32 5 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X32 6 ground connection See page 86 for earthing options PCM Upstream HDSL Downstream One Pair B TFAMTOO KH NYNATMOO rrrrrr OII C Oe Ce N OD gt lt gt lt X lt gt lt KK KKK L OK OK poooosadt Shield DOWNSTREAM UPSTREAM PCM HDSL P004404B Figure 76 The HDSL pair is connected to the PCM B OUT i e X32 4 and X32 5 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X32 6 ground connection See page 86 for earthing options Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000
135. High voltage is used in the operation of this equippment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal DANGER A Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electrical shock Approved circuit breakers for the AC mains and the cable s cross sectional area must always be selected in accordance with local laws and regulations Only a qualified and authorized electrician is permitted to install and modify the electrical installation Protective Earth A reliable incoming Protective Earth must be connected to the earth terminal when connecting power supply The earth terminal is located in the interface box indicated by PE and the earth symbol S Figure 159 Protective Earth The Protective Earth connection is essential Connecting AC It is not possible to loosen the gland plate for the AC cable from the interface box Thus the AC cable can not be mounted at ground level Follow the procedure below to connect the AC mains power cable Note Make sure the AC Mains is switched off before beginning the AC installation procedure 1 Route the AC mains cable so the interface box can be pushed up into the cabinet If a flexible conduit is to be used replace the AC mains cable inlet feed throught with the flexible conduit and its fastening device see Figure 162 on page 156 2 Cut the cable to the appropriate length Ericsson Radio System
136. I port on the BSC simulator and to the input inside the installation box marked OMT Note Always connect the BSC simulator to the Master RBS BSCSim II R2A or later is required 3 Connect the BSC simulator adapter to the input on the BSC simulator Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 eo enn 10 11 Optional Tests Connect the cables between the BCS simulator via the HTU to the interface box El 120 Q 1 Remove the existing PCM A cables plug from the interface box 2 Connect the coaxial cable C6 to the BNC connectors on the BSC simulator adapter 3 Connect the coaxial cable C6 from the BSC simulator to the SMB connectors on the HTU 4 Connect the cable C5 to the RJ45 socket on the HTU and connect the cables plug to the PCM A socket in the interface box Connect cable C2 to the antenna inlet on the mobile and to the adapter Ad1 Connect the adapter Ad1 to the first attenuator A1 Connect the three attenuators Al together Connect the third attenuator Al to the Multicasting Box MCB Make sure that the RBS are switched off or is not transmitting Disconnect the antenna jumper cables from the antenna outputs X2 and X3 on the RBS Connect the cables from the MCB to the antenna outputs on the RBS TX RX Ant A to X2 TX RX Ant B to X3 Switch on the PBC if used RBS HTU if used and the BSC simulator Test Sequence 1
137. ING Master cabinet Indicated on all cabinets Ericsson Radio Systems AB Site Installation Tests Description Not operational or change Local Remote mode in progress When in local mode e Operational but not in traffic When in remote mode e Connected to BSC and considered operational by the BSC One of the following reasons e Receiving application software Restart pending e Configuration in progress this may take more than 10 seconds to complete The RBS is in remote mode The RBS is in local mode Change of mode in progress All TRXs are operational At least one TRX is not operational Not used Not used AC power not available AC power available Battery connected Battery disconnected or faulty Low battery DC voltage No external alarm s active External alarm s active External alarm on Extension cabinet s 195 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 3 4 Switches and Connectors Switches Switch Function CPU reset button Reset of the RBS Local remote button Change between Local Remote mode Test Not used Configuration 4 TRX or 6 TRX CPU reset and change of mode can be performed on both Master and Extension cabinet s Connectors Connector Function OMT Connector for the OMT cable 13 MHz Connector for RF measurements and calibration Note Configuration 4 6 TRX all cabinets are controlled by the OMT connector on the Master cabinet
138. Interface 010 30dB lt _ LBO O to 22 5 dB P004498A Figure 224 Long Haul Long Haul makes it possible to transmit and receive over longer distances than Short Haul without additional transmission equipment The Long Haul functionality is accomplished by high sensitivity in the receiver The receiver dynamic range is from 0 down to 30 dB To cope with noise a margin should be used For T1 it is also possible to attenuate the output signal with LBO LBO is used to avoid overloading the receiver at the Far End and to minimise cross talk To take advantage of Long Haul the transmission equipment in both ends must support Long Haul functionality If two equipments are connected together the equipment with the least sensitive receiver determines the maximum attenuation of the cables that can be used RBS 1 RBS 2 P004499A Figure 225 Line Build Out Line Build Out is only used for T1 transmission interface in Long Haul cases Line Build Out should not be mixed up with LBO parameters which are defined with the OMT Line Build Out is the possibility to attenuate the output signal sent from the RBS The purpose of Line Build Out is to reduce cross talk and to be able to send signals to different kind of Far Ends For example if two RBSs are at different distances from the Far End the signal received from the 220 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved
139. KING OF MANAGED OBJEKT RESULT EXECUTED RXBLI MO RXORX x y FORCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED 269 488 RBS Site Integration Call test from MS on RXD B 1 270 488 Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected Result Repeat for all TRX s RXESE MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT OUT OF SERVICE RESULT EXECUTED Configure diversity parameter to RXD B for all RX s in the TG Command Expected Result RXMOC MO RXORX x y RXD B EXECUTED Bring all RX s in the TG into service and deblock the RX s and the TS s Command Printout Expected Result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected Result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected Result Repeat for all TRX s RXESI MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT LOADED RXBLE MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED RXBLE MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED Check that the cell is configured with logical channels Command Printout RLCRP CELL cell CELL RESOURCES Block all TRX s except for one Command Printout Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved RXBLI MO RXOTRX x y FO
140. Make sure that the connectors and the DIP switches are set correctly according to chapter Site Installation Tests Set HTU parameters To confirm a selection press Enter on the HTU Select HTU 2M Select Params Select HDSLine Select HDSLTyp and OTU Select LineMod and choose 1x2M one pair or 2x1M two pairs depending on the configuration see Table 43 on page 250 6 Select Role and choose Master when using the HTU the HTU is always defined as Master and the HDSL modem as Slave A ee a BO Ao 7 Select NWTopol and choose P_to_P or Chain depending on the configuration see Table 43 on page 250 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 249 488 All Rights Reserved Optional Tests 250 488 8 Select Update and choose Update The display shows UPDATING 9 Go back to the main menu by pressing Exit three times 3 Check on the HDSL modem that the LEDs are indicating the correct configuration see Section HDSL Modem LEDs on page 250 4 Check on the HTU that LineCnd on the display shows OK for one pair or OK OK for two pairs If not check the connections and make sure that the correct configuration is used 5 Make call tests diversity A and B using the BSC simulator The test is passed when calls have been made on all TRXs At least one timeslot must be tested in each TRX 6 When the test is completed disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the cables to the PCM A socket in
141. Measuring of radio frequency and interference Producing digital maps and data Site Acquisition The Site Acquisition process is performed in close co operation with the Civil Works process and to some extent with the Engineering process The Site Acquisition process consists of the following activities Searching for sites and gaining a site appraisal Outlining the site design and evaluating the cost Negotiating and signing leasing contracts Handling permits and arranging a hand over to the Engineering personnel Civil Works The Civil Works process is performed in close co operation with the Site Acquisition process and to some extent with the Engineering process The Civil Works process consists of the following activities Preparing a detailed civil works design of the site Updating the costs for the site construction Arranging the site construction Performing a site inspection and handing over an as built document to the Engineering personnel Engineering The Engineering process begins when the Site Acquisition process and Civil Works process are complete The Engineering process consists of the following activities Measuring and collecting information about the sites Designing the antenna and radio configuration and producing cable drawings Making drawings showing the position of antenna and RBS equipment Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights
142. O s into service and deblock Activate BTS PCM Supervision Verify BTS Software Activate and Check the Cell Agree upon Parameters Test call using TEMS Diversity Testcall Testcall from fixed Network Test of External Alarm Leaving Site Routines Handover Test Concluding Concluding Routines Routines P006041B Figure 245 Flowchart that describes the BSC and BTS actions and the interactions between them LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 255 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 3 10 3 1 256 488 Preconditions The preconditions are listed separately for the BSC and for the RBS on Site The work can only begin when both those lists of preconditions have been fulfilled Preconditions for the BSC The NE network element tests for the BSC must have been performed The integration test of MSC VLR must have been performed e g it must be possible to make calls Exchange data for definition of Managed Objects Cells and Abis paths must be loaded For further information see Helpful Hints Section 10 10 on page 276 The transmission to the RBS site must be working before performing the call tests The correct RBS software must have been loaded into the IOG Preconditions for the RBS If Transport Modules TM are used they must be loaded
143. Oo COCCOCISOSSSS ele E pooo ESD pooococoocogdoooooocogdooocog ae Hees Ges P003270A Figure 67 Connecting the PCM B cable 100 120 22 1 Remove the premounted 50 Q resistance between X32 1 and X32 2 on the PCM B termination block 2 If jumper wires are preinstalled beteween X32 2 and X32 3 and X32 5 and X32 6 respectively remove them 3 Connect the PCM B 100 120 Q cable twisted pair 4 Earth the cable in one of the ways that are described on page 86 Compare with Figure 64 on page 92 which show the corresponding connections for the PCM A termination block 5 Connect the PCM B cable to the next cabinet Connections according to Section Cascade Connection Connection between the Cabinets on page 94 Cascade Connection Connection between the Cabinets This section deals with the connection between the cabinets when cascade connection is used Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 RBS 1 PCM B RBS 2 PCM A P006195B Figure 68 Connection between RBS 1 and RBS 2 cascade connection 75 2 coaxial cable The figure above shows the connection for the transmission between RBS 1 and RBS 2 cascade connection for 75 Q coaxial cable LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 95 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 P006173A Figure 69 Connection
144. Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 17 4 1 Antennas and Front Sunshields for RBS 2802 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 4 2 Other Sunshields and Accessories for RBS 2302 cccceeeeetteeeees 21 4 3 Internal Battery and Power Supply Adapter for RBS 2302 0 23 4 4 Optional Fan Unit for RBS 2302 ss uccotcte i stotag seeded eee eee 25 4 5 Replaceable Boards for RBS 2302 cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneeeees 27 4 6 Fuses Screws and Installation Details for RBS 2302 29 4 7 Sunshields for PBC i c23ccope lke ttetieeettle teil e tale ta te eaeatece lips 31 4 8 Batteries for P BG csco3 nts a veos Gord isd cn cage asaden dak essere teshash ea daebgalsderessate 33 4 9 Replaceable Boards for PBC cccccccececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeneeeeees 35 4 10 Fuses Screws and Installation Details for PBC eee 37 5 Other Available Parts iccisisvsit eect ciciihcnieunterntetitunearts pin wniteanwtid ovaendaias tinauwenutl 39 5 1 Battery Accessories for RBS 2302 ccccceceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 5 2 Other Available Parts for RBS 2302 Mechanics ccceeeeeeeeeeees 43 5 3 Other Available Parts for RBS 2302 Cables eccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 45 5 4 Battery Accessories for PBC ceccceseeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeaeeeees 47 5 5 Other Available Parts for PBC Mechanics ccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 49 5 6 Other Ava
145. Power system in stand alone mode External power fault Internal power capacity reduced Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Remark R6 and later Micro RBS only Micro RBS only Remark R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault No 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Fault type Battery backup capacity reduced Climate capacity reduced CU HW fault Heater capacity reduced Loadfile missing in DXU or ECU Climate sensor fault System voltage sensor fault A D converter fault Varistor fault Local bus fault High frequency software fault Non volatile memory corrupted RX diversity lost Output voltage fault Optional synchronisation source RU database corrupted Circuit breaker tripped Default values used RX cable disconnected Reset DXU link lost Lost communication to TRU Lost communication to ECU Internal configuration failed Indoor temperature above normal conditional range Indoor temperature below normal conditional range DB parameter fault Auxiliary Equipment Fault SO CF external condition map class 1 Fault No 0 np 15 Fault type L R SWI BTS in local mode L R TI Local to remote while link lost Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Fault Handling Remark R6 and later R6 a
146. Preface for the Spare Parts Catalogue 1 1 Release History In addition to editorial changes such as corrections of spelling grammar and layout the following changes have been made for each release Only the three latest revisions are listed below R1A to R2A e GSM 1900 Radio Unit variants Optional cables for 4 and 6 TRX R2A to R3A Optional external Fan Unit for RBS 2302 Optional HDSL modem for RBS 2302 R3A to R3B New productnumbers for RBS 2302 manuals R3B to R3C Subsection Packages for Repairable Products added to section Other Available Parts Note Available from Q1 99 removed throughout Multicasting Box filter unit changed to Filter Unit Multicasting Box EMC board changed to EMC In Board DC alarm board changed to DC Surge Board AC board changed to AC Surge Board See Section 6 1 on page 56 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Spare Parts Philosophy for RBS 2302 Spare Parts Philosophy for RBS 2302 Specification and classification of spare parts is done during the service preparation process which is a part of the desing process The result is a spare part list containing three classes of spare parts 1 Recommended for customer stock Intended to be replaced on site and intended to be repaired at an Ericsson Repair Center former code U 2 Recommended for customer stock Inten
147. R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration This test instruction describes the procedure for loading and test of the Base Transceiver Station BTS of RBS 2000 series type Introduction This chapter contains information about how to integrate a RBS site into the Network and make it work Overview RBS Site Integration PCM Link RBS 2000 Local Remote mode P004822B Figure 244 The integration of the RBS is performed with the RBS connected to the Integrating the BTS into the Network which is operated by the BSC BSC and in close cooperation with the BSC personnel The Man Machine Language MML commands within this chapter are performed from the BSC Throughout the instruction the site specific parameters are referred to as x and y x Transceiver group number y Transceiver number All test results for the RBS should be documented in the Test Record by the RBS commission staff Range of Test The RBS commissioning staff will switch the RBS from local to remote mode Communication will then be established between BSC and RBS The following managed objects are brought into service and deblocked by command from the BSC TG Transceiver Group CF Central Functions IS Interface Switch DP Digital Path CON LAPD Concentrator Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 253 488 RB
148. RA E E A se ae A glans tN i eae ei 189 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 7 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 7 10 1 Test Record Supplement c cccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaaeeeeeeeseeaeeees 190 8 Sit Installation Tests miisi Aedes avantasviesivavinauceailaewuevheasasisivinduaaearnaud 191 Od PrefaCE ninia r E E Ea O ee aAa EEEa 191 8 1 1 About These Tests acc cic ccden eich otedt ncaa vcicnceste esse ete tne Liane nd chee spalnendben sien 191 8 1 2 Testing Procedure su cst ctees as ree Steed ere ea See Acoraceeee ite eed 191 9 2 PIE COMMONS periran ae aiae ces a a AEA ENEE EEE EENAA ces 191 8 2 1 Preyd s RO OA S cas ee ee Lk a eh in 191 8 2 2 Software requireMent cccccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 191 8 2 3 Removal of Conducting Material cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 8 3 Radio Cabinet RBS 2302 0 ceececcceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 192 9 3 1 HMUPOCUCLO Dien oats a baat aca ee ea al a tel he ah oe al tee 192 8 3 2 Location of the RBS User Interface ccecceeceesscceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 8 3 3 Optical Indicators as eee aes ce eS ee cea ns es 193 8 3 4 Switches and CONnNeCtols ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 8 3 5 Power Switches in the RBS asectscet pect eran eee eceeipee coeds 196 8 4 Power and Battery Cabinet Optional
149. RCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration 2 Check that one TRX is configured with BCCH and SDCCH Command Printout RXCDP MO RXOTG x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION CONFIGURATION DATA 3 Make a call to an MS in the cell 4 Check that one TCH is BUSY Verify the speech connection Command RLCRP CELL cell Printout CELL RESOURCES Note Verify ARFCN and TS with the TEMS mobile 5 Terminate the call 6 Check that the TCH is released Command Printout RLCRP CELL cell CELL RESOURCES 7 Deblock the blocked TRX s Command Printout RXBLE MO RXOTRX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT 8 Repeat step 1 on page 270 to step 7 on page 271 until all TRX s in the cell are tested Document the results in the Test Records Restoration of Cell 1 Block all RX s in the TG and bring them out of service Command Printout Expected result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected Result Repeat for all TRX s LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved RXBLI MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 FORCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED RXBLI MO RXORX x y FORCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJEKT RESULT EXECUTED 2
150. RX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOTX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA RXMOP MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA 2 Check that BTS PCM Supervision DIP is defined Command Printout DTDIP DIP modip DIGITAL PATH 3 Check definitions for cell data Command Printout Command Printout 258 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved RLLBP LOCATING BSC DATA RLDEP CELL cell CELL DESCRIPTION DATA LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration Note Make a note of the parameter BCCHNO s value and of the parameter BSIC s value it will be needed during the Call Test Command RLCFP CELL cell Printout CELL CONFIGURATION FREQUENCY DATA Note Make a note of the parameter DCHNO s different values it will be needed during the Call Test Command RLCPP CELL cell Printout CELL CONFIGURATION POWER DATA Command RLLOP CELL cell Printout CELL LOCATING DATA Command RLLUP CELL cell Printout CELL LOCATING URGENCY DATA Command RLLDP CELL cell Printout CELL LOCATING DISCONNECT DATA Command RLLPP CELL cell Printout CELL LOCATING PENALTY DATA Command RLMFP CELL cell Printout CELL MEASUREMENT FREQUENCIES Command RLNRP CELL cell CELLR ALL Printout NEIGHBOUR RELATION
151. S Site Integration 254 488 TF Timing Function TRX Transceiver TX Transmitter RX Receiver TS Time Slot During deblocking the following actions are performed for every MO Clearing any indication of faults Performing a reset on the RBS Managed Object Ensuring that the Managed Object instance in question has the correct software loaded If this is not the case the correct version will be loaded Updating the equipment with it s required operational data In addition to actions detailed above a loop test will be performed for managed objects of class TS This will verify that the managed object is capable of carrying traffic The cell is activated e g radio equipment will be enabled When the cell is active and configured call tests will be made over the air interface Tests will be performed on RXA and RXB separately if a tests with the BSC simulator has not already been performed For information about tests with the BSC simulator see chapter Optional Tests The external alarms will be tested by simulating alarms in the RBS and check that the correct alarm string is received in the BSC Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration 10 1 3 Flowchart Actions at BSC Actions at BTS Transmission Test Check of Data Check BTS Software Check Abis Path Check Digital Path Bring M
152. S from fixed Network 1 Check that one TRX is configured with BCCH and SDCCH Command RXCDP MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION CONFIGURATION DATA 2 Make a call from a fixed network phone at the BSC to the MS 3 Check that one TCH is BUSY Verify the speech connection Command RXCRP CELL cell Printout CELL RESOURCES Note Verify ARFCN and TS with the TEMS mobile 4 Terminate the call 5 Check that the TCH is released Command RXCRP CELL cell Printout CELL RESOURCES 6 Document the result in the Test Record 7 Repeat for at least one TRX in every cell Test of External Alarms The alarm strings are defined in the BTS with OMT by the BTS commissioning staff The BTS commissioning staff will check that the correct alarm string is received in the RBS and sent to the BSC If the alarm string received in the BSC corresponds to the alarm receiver in the BTS that was triggered the definition is correct 1 Check which AT that is used for alarm printouts PRCA 64 Command IOROP Printout IO PRINTOUT ROUTING DATA 2 Ask the BTS commissioning staff to simulate an alarm in the BTS site Note Do not activate an alarm classified as severe 3 Verify that the correct alarm is received in the BSC on the terminal obtained in step 1 on page 273 4 Repeat step 1 on page 273 to step 3 on page 273 for all defined alarms Ericsson Radio Systems AB 273 488 All Rights Reserved RBS
153. Service RXESE RXESI Block RXBLI C ra Automatic PREOP Automatic C noor gt Automatic Automatic RXBLI P004988A Figure 254 Description of the relation between the different managed object states The current state of all MO s can be checked using the command Command RXMSD MO mo Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT STATE Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 11 Test Records 10 11 1 Network Element Integration Test NE Commissioning GSM NETWORK ELEMENT INTEGRATION TEST AIR INTERFACE CALL TEST E TSO TS1 TS2 T RBS Site Integration S3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 2 3 4 5 6 Cell A Cell B Cell C Antenna Attenvator E C C Settings Land to MS Call O Handover test Lo Ey Le CL Le Le AtoB AtoC BtoA BtoC CtoA CtoB External Alarm Test Concluding Routines 1 Update and save the IDB 2 Check the Software version and note it below 3 Checklist before ending test Init Appl Remarks P005554A Figure 255 Test Record for the Network Element Integration LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 287 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 10 11 2 Network Element Acceptance Certificate NETWORK ELEMENT ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE This is to certify that Ericsson Radio Systems A
154. Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 1 5 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Installation of RBS 2302 RO RBS 2302 Pole mounted RBS 2302 Wall mounted P003145A Figure 20 Installation alternatives Competence requirement In order to do installation work according to this manual in a safe and professional way the work shall be done by skilled personnel The following qualifications are minimum requirements Good understanding of radio and telephone engineering Good understanding of engineering English Preconditions Ensure that the following conditions are met Site access permission received Ordered RBS 2302 equipment specified tools and other necessary facilities have been delivered Electrical ducting is ready and AC mains power is available Earth Point is available Transmission line to BSC is available During bad weather conditions it may be necessary to protect the cabinet during installation When the cabinet is mounted outdoors it must not be left without power for more than 48 hours This requirement is caused by the risk of humidity damages Always use an approved antistatic bracelet to avoid damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 65 488 Installation of RBS 2302 5 2 1 5 2 2 5
155. T LOADED NOT LOADED 7 Deblock the managed object TG Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOTG x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 8 Deblock the managed object CF Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOCF x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 9 Deblock the managed object TF Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOTE x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 10 Deblock the managed object IS Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXBLE MO RXOIS x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED EXECUTED 11 Deblock the managed object CON 262 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration Command RXBLE MO RXOCON x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT Expected result case 1 EXECUTED Expected result case 2 EXECUTED 12 Deblock the managed object DP Command RXBLE MO RXODP x a a 0 or 1 Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGE
156. TEI 0 DCP1 128 DCP2 129 amp 130 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 1 TEI 1 DCP1 131 DCP2 132 amp 133 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 2 TEI 2 DCP1 134 DCP2 135 amp 136 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 3 TEI 3 DCP1 137 DCP2 138 amp 139 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 4 TEI 4 DCP1 140 DCP2 141 amp 142 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 0 5 TEI 5 DCP1 143 DCP2 144 amp 145 RXMOI MO RXOTX 0 0 amp amp 5 BAND GSM MPWR 40 RXMOI MO RXORX 0 0 amp amp 5 BAND GSM RXD AB RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 0 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 1 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 2 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 3 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 4 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 0 5 0 amp amp 7 If there are more than one cell in this transceiver group connect the cells to each TRX Perform the following commands for each TRX Command Command Command RXMOC MO RXOTRX 0 0 CELL TEST1 RXMOC MO RXOTX 0 0 CELL TEST1 RXAPI MO RXOTG 0 DEV RBLT 1 amp amp 18 DCP 1 amp amp 18 Definition of Managed Objects DP and CON These two MOs are optional and described in Section 10 10 5 on page 283 and Section 10 10 6 on page 283 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 10 5 10 10 6 10 10 7 10 10 8 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration LAPD Concentration Data TRXC TRXC TRXC a fa lA ue P004992A Figure 252 LAPD Concentration in RBS 2000 Command RXMOC MO R
157. Test List of including parts Item Qty MS cable 3 Adapter 1 Attenuator 30 dB 2 W 1 BSCSim II Kit Product No LPP 106 35 nn BSCSim II Kit Product No BSCSim II Kit LPP 106 35 10 Item Description Qty 1 PC Platform Fieldworks 1 2 BSCSim II Test Tools Software 1 3 BSCSim II User s guide 1 4 PCM Communication Kit 1 5 Cable Kit for Maxite and RBS 2000 1 6 Cable Kit for Maxite and RBS 2302 1 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 47 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Tools and Instruments 48 488 7 8 Microsoft Mouse Etherlink Card BSCSim II Kit BSCSim II Kit Item 1 Oo uu A OO WN OMT Kit Product No NTM 201 2289 1 R7 Software Item Description PC Platform Dolch BSCSim II Test Tools Software BSCSim II User s guide PCM Communication Kit Cable Kit for Maxite and RBS 2000 Cable Kit for Maxite and RBS 2302 OMT 32 Bit software OMT Cable RS 232 OMT User s Manual OMT Kit Product No NTM 201 2159 1 R6 Software Item OMT 32 Bit software OMT Cable RS 232 OMT User s Manual Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 1 1 Product No LPP 106 35 11 Qty 1 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 4 1 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements Site Planning and Requirements This section describes the installation engineering process Careful planning of preinstallation activities such as antennas
158. Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position 1 2 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 7 Close the installation box doors Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 12 7 Preventive Maintenance for the RBS This chapter provides information about the units requiring regular inspection and recommended intervals Preventive Maintenance is performed to inspect and correct faults before they cause serious damage to the equipment The interval between inspections at each RBS site varies depending upon the environmental conditions found there Outdoor sites are 446 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 7 1 12 7 2 12 7 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance exposed to larger amounts of contaminants and therefore require more maintenance than indoor sites The RBS operator can decide to increase or decrease the recommended interval between inspections as required RBS Maintenance Schedule Table 68 Preventive maintenance table RBS 5 Exchange the transmission board Exchange the transmission board at 10 year intervals 6 Exchange the AC board Exchange the AC board at 10 year intervals 7 Internal synchronisation optional
159. When the environmental stress is over and the environment has returned to normal conditions no manual intervention on the site is required to restore full performance of the base station Non destruction refers to a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 5 5 days in a three year period 13 2 6 Vibrations PBC withstands vibrations below 1 0 G and shocks below 25 G 13 2 7 Acoustical Noise PBC does not emit any acoustical noise 13 2 8 Power supply The PBC can be connected to the nominal mains supply voltages in Table 77 on page 462 The PBC shall be connected to a dedicated circuit in the power distribution board The circuit must be connected to the same phase as the RBS 2302 The circuit shall be fused with single fuse if the circuit is between phase and neutral and two fuses if the circuit is between two phases Note All units must be connected to the same phase Note Fuse value must not exceed 10 A The power distribution cable shall have two power supply conductors and one protective earth conductor Conductor size must be selected according to applicable electrical regulations Connections are made on terminals in the interface box on the mounting base The terminals will accept wires having a maximum area of 2 5 mm The mains voltage is connected between two of the terminals The third terminal is a screw terminal on the body used for protective earth The cable gland has cap
160. XOTG 0 CONFACT confact Command RXMOC MO RXOCEF 0 SIG CONC Command RXMOI MO RXOCON 0 DCP 64 amp amp 87 BTS PCM Supervision Command RXMOI MO RXODP 0 0 DEV RXODPI 0 Command DTDII DIP modip DEV RXODPI 0 Digital Path Data The Digital Path used towards an RBS 2000 site should be defined according to the following Command DTDII DIP RBLTx SNT ETRBLT x Command DTIDC DIP RBLTx MODE 0 INACT 0 MULTFS 00 CRC 0 CRC 0 Cyclic Redundancy Check will NOT be performed CRC 1 Cyclic Redundancy Check will be performed If CRC 1 the BTS commissioning staff has to set a parameter in the BTS with OMT otherwise CRC will NOT be performed In CME20 R6 and later versions it will not be possible to set the CRC parameter from the BSC Note The parameter MODE should always be set to 0 Installation of BTS Software in IOG The number of subfiles may differ usually 3 6 subfiles are used Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 283 488 RBS Site Integration btsfilename HEADER btsfilename LF1 btsfilename LF2 btsfilename LF3 and so on It is delivered on a number of floppy or optical discs Follow information provided with the BTS SW for information on how to load it If such information is missing follow the following hints or look for a proper OPI 1 Mount the disc s on the IOG with INVOL 2 Create a file on the HD of the IOG Command INMCT SPG 0 Command INFII FILE btsfil
161. ZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 127 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 128 488 Figure 120 17 cover hang in the strap Opening the installation box cover P004435A Unscrew the 8 torx screws on the interface box cover Let the oOooooofoooo0oo0oq a E C g External Alarms External Alarms External Alarms OOOOOCOOCOWOOOOOOO CFO 0 OO aS eS ES Z2222222 Ee EE Ee be oe amp EE T C E E E E AAA E ee et ed NANNNDNNNN NNNHNDNHNWNW EFEEFEEFEE EEEEEEEE HROGTCTCTCTCTVCGT CTOTCTGTTCTCG r ei ERERERREREER EAEE x KKK KKK KK KKK HOW ooo ANTONON HANtHON onnnnnowuo ttt M000 09 m OOD N N 090 0 09 mM N OD XK DKK IKE DK KEKE KEKE DS DK KE DEKE NK z SE as Ls oO Li P004504A Figure 121 Connecting the alarm cable to the Interface box 18 Connect the alarm cable to the interface box 19 Remount the installation box cover by screwing the 8 torx screws back into position 20 Push up the interface box and secure it to the mounting base with the 2 torx screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 5 21 5 22 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Before leaving the site Make sure that all cables are strapped and run in a proper way Push up the interface box and tighten the screws Make sure that all sunshields are
162. ZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Process Overview The purpose of this chapter is to give an overview of the maintenance process and to describe how to perform correct maintenance procedures How to use this chapter Competence requirement In order to do maintenance work according to this manual in a safe and professional way the work shall be done by a skilled person The following qualifications are minimum requirements Good understanding of radio and telephone engineering Good understanding of engineering English Maintenance Process Overview This section describes the maintenance process and how to perform correct maintenance procedures Maintenance General for RBS 2302 PBC These sections contain general information as well as necessary information on how to operate the RBS and the PBC Fault Localization This section contains information on how to identify the faulty unit s For supplementary information see QJ OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 Corrective Action Maintenance for RBS 2302 PBC These sections describe how to perform maintenance when faulty units have been found For supplementary information the chapters Site Installation Tests and Antenna System Tests in this User s Guide are required Preventive Maintenance for RBS 2302 PBC These sections contain procedures to increase the MTBF Mean Time Between Failure To be able to perform maintenance t
163. a Connections ix nica Gracia ted we ieee aida eee 465 13 2 Power and Battery Cabinet optional cccccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseneeeees 466 13 21 Wall WONG a aca eas ie atlas cae aac AANE Aaaa 467 13 A2 POSMU a ait d cvceexondszivs5 oh cedcecsceteueitsccsbtcgaceatvhes etcegivaseuericas 468 13 2 3 Dimensions and WY CIQINxcchin acc ceenepb nexnxcedoeeden tat ecetenesren Sesexeermessibaceseees 469 13 2 4 Space MEQUIRCIMGING excites toes ese dia racenietiacbacrantbetetencabiee 2otierentaeieeieice 469 13 2 5 Climatic EMQUTAN CG acti vascecotcataienus cinta Saddee ean wenden deteeionuieaesxien antes 470 T320 NDE MOINS gee serena th crate tice vine eile eE a a teams ices 471 13 2 7 Acoustical Noise 4s conic ects Cte ates en Geese etc tas Gs te tales 471 132 8 Power SUPPIY tise cesses carian eieaa an e eadi a Ea iaei pa rdia 471 13 2 9 PBC Backup Capacity eenenneeennneeeeeernnrertntnneeernnrtessrrnnnnnrrnnnneent 472 13AT ANDI a aaea aas r eaaa A tous este descr gene AEREE RAEE R 473 13 3 HDSL 00 9c eee ne eee ern eee rnent 473 13 3 Genera e e r a a E a E E esd 473 13 3 2 HDSL Modem Technical Specification ccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneees 473 13 39 37 Materials nren ated eee e T a Aaaa eee yale A E E aA 475 14 GIOSSANY ina aa iaia E eaaa aa a aeiia 477 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 15 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 This page is intentionally left blank 16
164. aa aides EAA E L TT EERE E Ea 33 2 2 Notoso na pie Cad ed eign eee teen ta a aca aaa 34 29 Electrical Hazards iain e aeee ecole ny ces ie heres beaa aeea aa 35 2 3 1 Electrostatic Discharge ESD cccccccccccceceeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 2 4 Working at Heights siscii einine eein a ninnaa tee ia a EEEE EEEE 38 2 4 1 Rules and Advice for the Safe Use of Ladders ceeeeeeteees 38 2 5 Radio Frequency Radiation iia i cies acceso d sees ceases ecdeeng eae debe eee 40 2 6 Other Hazards serais sascedes cues casing Austecesne dg EEEa e e dna ds bacesvee cutee 40 3 Tools and IMStUMENES eascvsaicesseneetsicacdssavercdesivansessuusccesihnindnmeamsbebasedeuicianesent 43 3 1 Tools for Installation of RBS 2302 ssessssseessesrennnnseeerrnssserrrnnnsrrrrrnsee 43 3 1 1 Installation TOO Scccute est ccetcclsce asthe arneiets thd cecetce aidan te uiloetle 43 Se 12 NC COS SONOS irca eae racie yee et ieee terns cee a E casa oh reese oea eam ode int 44 3 2 Tools for Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 0 eeeee 44 3 3 Instruments for Antenna System Tests cccccsscceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 44 3 4 Instruments for Site Installation TeSts eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 3 5 Tools for WalnlenanGe isos St atk ae he als 46 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 3 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 3 6 FRIESEN CUCL ea al ah eR er ee
165. aaea aaaea Eiaa 66 53 VW shat i As Nhe Ae Se kN ee 67 o STN AS FU Cee Becca Sa eee Bie Rc rte teehee eh eMac 67 5 5 Mounting the Mounting Plate 2 20 cccccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeseees 70 5 5 1 Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Wall eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneteeeeees 70 5 5 2 Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Pole eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 72 5 6 Mounting the Mounting Base cccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseees 74 5 7 Mounting the Installation Box DOO eee cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneneeeeeeeeeeeees 75 5 8 Installation BOX eee ne ne ae er aan Ee PU ne ree ee 77 5 9 Connecting Earth and Lightning Protection c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 5 10 Connecting External Cables ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenceeeeeeseeneaeeees 80 5 10 1 Opening the Interface BOX cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeeees 80 5 10 2 Connecting the AG MAINS teat cect cs areas eaet eee heecieeenee ce ates 81 5 10 3 Loosening the Interface Box Gland Plate ccccccccccccceeeseeeeesseeees 84 5 10 4 Assembling and Earthing of a twisted pair cable e 84 5 10 5 Connecting the POM Cable iniiccctescveseaesttieceiscisinaenectinigaaeiniie 88 5 10 6 HDSL transmission module Installation optional eeee 97 5 10 7 Connecting the External and PBC Alarm Cables 0 0008 102 5 10 8 Connecting the Extended OMT cable optiona
166. aceable Unit An RU consists of one or more HWUs An RU may be replaced by another RU of Ericsson Radio Systems AB 485 488 All Rights Reserved Glossary 486 488 RXA RXB RXDA RXDP RXQUAL SES SIR SO Sub RU SW SWR SYNC Tl TC TCB TCH TDMA TDMA frame TEI the same type The RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site Receiver Receiver Antenna branch A Receiver Antenna branch B Receiver Divider Amplifier Receiver Distribution Plane Measure of signal quality as defined in GSM 05 08 8 2 4 Severely Errored Second Small Indoor RBS Service Object A sub replaceable unit is always connected to a superior Main RU This connection is used for example for retrieval of the RU identity A sub RU normally does not have a processor Note that an RU with a processor that is not loadable is classified as a sub RU SoftWare Standing Wave Ratio Synchronous Transmission facility for DS1 1544 kbit S Transaction Capabilities Tranceiver Control Board Traffic CHannel The traffic channels carry either encoded speech or user data Time Division Multiple Access Multiplexing of several channels in a common frequency band Each channel is assigned a certain time division a time slot GSM air interface time frame comprising eight time slots Terminal Endpoint Identifier Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6
167. acity for one power cable with an outer sheath diameter of 7 15 mm Note A lockable mains switch must be provided close to the base station It is also recommended that an AC mains outlet is mounted close to the base station for installation and test equipment LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 471 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Product Data 13 2 9 472 488 Limiting Values for AC Mains Supply Table 83 Limiting values Non desractverange SCS Overvoltage lt 10 ms 280 V 300 V Table 84 Power consumption and heat generation Power consumption VA Heat generation W w Maxie x0 PBC with fully loaded batteries in configuration with one RBS 2302 and three Mini Link E Micro ph ore With activated heater Batteries The battery back up consists of four 12 V modules It is foreseen that batteries may be obtained from a local distributor to Hawker Energy Locally supplied batteries must be of the type XT 13 from Hawker Energy or compatible This is a sealed lead acid battery with valve ventilators and intended for stationary use To enable DC power backup to RBS 2302 the PBC is supplied with a Power Supply Adapter The battery adapter is inserted into the battery compartment in RBS 2302 and the cable to the battery adaptor is connected to the interface box in the PBC PBC Backup Capacity The table below states the power consumption of the different parts of Maxite and how mu
168. adio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements 4 10 Configurations Alarms Transmission External Alarms AC Mains P003551A Figure 17 Configuration with 2 TRX The basic Micro RBS configuration is a two TRX configuration and can be optionally supplied with a PBC one PBC e one RBS 2302 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 61 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements 62 488 T X L bus MA Transmission External Alarms Transmission External Alarms P003552A Figure 18 Configuration with 4 TRX This configuration can be expanded to 4 TRX The configuration will then consist of e two PBC e two RBS 2302 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements T X L bus Dc 24y oF Transmission Alarms DC 24V External Alarms Alarms er External ore Alarms NGA r AC7 Box Transmission External Alarms AC Mains P003553A Figure 19 Configuration with 6 TRX The maximum configuration will be a six TRX configuration It will consist of three PBC e three RBS 2302 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 63 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements This page is intentionally left blank 64 488 Ericsson Radio
169. age 243 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Optional Tests Test Setup Procedure The followning figures show examples of different test setups nA Kz A N EN S EEE EEES EESAN QS SESS SSS pS OSS es N Ene NY p gt Oke P006052A Figure 239 Example of test setup HDSL upstream one or two pairs BSCSim II P005998A Figure 240 Example of test setup HDSL upstream one or two pairs PCM downstream LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 247 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Optional Tests 248 488 P006053A Figure 241 Example of test setup HDSL upstream HDSL downstream cascade P006054A Figure 242 Example of test setup PCM upstream HDSL downstream one or two pairs For detailed information on how to connect the cables for the different configurations see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 Follow the procedure below to setup the test equipment Note The HTU is not needed for tests on PCM upstream HDSL downstream configuration If the HTU is not used perform the setup and the test according to Section Test Setup Procedure 2 TRX Configuration on page 244 l Ensure that the RBS is in Remote mode If not change to Remote mode by pressing the Local remote button on the RBS 2 Connect cable Cl to the COM
170. an operator who handles the alarms of the Radio Base Station RBS with support from Operation Instructions OPI By analyzing the fault situation the OMC operator will be able to take appropriate action Step four is performed at the RBS site by a field technician who will follow the instructions in this manual Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 1 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 7 Fault detected in 2 RBS 2302 related alarm in OMC 3 Fault analysis from OMC 4 RBS maintenance process 5 STOP Figure 259 Fault handling workflow P003443A Fault Analysis from OMC This section describes very briefly a typical fault analysis process performed from an OMC It describes procedures that must be performed before sending a field technician to the site i RBS 2302 related l alarm to OMC Fault analysis from OMC 2 Work order to a field technician I RBS maintenance I process A P003444A Figure 260 Fault analysis from OMC Ericsson Radio Systems AB 311 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 312 488 Fault analysis from OMC 1 The fault codes received when acting on instructions in the BSC B Module must be translated into fault information This is described in the chapter Fault Handling in this binder Work order to a field technician 2 Before writing t
171. ape covering the inlet to the ventilations hose on all batteries Note For safety purposes ensure that the protective cover is put back on the battery pole after each new battery is connected Installing the batteries Note It is recommended to replace all four batteries with new batteries at the same occasion Batteries must comply with the product specification 7301 BKC 861 available from the local Ericsson company Also ensure that the lifetime of the new battery will not expire within the chosen maintenance period P003319A Figure 376 Installing battery 1 422 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 l Maintenance Install battery 1 and connect the plus pole P003645A Figure 377 Installing battery 2 2 Install battery 2 with two cables preinstalled and connect the minus pole of battery 1 Mount the ventilation hoses to battery 1 and 2 and guide it to the ventilation outlet down left at the bottom of the cabinet Install battery 3 and guide in the ventilation hose at the same time that the battery is tilted into position P003706A Figure 378 Connecting the minus pole of battery 3 Connect the minus pole of battery 3 Install battery 4 and guide in the ventilation hose at the same time that the battery is tilted into position
172. astics etc Such charges may remain for a considerable period of time Handling of printed board assemblies and IC components Always use an approved antistatic bracelet to avoid damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies The ESD wrist strap contains a resistor with an ohmic value greater than 1 MQ in the cable to protect the operator The resistance value is low enough to discharge the electrostatic voltage Never replace the cable with any other cable The ESD wrist strap must be connected to earth Ericsson recommends wrist strap LYB 250 01 14 Storing and Transporting printed board assemblies and IC Components Use the original packaging If this is not available use a conductive material or a special IC carrier that either short circuits or insulates all leads of the components 01_0250A Figure 8 ESD wrist strap LYB 250 01 14 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 37 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Safety Instructions 2 4 2 4 1 38 488 DANGER A To avoid potentially fatal circuits through the body to earth wrist strap connections must include a resistor of at least 1 MQ Test the wrist strap regularly Working at Heights WARNING A Some working areas involve the risk of accidents caused by falling objects For example when working on a mast tower or a roof the following precautions must be taken Personnel working at heigh
173. at shall be connected to AC mains Ericsson Radio Systems AB 457 488 All Rights Reserved Product Data The Fan Unit should be provided with its own mains switch Otherwise it will be necessary to switch off the supply to the entire base station when the Fan Unit is replaced The fan unit can be connected to the same supply voltages as the RBS 2302 A switch is provided to set the supply voltage range to 230 V or 115 V The power consumption is less than 20 VA The fan unit will switch on if the ambient temperature is above 40 C It will switch off if the ambient temperature falls below 35 C The Fan Unit has one alarm connection which will occupy one of the external alarm connections The Fan Unit will increase the height of the RBS 2302 with 115 mm nar Fan Unit Power switch Q RQ Ny AC Mains Power switch P004173A Figure 419 Fan unit 13 1 4 Optional HDSL transmission module The RBS 2302 can be fitted with an optional HDSL High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line modem module fitted in a modified mounting base door A description of installation of the HDSL modem is included in chapter Installation of RBS 2302 and the technical description is presented in Section 13 3 HDSL Modem on page 473 The HDSL module may use two of the external alarms In release R7 two external alarms are dedicated for optional HDSL usage To use the two external alarms for HDSL purpo
174. but the driving is not necessary 1 Start TEMS and establish a connection between the MS and the PC Choose Enable connections from the Select Externals menu 2 Choose the COM1 port for the MS 3 Make a call from the test MS LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 275 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 10 10 276 488 P006042A Figure 249 A drive test for checking that the call is handed over between the cells 4 Go between the cells and check that the call does not disconnect Start a log by choosing Start Log from the Log menu 6 Monitor the signal strength RxLev from the BTS with TEMS Choose Status information from the Monitor menu Select Serving neighbouring cells 7 Check that a handover occurs at the cell border 8 Continue to move through the cells and verify handover between the cells 9 Note the result in the Test Record 10 Close the log and save it 11 If no handover occurs at a cell border contact the BSC personnel Helpful Hints In this chapter you will find helpful information about Setting the RBS in remote mode Reference DT files Example of Exchange Data for a 2 TRX cabinet Example of Exchange Data for a 6 TRX cabinet LAPD Concentration Data BTS PCM Supervision Digital Path Data Installation of BTS Software in IOG Managed Object Hierarchy Managed Object States Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B
175. c soft keys for the measurement and press ENTER Calculating Feeder Attenuation The purpose of this procedure is to calculate the attenuation of the feeder system Note If the cable type is not found in Table 16 on page 188 values must be taken from the manufacturer s specifications 1 Use the feeder length measured in the DTF test 2 Find the attenuation value dB m for the actual cable type in the table below Ericsson Radio Systems AB 187 488 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests Table 16 Velocity factor Vp and attenuation dB m for different cables Product No Supplier Code Velocity Attenuation dB m Factor V 1800 MHz TZC 500 80 Andrew 1 2 LDF4RN TZC 500 82 Andrew 3 8 LDF2RN TZC 501 22 Andrew 7 8 LDF5 TZC 501 26 Andrew 1 2 LDF4 TZC 501 28 Andrew 1 5 8 LDF7 TZC 501 47 Andrew 7 8 LDF5RN 3 Calculate the feeder attenuation by multiplying the actual length in metres by the attenuation per metre 4 Calculate the total feeder attenuation by adding the attenuation of the different components in the TX RX path 5 Check that the attenuation calculation is correct If the calculation is correct then perform a DTF test to detect possible faults such as bad connectors damaged feeders and so on according to Section 7 8 on page 186 Locate the fault and make necessary corrections Go back to step 3 6 Enter the result of the calculation in the test record see Figure 203 o
176. cabinet on the mounting base Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Describes activities for the installation of the mounting base connection of cables and mounting the battery cabinet on the mounting base Antenna System Tests Describes the site specific tests for antennas that can be performed at site Site Installation Tests Describes the site specific tests that can be performed at site Optional Tests Describes the optional site specific tests that can be performed at site RBS Site Integration Describes how to integrate a RBS site into a network Fault Handling Contains helpful information when an error on site has occured for instance the total fault code list fault tracing hints and information regarding trouble reports Maintenance Describes first line Maintenance which means that swap repair is made at the site and that only replaceable units are handled Product Data Technical data for all parts that can be located on site Glossary Contains abbreviations and acronyms used in the text Spare Parts Catalogue Contains relevant information for ordering first line spare parts Target Group The target group for this binder is all personnel involved in the RBS 2302 activities Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 1 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction The aim of the RBS 2302 User s Guide is to present the information in a u
177. cables power etc is essential for fast installation and commissioning of base stations This section contains document rules that are applicable to Ericsson organizations only Competence requirement In order to do site planning work according to this manual in a safe and professional way the work shall be done by a skilled person The following qualifications are minimum requirements Good understanding of radio and telephone engineering Good understanding of engineering English Preconditions The Preconditions section lists general documents needed for installation engineering Documents Ordering Information for QJ RBS 2000 Installation Material AIE ETE OS CLE Rules and Methods for Installation Engineering Standard Site Material Catalogue LZN 302 39 General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 EN LZB 119 2935 6 Tools and Instruments See chapter Tools and Instruments Ericsson Product and Document Numbering System Two concepts or words product and document are used at Ericsson Products are numbered with a product number ABC number which in its basic form consists of a three to five letter combination followed by a digit group of up to seven numbers This number is called the Product Number The three letter group divides products into classes according to use construction or other essential attributes The one or two letters for notation of origin are used when the design responsibility does n
178. cal RU is defined as a unit that can be referred to but is not a single physical unit There are four different kinds of logical RUs 1 Buses These are often referred to as a single physical unit but are implemented in the backplane of the cabinet with cables When a bus is pointed out in the RU map it should be understood that faulty HW can be any unit connected to the bus or the bus itself Logical bus RUs are e X bus e Local bus e Timing bus e CDU bus e Power communication loop 2 Antennas Not applicable for RBS 2301 and RBS 2302 A logical antenna means the whole signal path between the Transmitter Receiver and the physical antenna The Logical antenna RUs is e Antenna 3 Environment This RU records conditions that cannot be affected from the base station There are two groups under this RU e Power that handles external power e Climate that handles humidity and temperature For example if the temperature in the cabinet is too high or the incoming AC mains power is out of range the logical RU Environment is denoted as faulty Logical RU is e Environment 4 RBS DB The RBS database is regarded as a replaceable unit despite it is not a physical unit It comprises the data in the database only not the medium it resides in Logical RUs in 1 and 2 above are pointed out when the analysis fails to give a more detailed localization of the fault However the ambition is still not to point out a logical RU
179. ch battery power the equipment requires in the PBC when Maxite is in backup mode The table is divided into Typical values values measured by Ericsson in laboratory on a limited number of units Guaranteed values values guaranteed by the design In order to find out the typical time for the Maxite configuration add the values in the column Battery Power Consumtion Typical and check the corresponding value in the graph below how long the Maxite configuration guarenteed will stay in operation add the values in the column Battery Power Consumption Guarenteed and check the corresponding value in the graph below Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 13 2 10 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Product Data Graph is used for normal temperature approximately 25 degrees and graph for cold environments approximately 33 degrees below zero Table 85 Voltage Power Power Battery Battery Power Consumtion Consumption Power Consumption Typical Guaranteed Consumption Guaramteed Typical PSA Cable 24 V 5W 10 W 6 W 12W Loss a Cable Loss 0 028 W m 0 028 W m 0 026 W m 0 026 W m Ror PSA Cable of 5 m According to Mini Link E Micro Technical Description Manual DAL values in the table is when full traffic on all TRXs Earthing The mounting base has one earthing point The earthing poin
180. cting the minus pole of battery 3 8 Disconnect the minus pole of battery 3 and remove the battery LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 419 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003481A Figure 371 Removing the ventilation hoses 9 Remove the ventilation hoses from battery 1 and 2 P003645A Figure 372 Disconnecting the minus pole on battery 1 10 Disconnect the battery jumper cable on the minus pole of battery 1 and remove battery 2 420 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003708A Figure 373 Disconnecting the plus pole of battery 1 11 Disconnect the plus pole of battery 1 and remove the battery Preparations before Installation Note Make sure that the cable lugs are properly mounted If mounted incorrectly the lugs may break 2 izi L X ALLOWED P004014A Figure 374 Connecting cable lugs to batteries Ericsson Radio Systems AB 421 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003471A Figure 375 Battery jumper configuration Move over all battery jumper cables from the old batteries to the new batteries so the new set of batteries are configured in exactly the same way the old set of batteries was configured Note Remove the precut t
181. ction Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 18 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests External Alarm Tests This test is to be performed now if it will not be done later during the integration The purpose of this test is to make sure that the external alarms are recognised and handled correctly The test is passed when all defined alarms are recognised The external alarms are specified individually for each site ocoocooccolloocoocoocoog _External Alarms_ External Alarms OOl e aaa aa Pt 01010100101010 010101010101010 COICO ey SSeS SSS oS U n J lt lt o E 8 o E Po Lu Xx Li P004152B Figure 231 Test of closing alarm OOl _ oOcoocoococolloocoococ _External Alarms External Alarms n on ea IT 010101010101010 010101010101010 COOS SSeS Sa es External Alarms External Alarms Q P005870A Figure 232 Test of breaking alarm For an explanation of the indicators see Section Explanation of the Indicators on page 194 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 231 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 18 1 External Alarm Test 2 TRX Configuration 1 Activate an alarm by applying appropriate closing or breaking depending on definition The Alarm connectors are located in the interface box 2 The external alarm indicator will now be lit Check with the OMT
182. d RLCRP CELL cell Printout CELL RESOURCES 268 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Call test from MS on RXD A RBS Site Integration 1 Block all TRX s except for one Command Printout RXBLI MO RXOTRX x y FORCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJEKT RESULT 2 Check that one TRX is configured with BCCH and SDCCH Command Printout 3 Make a call from the MS RXCDP MO RXOTG x RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION CONFIGURATION DATA 4 Check that one TCH is BUSY Verify the speech connection Command Printout 5 Terminate the call Command Printout RLCRP CELL cell CELL RESOURCES RLCRP CELL cell CELL RESOURCES Check that the TCH is released 6 Deblock the blocked TRX s Command Printout RXBLE MO RXOTRX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT 7 Repeat step 1 on page 269 to step 6 on page 269 until all TRX s in the cell are tested Note the results in the Test Record Configure RXD B 1 Block all TS s and RX s in the TG and take the RX s out of service Command Printout Expected Result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected Result LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved RXBLI MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 FORCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOC
183. d and press ENTER 5 Use the Up Down arrow key to select PROP VEL Press ENTER 6 Enter the relative velocity see table below for the type of cable being tested and press ENTER Table 15 Velocity factor Vp and attenuation dB m for different cables Product No Supplier Code Velocity Attenuation dB m Factor V 1800 1900 MHz MHz TZC 500 80 Andrew 1 2 LDF4RN TZC 500 82 Andrew 3 8 LDF2RN TZC 501 22 Andrew 7 8 LDF5 TZC 501 26 Andrew 1 2 LDF4 TZC 501 28 Andrew 1 5 8 LDF7 TZC 501 47 Andrew 7 8 LDF5RN 7 8 Performing DTF Test 1 Press the MODE key 2 Select the DTF SWR measurements using the Up Down arrow key and press ENTER 3 Calibrate the Site Master for the actual test setup see Section 7 4 on page 178 4 Enter the correct cable parameters see Section 7 7 2 Entering Cable Parameters on page 184 5 Connect test equipment to the the antenna system according to Section 7 7 on page 183 6 Check that all connections are properly connected and tightened 7 Press the FREQ DIST key 8 Press the D1 soft key and enter the desired numerical start value usually 0 0 m from the keypad and press ENTER 9 Press the D2 soft key and enter the desired numerical stop value usually the total length of the antenna system from the keypad and press ENTER 10 Press the AMPLITUDE key 11 Press the MAIN soft key 186 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000
184. dapter 24 V DC backup to the radio cabinet The cable 5 m for the PSA is delivered with the PSA 1 Dismantle the cable and mount the cable inlet see Section 6 10 4 Assembling the Cable Gland on page 157 DANGER A Read Safety Instructions regarding handling and connecting batteries Note Make sure the battery switch is in OFF position before working with the battery connection Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet oo OLJo OOCO0O0OOO0O OOOOCOOCOTJ OOCOCO0O0COCO brown white DC 24V_1_RTN DC 24V_1 X5 6 X5 7 P003703A Figure 167 Connecting the 24 V DC Power Supply Adapter 2 Insert the cable wires in to the termination block 6 10 6 Connecting the Alarm cable 1 Dismantle the cable and mount the cable inlet see Section 6 10 4 Assembling the Cable Gland on page 157 PBC_1_POWER_RT PBC_1_POWER X6 7 X6 8 P003797A Figure 168 Connecting the alarm cable 2 Insert the cable wires in to the termination block LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 159 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 10 7 6 11 160 488 Closing the Interface Box P003548A Figure 169 Closing the interface box 1 Remount the interface box cover by screwing the 9 torx
185. ded to be replaced on site or at local shop and intended to be disposed after use former code R 3 Not recommended for customer stock The parts are available when needed former code A The spare parts catalogue is adapted to this structure The dimensioning and recommendation of spare parts will not follow the principle one of each board in use unless the customer expressly requests it The dimensioning and recommendation of spare part stocks is and will be done with a computer based calculation model for BTS equipment The tool works with the following parameters Product reliability MTBF Spare part delivery lead time or repair turn around time Chosen service level that is Spare Parts Management The spare part structure Quantity of each unit in operation to be supported by the specific stock The probability of shortage Ericsson Radio Systems AB 7 59 All Rights Reserved Spare Parts Philosophy for RBS 2302 2 1 General Information The catalogue is divided into separate chapters depending on recommendations classifications Position numbers put in brackets are associated parts not necessarily shown in illustrations Position numbers with letters for example 3A 3B are alternative products Parts without a Product number may be shown on illustrations but are not recommended for customer stock or may be included in a Spare Parts Set and cannot be ordered sepa
186. design I I Plant specification l 1 127 11 IPA 1 I Site investigation report Plant specification 2 127 11 IPA I l Installation i material order Site installation documentation I SITE I I 01_0068B Figure 13 Planning overview 4 4 1 Basic Information The necessary information for planning of a site is made up of The technical specification in the contract regarding the base station Information about the transmission network standard Information about the network plan 52 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 4 4 2 4 5 4 5 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements Proposed network design further explained below Proposed Network Design The proposed network design see Figure 13 on page 52 contains the results from the Radio Survey and the Propagation Predictions Site Planning will make use of the following parameters to plan the site Site location giving the address or geographical coordinates for the desired site Base station configuration giving the base station configuration for example number of TRXs antenna configuration or antenna gain Number of cells the number of cells at a particular site 1 sector 2 sector or 3 sector based on the desired traffic capacity at the site Antenna directions the actual direction of
187. direct contact via damp or moisture can be fatal Internal AC cable Internal Transmission cable P003457A Figure 312 Overview of the cables For the sake of clarity the cabinet is shown without the sunshields and the antennas 1 Verify that the AC Mains power switch located outside the cabinets is in OFF position Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 375 488 Maintenance 376 488 P003448A Figure 313 Removing the outer protective cover 2 Unsnap the outer protective cover and remove it Cabinet 100 120 ohm Cabinet 75 ohm Secured P003614B Figure 314 Internal transmission cable P004219A Figure 3515 TXL cable Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 5 10 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 3 Disconnect and remove the internal transmission cable the internal AC cable and the TXL cable Note The internal transmission cable is secured with slide latches The TXL cable is secured on one end with slide latches and on the other with locking screws Open the latches and the locking screws before removing the cables 4 Connect the new cables see Figure 312 on page 375 Note Make sure that the correct end of the internal transm
188. e and Line attenuation or maximum input signal at the Far End presume that the max signal at the Far End is 0 dB Use the following parameters for all RBSs LBO A Long h 0 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB 224 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests 8 15 8 15 1 HDSL Configuration The purpose is to configure the DIP Digital Path switches for the HDSL modem If several RBSs with HDSL modems are used each HDSL modem has to configured separately according to the transmission used for that RBS CAUTION A has Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity Link configuration Isolation Printed board Door Cover P003748A Figure 229 Mounting and demounting of HDSL modem module in the HDSL door At pre installation an HDSL link can be established upstream downstream or in both directions The other link is established with a PCM connection which is then directly bypassed from the radio cabinet G 703 interface to the RBS line interface The choice or configuration is made by choosing one of the three possible connectors in both the line interface J2 J4 and J6 and the G 703 interface J1 J3 and J5 of the module Table 31 on page 226states the link choice as a function of the selected connector LZN 302 74 R6B
189. e Installation Tests Red A fault is located check with OMT Yellow Operational Local Mode AC Power on Faulty Battery Fault External Alarms Reduced Capacity Green Operational Flashing indicators Wait activity in progress The optical indicators can indicate that a fault faults have been detected and the OMT should therefore be used for more advanced fault localisation Explanation of the Indicators Indicator Mode Description Fault Generally Red OFF No fault s detected ON Fault s detected Fault FLASHING One of the following reasons Red Master or e IDB is missing or wrongly configured Exienision e Fault s detected in Extension cabinet s cabinet only for 4 TRX 6 TRX sector configuration e Running on Base Application e ARAE fault BSS R7 or later e Battery fault 4 TRX 6 TRX sector configuration ON e SW HW fault in Extension cabinet and or Extension Master cabinet cabinet and FLASHING Master cabinet 194 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Indicator Operational Green Local mode Yellow Reduced Capacity Yellow Mode OFF ON FLASHING OFF ON FLASHING OFF ON T1 Test result for TRX 1 T2 Test result for TRX 2 AC Power On OFF Yellow Battery Fault Yellow External Alarms Yellow ON OFF ON OFF ON ON Extension cabinet and FLASH
190. e No 9 Cellsite No 10 Sector No 3 code Eseli 1 1 1 i tt laws tt 11 Product No 12 R state 13 Channel No 14 Software application S 3 a LZY 213 938 1 R7 1 ofa SO TRXC RUO SO TRXC I1A10 17 Factory code 18 Serial No T19 Manufact year week 20 Description of fault A5304AQ41B 9714 21 Superior product No T22 R state T23 Serial No RBS 2102 24 Sender 25 Receiver MMO EDD EDDERER LZF 084 84 1EN RIA 27 Reference No 26 Remarks special instructions Installed 1998 10 15 logfiles on paper included 28 Date yyyy mm dd 28 Received Prepared Telephone Failure date Failure Country code State code NARON 11 Product No 12 R state 14 Software application 16 Fault code 18 Serial No 19 Manufact year week 20 Description of fault 21 Superior product No 24 Sender 26 Remarks special instructions The following fields are mandatory Use block letters Service technician s name Service technician s telephone number Mark with an X if failure is Suspected or Verified Two letter country code Hardware HW status when failure occurred S Unit in service when failure occurred Repair T New unit failed during installation or test Claim R Repaired unit failed during installation or test Claim or Repair Faulty unit Faulty unit RBS load product number and R state Check OMT or work order
191. e Planning and Requirements The section RBS 2302 Overview has been moved here from chapter Product Data Installation of RBS 2302 Information regarding the use of ESD wrist strap added Instructions on how to use the drilling template added Instructions on how to mount the HDSL door added Also the information on how to connect the HDSL modem to the PCM connectors has been moved here from chapter Product Data Instructions on how to install the fuses with the fuseholder added Instructions on how to mount the Power Supply Adapter PSA added Information on how to connect cabinets when cascade connection is used added Section Mounting the Multicasting Box optional has been clarified Section Connecting the External Antenna Jumpers optional has been updated Ericsson Radio Systems AB 27 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction 28 488 Section Mounting the Sunshields subsection Upper Sunshield has been given new information Section 4 and 6 TRX Configuration optional has been updated e New information on how to route the alarm cable in section Mounting the Fan Unit added Section Lifting Device has been moved here and placed as an appendix from chapter Product Data Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Information regarding the use of ESD wrist strap added Instructions on how to use the drilling template added Structural changes in section
192. e faulty battery with the new battery Remount the battery cover Switch on the AC switch and the battery switch Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 373 488 Maintenance 5 Verify the new battery by switching the AC switch to OFF and inspect the battery fault indicator 6 If the fault LED is OFF set the AC switch to on 7 Set the RBS in Remote Mode 8 Close the installation box door The new battery might be discharged It will then take up to 25 hours until full performance is achieved Test after corrective action 1 Request the BSC operator to set the RBS ready for traffic 2 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 12 5 9 Cables Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode 4 Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position 5 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 8 on page 374 6 Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position 7 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 8 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch 374 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Replacing the cables Maintenance DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and in
193. e mobile equipment identities that prevent calls from stolen unauthorized or defective mobile stations Data Transmission Interworking Unit DTI The DTI consists of both hardware and software and provides an interface to various networks for data communication Through the DTI users can alternate between speech and data during the same call Interworking Location Register ILR ILR makes inter system roaming possible between the AMPS network and the GSM 1900 network ILR consisit of an AMPS HLR and partsof a GSM 1900 VLR Base Station System BSS The Base Station System consists of the following elements Transcoder Controller TRC The TRC provides teh BSS with rate adaptation capabilities A device which performs rate adaptation is called a transcoder The bitrate per channel is decreased from 64 kbit s to 16kbit s This saves transmission links between the MSC to the BSCs Base Station Controller BSC The BSC provides all the control functions and physical links between the MSC and the BTS It is a high capacity switch that handles Ericsson Radio Systems AB 23 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction 1 3 3 1 4 1 4 1 24 488 functions such as handover cell configuration data and control of radio frequency power levels in base transceiver stations A number of BSCs are served by an MSC Base Transceiver Station BTS The BTS handles the radio interface to the mobile station The BTS is
194. e removed from service temporarily 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode Replacing the External antenna 21_0334C Figure 3509 External Antenna Cables 1 Remove the front sunshield and the lower sunshield Note Make sure that all cables are properly labelled before disconnecting them Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Disconnect the antenna cables Remove the antenna Mount the new antenna 2 3 4 5 Reconnect the antenna cables 6 Remount the lower sunshield and the front sunshield 7 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 8 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform Antenna Installation Tests see chapter Antenna System Tests 2 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 12 5 7 Multicasting Box WARNING Radio frequency radiation The radio frequency radiation from the antenna system might endanger your health Switch off the transmitter when working with antennas or near them Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 371 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 372 488 Replacing the Multicasting Box
195. e removed from service temporarily 440 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Open the installation box door for the radio cabinet Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position Stn MN SF YN Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the DC Surge Board CAUTION A N Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity P003730A Figure 404 Loosening the interface box 1 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 441 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003744A Figure 405 Loosening the interface box cover 2 Open the cover of the interface box by removing the 9 torx screws P003649B Figure 406 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 3 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box 4 Remove all connection terminal blocks 5 Loosen the internal 48 V DC cable from the fixed terminal block Make sure to remember the cable position or write it down 442 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B
196. e the fault localization procedures to trace the fault when the unit is not pinpointed The 32 bit version of the OMT can be used to acquire more information or when more than one fault is present LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 337 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 4 1 Fault Tracing Guidelines for RBS 2302 High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal DANGER A Table 59 Fault lit Fault flashing Reduced capacity D See LO 338 488 If the red LED is lit two causes are possible Use OMT to display the faults 1 2 The cabinet is faulty Replace it 2 TRX configuration If the cabinet is configured as a master in a 4 or 6 TRX configuration the communication is lost to the extension cabinet s Check the TXL cable and the extension cabinets If the red LED is flashing four causes are possible Use OMT to display the faults 1 2 3 4 The IDB is missing or corrupted Install a new IDB according to the OMT User s Manual ie BTS software is missing and the RBS is running on base application The BSC is currently reloading the BTS software Lost communication in the RBS Replace the cabinet 2 TRX configuration If the cabinet is configured as a master in a 4 or 6 TRX configuration communication is lost to extensi
197. eaa teictovtaentannuedeedtniacaeuetneedt 241 9 1 PVG COPIGITIONIS si casera niniaren inenen nanaii a anneni irea ae na 241 9l 1 Previus Te StSt cia ie a aa a aaa a a Co a A Ae alt edt 241 9 1 2 Tester q alficatlONS s ee ee taea aaa hed AEE aaa EaR 241 9 1 3 Electrostatic Discharge 525 ceta i ccecdeeetasecapcceuceetis San A ee eedein els clcucined 241 9 2 MS Call Test using BSC Simulator cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 242 9 2 1 Test Parameter S innan a E EA OE aa Eai 242 9 22 Ca ES a a inthe R eae E aE eats a Kaaa 243 9 2 3 Test using the MS and BSC Simulator cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 9 2 4 Test through HDSL using the MS and BSC Simulator 5 246 O22 APS A ROC OU sh Ai Raa ha ae es ee Set eds ee A IA AS 252 10 RBS Site Iter atin viiinis tscce ces sicttsicecnntecciucssanccuauievsniseanedsvsseuededanveaseddducatens 253 10T IMROGUCTION iiia iriaren a Er AEEA E 253 10 1 1 SON GCIVICW sicotlon Cetra kt eee i at ee lead lieved deat pared deltas Canadas 253 10 127 Range of VES lsat itecah cla nns naa al tube Saat ant baal Sieh Aaa 253 10 1 3 OWI ienne ea E AE EEA E ENEA EEEa 255 10 2 PREC OMIM OMS trie Geen poke cee aa Ea eE paan Sree ie ih ne eee erate 256 10 2 1 Preconditions for the BSC ccc ceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenaaees 256 10 2 2 Preconditions for the AB Ssisacecccsp i cecie picts cee crete sgaccaasson teers ceeds 256 10 3 Transmission TOSt a cicrcu nate
198. ecascettsendiananacace 129 5 22 Appendix Lifting D VICC eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeees 129 Beet Generalna ela ek a ee ae ote eels aaa anges 130 5 22 2 Handling the Lifting DOVICG vixcc ce setcccteccdet ci nineneetdsteceieheen ends eieeaesee 132 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet ccssssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 139 6 1 Competence requirement ccccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 139 6 2 PRECOMCINOMS iere a A a a EE Eae a eraat 139 6 2 1 Preconditions for wall mounted PBC ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 140 6 2 2 Preconditions for pole mounted PBC cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeees 140 6 2 3 DOCUMGINS iriri nei a a ca cevecdanendevesddaneses A a E cigs Guanes 140 6 2 4 Tools ANGiNnSWUMENIS iA ee eS AN ot ty A aS 140 SRS Fe A112 011 2 San ee ann nn eo ee ee ee 141 6 4 UNPACKING ieir a a TEA EE EEA TAA Eara 142 6 5 Mounting the Mounting Plate ccc cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaa 143 6 5 1 Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Wall eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteaeeees 144 6 5 2 Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Pole eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 145 6 6 Mounting the Mounting BaSe cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaa 148 6 7 Mounting the Installation Box DOOP eee cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeees 149 6 8 Installation BOX ia i a a a a aariaa 150 6 9
199. ecise information on the amount and content of the general and or special training required for work on Ericsson products or systems please contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company Warnings Warnings are used to indicate hazardous activities The warnings are preceded by the common hazard symbol P002643 Figure 4 Hazard symbol The following three warning levels shown here in order of urgency are used DANGER A Danger means that an accident may occur if the safety precautions are neglected This type of accident is likely to be fatal Ericsson Radio Systems AB 33 488 All Rights Reserved Safety Instructions 2 2 34 488 WARNING A Warning means that an accident may occur if the safety precautions are neglected This type of accident may be fatal or cause serious injury It may also damage the product CAUTION A Caution means that an accident may occur if the safety precautions are neglected This type of accident may cause injury or damage the product The following special symbols are used to indicate the risk of radio frequency radiation electrical hazards and electrostatic discharge P002644A Figure 5 Radio frequency radiation A P002645A Figure 6 Electrical hazard A Alen P002646A Figure 7 Electrostatic discharge Warnings are used throughout this manual to alert the reader to special instructions concerning a particular
200. eck on the RBS that the AC Power On indicator lights up yellow Table 36 Switch settings RBS with internal battery Switch settings in the RBS Running conditions Battery Backup Test RBS with External Battery PBC The purpose is to test if the battery is able to supply DC when the AC is off Note Make sure that the Battery Fault indicator is not active before performing any battery test e This test is to be performed for each set of RBS and PBC which is included in the configuration used Ericsson Radio Systems AB 233 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 20 1 8 20 2 8 20 3 234 488 The test is passed if the RBS still is running when the incoming AC for the RBS and the PBC has been switched off The Local Mode indicator is on or flashing when the RBS is running The battery backup time is approximately two hours Switch Settings Before and After Test Table 357 Switch settings before and after test Test Procedure 2 TRX Sector Configuration 1 Make sure that the PBC has been powered up for at least 15 minutes before starting the test After 24 hours the battery is fully charged 2 Make sure that the AC and battery power for the RBS and the PBC is switched on and the Battery Fault indicator is off on the RBS Ensure that no faults are displayed on the PBC 3 Switch off the incoming AC for the RBS and the PBC and check on the RBS that the indicator AC Power
201. ect the battery jumper cable between battery 3 and 4 168 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003567A Figure 185 Connecting the ventilation hose 9 Connect the ventilation hose to battery 3 and 4 P003430B Figure 186 Connecting the minus pole of battery 3 10 Connect the minus pole of battery 3 Note Ensure that the automatic circuit breaker is in the OFF position LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 169 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003341B Figure 187 Connecting battery 2 and 4 11 Connect the battery jumper cable to battery 2 12 Connect battery jumper cable to battery 4 P003342C Figure 188 Power and Battery Cabinet 13 Ensure that all cables and hoses are in the correct position so that the door can be closed 14 Ensure that all protective caps are mounted to cover the battery poles 15 Ensure that the ventilation hoses are not blocked 16 Set the automatic circuit breaker in the ON position 17 Close the PBC door and screw the 18 torx screws back into position 170 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6
202. ection point in the installation box 438 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Display cable o power cable P003693A Figure 401 Overview of the cables 4 Disconnect the Display cable and AC Power cable P003745A Figure 402 Disconnecting the AC cable 5 Disconnect the AC cable from the interface box on the EMC board LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 439 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003736A Figure 403 Removing the EMC board 6 Unscrew the 7 torx screws 7 Mount fuses corresponding to the correct voltage on the new EMC board 8 Mount the new EMC board 9 Mount the 7 torx screws 10 Connect the cables to the EMC board 11 Remount the protective cover with the two torx screws Set to operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 2 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 7 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 12 6 7 DC Surge Board Prior to replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will b
203. ectric nature of the equipment inside the Radio Base Station Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Safety Instructions Sharp Edges WARNING A Wear protective gloves when handling the equipment There may be sharp metal edges LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 41 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Safety Instructions This page is intentionally left blank 42 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 3 1 3 1 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Tools and Instruments Tools and Instruments This section contains lists of all tools and instruments recommended for complete installation of the RBS 2302 and the Power and Battery Cabinet PBC Tools for Installation of RBS 2302 The recommended tool set for Installation is Personal Installation Tool Set Product No LTT 601 96 1 For more information regarding this tool set see QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 Installation Tools The following tools is required from the Personal Installation Tool Set LTT 601 96 1 Description Side cutting pliers Snip nose pliers Wire stripper 0 2 6 mm Screwdriver TORX T10 T20 T30 Screwdriver wide 3 mm Screwdriver wide 5 5 mm Adjustable spanner 10 Penlight Maglite mini Knife Measuring tape 5m Voltage tester ring wrench 10 mm ring wrench 17 mm ring wrench 20 mm
204. ectricity In order to avoid damages to components due to electrostatic discharges during unpacking make sure not to come in contact with the connectors on the cabinet Upper sunshield D Cabinet Drilling template l l Front sunshield Mounting base Left sunshield p Plugs and Hinges Z Y l LAA l l Se ee E N 2 RS a P004236C Figure 139 Unpacking the cabinet mounting base and sunshields 142 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 5 P004231A Figure 140 Unpacking the optionals Unpack and ensure that the correct material has been delivered If the material is damaged make an immediate complaint to the supervisor transport company Mounting the Mounting Plate 35_0331B Figure 141 Mounting the mounting plate If the installation site is at such height that work cannot be done without aid a skylift or scaffold must be used For safety reasons a step ladder should only be used as an exception LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 143 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 5 1 144 488 275 215 P003642A Measurement in mm Figure 142 Mounting plate and equipment contour front
205. ed 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 10 4 Loosening the Termination Block P003670A Figure 164 Loosening the termination block The termination blocks may be loosened to simplify the mounting of the cables Assembling the Cable Gland This section describes the assemling and mounting of the cables that are to be connected to the interface box P003401A Figure 165 Assembling the cable gland 1 Cut the cables to appropriate length Note Remember to take into account that extra cable length is required so that the interface box can be mounted back into the mounting base Route the cables so the interface box can be pushed up Adjust the sealing grommet to the cable diameter Mount all cable gland details except for the last clamping cone AP p P Remove the insulation LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 157 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 10 5 158 488 8a P003402A Figure 166 Mounting the cable gland 6 Fold the outer braid 7 To earth the cable fit the clamping cone over the cable so that the outer cable braid is squeezed between clamping ring and clamping cone 8 Route the cable into the inlet and tighten the cable gland Connecting the 24 V DC Power Supply Adapter This is the procedure for connecting the PSA Power Supply A
206. ed fault localization Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Explanation of the Indicators Indicator Fault Red Fault Red Fault Red Operational Green Mode Generally OFF ON Maintenance Description No fault s detected Fault s detected 2 TRX Sector Configuration FLASHING One of the following reasons e IDB Database is missing or wrongly configured e Running on Base Application e ARAE fault BSS R7 or later e Battery fault 4 TRX 6 TRX Configuration FLASHING Master or Extension cabinet ON Extension cabinet and FLASHING Master cabinet OFF ON FLASHING Ericsson Radio Systems AB One of the following reasons e IDB Database is missing or wrongly configured e Fault s detected in Extension cabinet s e Running on Base Application e ARAE fault BSS R7 or later e Battery fault e SW HW fault in Extension cabinet and or Master cabinet Not operational or change Local Remote mode in progress When in local mode e Operational but not in traffic When in remote mode e Connected to BSC and considered operational by the BSC One of the following reasons e Receiving application software Restart pending e Configuration in progress this may take more than 10 seconds to complete 317 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 2 4 318 48
207. ed in R4A The section Fault Tracing Hints has been moved here from chapter Site Installation Tests The sections Fault Code List and Trouble Report have been moved here from the chapter formerly called General Information Maintenance This chapter has been structurally redesigned Previous section Maintenace General has been divided into two separate sections Maintenace General for RBS 2302 and Maintenace General for PBC In section Maintenace General for RBS 2302the subsections Optical Indicators and Switches and Connectors have been updated Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 1 4 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction Product Data This chapter has been extracted from the chapter formerly called Site Planning and Product Data It contains the technical data for the different units that can be mounted on site Section Lifting Device and parts of section HDSL Modem have been moved here from the chapter formerly called General Information General information This chapter no longer exists The information in this chapter has been placed according to the description above R4A to R5A Introduction Information about the new chapter RBS Site Integration added Address to helpdesk updated Release History updated Safety The chapter Safety has been updated Tools and Instruments The chapter Tools and Instruments has been updated Sit
208. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 287 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 11 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 10 11 2 Network Element Acceptance Certificate ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeenees 288 11 Fault TAN ING psc ss cnscies aeecinciesitseeutececuats duatensndendedecueateatiascutecaivaiciuestedusanatids 289 11 1 Fault Tracing WAS pinnaa a rA 289 11 2 Fault Code List ccthcet cts hecccing otic ait epic tbcs ptt vecetea rade sieeoaseniese 290 112k RIM O OY secret ecase uit orate tere aa E a TE AAE ies 290 11 2 2 Decoding of Fault Maps wcsiscctes cccssvessstee sicaesees coetcvetins vaghceadenecsexeeatinecads 291 MP2 Fault UNS BG ie se a a aN eg eh a 293 aig eva ay 4g gt 18 He fe nn eee ne ee See 300 11 3 Trouble EDOM acs cxt nnna rE E 305 12 MAINTCN ANCES wivisiiensesiiinivineidsdarnsenstunsuaeecesuwe tuevainvanrereennuenedunantiniessenastonecesunun 309 12 1 Maintenance Process OVErVieW cccccceceteeeeeseeeeteeeeeesenneeeeeeeesaaees 309 12 1 1 How to use this Cate coset ieee tnen dae dates chee itinteivachvecmeniel ekxeuke 309 gos ae EIAI EE E A E E AE ee APUG TY SUE E ae Oe ET 310 12 1 3 Fault Handling WOrKNOW Sac sctcccsletic nde h de sentate aa Sontatnonterangaieh vies scaheeeeceet 310 12 1 4 Fault Analysis from OMC viciclerc ccc cies 2o erties tanta steenes tieeeitabeameceneeee 311 12 1 5 RBS 2302 Maintenance Process cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 313 12 1 6
209. eeees 453 13 Product Dat aseisidecs cintidavescicaitatuensewtive dates datadiesduiddudav asasida danaa 455 13 1 Radio Base Station ABS 2902 oie cicscc suave dacs cree cas eek cectiae cde uses wesc 455 ae se eg Vs Wal MoU Ag feeermemee eermeee ree eee Pate mer ney ane RnR MP Ee ror aN ee Ree 456 All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 13 12 Pole MOUNINO iaieineea aaaeeeaa Aaaa nner ne meee 457 13 t3 Optional Fanm UNan naue aaaeeeaa aidaa eree ara E Ea 457 13 1 4 Optional HDSL transmission module cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 458 1321 5 Lifting Kit optional naaraan 458 13 1 6 Dimensions and WeigNt eceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 459 13 1 7 Space FROQUIFGIIGIMUS sce casruc ve wcksicze sabe edited see chivased teal ebiew x cacagie ee hdedees 459 13 1 8 Climatic IENGULANCC sn ote sk lk kcal ee ie ane ae tanta Seu altace Sa at Sale 461 13 19 VIDrat ONS oscars et arareo aana ae aE Gace AAAA EE EEDE EEA 461 13 110 Acousti NOSO a sete iS i te ae it A ae 461 13 111 HOWE SUD nesr aaie eed eee ea toe coheed ote Sees a cece 461 13 1 12 Battery DAC MUD seth ect hace sre Sa Sec eeedn Aerated ete heniee tes ei 462 T3 IS Earthin gen ea ae E a aaa E EPan 463 13 1 14 TRANSMISSION 6 cedtestcs 1515 lat esemretarectioe edd eee Co ak ptaninemateecesn eet tees 463 13 14 15 External PANINI ise tes ei teecet eects tata ddion nanita ne aadab nieni eani aada na 464 13 1 16 Antenn
210. eeeeseceeeeeeeseneeeees 329 12 3 6 Stand Alone Mode xc ic sescs ie a aai 330 12 3 7 Fault COde Sohns 2s Scie ice addicts iia aa a a a a ERE 330 123 84 COmMmMaNd Sia e et ie lee E a E 331 123 9 Sh t down SCQUCICG kre cake cane coat ce ee arate eaves 331 12 3 10 Start up ea OO USIICS sik a i a Nee 334 12 3 11 Tightening Torques for the PBC c ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteneeeees 336 12 3 12 Cable connections overview for the PBC ccccessseceeeeeeseeeeeees 337 12 4 Fault EO CalZatiON at certs weedncatca sv ilosd en stenaarpetern ra anaente Acer uate 337 12 4 1 Fault Tracing Guidelines for RBS 2302 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeetee 338 12 4 2 Fault Tracing Guidelines for the PBC eccecceeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 343 12 5 Corrective Action for the RBS cccccssceeeeeessneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 349 12 5 1 ID SSW OCR carat decane ead enede sonceascttctes ockeaeey aecees niadelecsdetecamh ceded 349 125 2 Fam Unit Optional crete ct teeth tec a ist tee aE 352 12 53 SUMSINGIDS 22 cc5eisnt tacos teen datien tue a dn deiendcthtantlnenAdinedeptendtectiap eddies 357 12 5 4 Sector ANtenMaeceskes otra ieee a Se loliee oiiees So eh See Sas 367 12 5 5 Omnidirectional Antenna sssectrcesay cates ctety cues cece coeieeee eee Gece 369 12 5 6 Extemal Antenna sea a rE SA hes a tt 370 12 5 7 Multicasting BO cscs etka ee tect uteenti hn cesta Ra teeutedh whenertesetbeloaunccbelns 371 125 8 Batteria r A
211. een changed Ericsson Radio Systems AB 31 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction This page is intentionally left blank 32 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 2 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Safety Instructions Safety Instructions This chapter shows the system used for presenting safety information Note Reduce the risk of accidents by studying all the instructions carefully before starting work If questions arise regarding the safety instructions contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company Where local regulations exist these are to be followed The safety information in this manual is a supplement to local regulations It is the responsibility of the local project manager to make certain that local regulations are known and followed The relevant manual including this safety information and specific instructions supplied by Ericsson must be followed in any work performed on the Ericsson products or systems A sufficient knowledge of English or of any of the other languages in which the manuals or instructions are printed is necessary The safety information in the relevant manuals presupposes that any person performing work on Ericsson products or systems has the necessary education training and competence required in order to perform that work correctly For certain work additional training or special training may be required For more pr
212. eeseeaaeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeessnaaeeees 230 8 18 External Alarm PeStes sn cata cece ltt eet Senko et Serna a 231 8 18 1 External Alarm Test 2 TRX Configuration cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 8 18 2 External alarm test on RBS 1 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations 232 8 18 3 External alarm test on RBS 2 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations 232 8 18 4 External alarm test on RBS 3 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations 232 8 19 Battery Backup Test RBS with Internal Battery cccccceeeeeeeees 233 8 19 17 Test PIOCecU hes 2 5 Seu tiene ahve eh Saran int miata eae aah Sey Sates ld 233 8 20 Battery Backup Test RBS with External Battery PBC 08 233 8 20 1 Switch Settings Before and After Test cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 9 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 8 20 2 Test Procedure 2 TRX Sector Configuration ccceeeeeeeeeees 234 8 20 3 Test Procedure 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations e 234 B21 COMCIMEING ROUNE Sasra a a ee E EEEn at 236 9 22 Test Record asied aiia eeii naad adan ea niea tans 237 8 22 u Site Datel a ace geena e a eave ews E a A ss 238 9 22 2 gt kes RESUMM reii arenend aaaea EE a A ci aa e EREE EE Ea 239 9 22 3 Trouble Reporta ee eh ie 240 8 22 4 Repair Delivery Note Blue Tag ccccceseseseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 240 9 Optional TESTS Aissis aana a
213. emplate and drill the holes for the fasteners best suited for the wall material Note The mounting plate must not be used as a drilling template in order not to damage the rust protection surface 35_0331C Figure 27 Mounting plate 5 Mount the mounting plate and secure it into position with all screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB 71 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 6 Unscrew the four nuts on which the mounting base is to be hung until only a few threads remain 5 5 2 Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Pole P003699A Figure 28 Mounting alternatives The mounting plate may be mounted on a vertical pole or on a horizontal pole by using different holes 04_0331B Figure 29 Choosing the appropriate holes A Holes to be used for vertical pole B Holes to be used for horizontal pole 1 Choose the appropriate holes horizontal vertical 72 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Recess 06_0331B Figure 50 Fastening the clamps and mounting the washers P003561A Figure 31 Mounting the washers 2 Make sure that the washers are mounted correctly see Figure 31 on page 73 Fasten the two clamps with the screws and washers Ensure that the recess is attached at the correct place Ericsson Radio Systems
214. ename VOL BTSVOLUMSW RLENGTH 512 TYPE SEQ FCLASS CMP EXP 10 SIZE 1 3 Check which subfiles there are on the floppy s Command INFIP FILE FDO0A1 FDOB1 4 Copy the files Repeat for all subfiles on the diskettes Command INFET FILE1 FHEADER NODE1 A IO1 FD 1 FILE2 btsfilename HEADER Command INFET FILE1 FLF1 NODE1 A 1IO1 FD 1 FILE2 btsfilename LF1 Command INFET FILE1 FLF2 NODE1 A 1IO1 FD 1 FILE2 btsfilename LF2 Command INFET FILE1 FLF3 NODE1 A 1IO1 FD 1 FILE2 btsfilename LF3 5 Unload and dismount the disc s Command INVOE Note Always repeat step 1 on page 284 and step 5 on page 284 every time you swap discs 284 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 10 9 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Managed Object Hierarchy RBS Site Integration TRU DXU TRX 0 11 AA 0 7 05_0051C Figure 253 Managed Object MO hierarchy for RBS 2000 series The Managed Objects CF TF DP CON and IS corresponds to the hardware unit DXU in the BTS The Managed Objects TRX TX RX and TS corresponds to the hardware unit TRU in the BTS The Managed Object TG has no corresponding hardware in the BTS Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 285 488 RBS Site Integration 10 10 10 286 488 Managed Object States Delete Define RXMOE RXMOI Out of Service Into
215. entary equipment has to be specified A helpful tool is the Standard Site Material catalogue which contains a number of kits Every site is individual and the contents of the various kits have to be verified against the actual site layout and requirements Installation Material List Installation material is listed in a Plant specification numbered with the site number Example 2 127 11 IPA 110 1001 In this case the document prefix indicates that this is part two of the plant specification installation material 4 6 3 Site Preparation Any civil works such as modification of existing buildings masts or antenna structures have to be specified and given to a contractor for design and execution 4 6 4 Site Installation Documentation The site installation documentation is collected in one binder per site and is given to Site Preparation The binder is given a product number containing the prefix LZB Example LZB IPA 110 1001 The prefix LZB corresponds to ABC class LZB Document collections and will indicate that this is a document collection for the site IPA 110 1001 Depending on the type of installation the binder will contain more or less elaborated documentation The list below is an example of a complex installation List of documents 001 51 Document list 56 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 4 6 5 4 7 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Plannin
216. er is in the ON position l Nf Nw OPERATIONAL O O FAULT P004022A Low Battery Voltage The cabinets may have been running on battery backup and are currently recharging If the fault indication persists for more than 24 hours replace the batteries and or the power cabinet l hrr ha OPERATIONAL FAULT P004023A Overtemp active This alarm might be active if the ambient temperature is above 40 C If the ambient temperature is normal replace the power cabinet l l Net Nw OPERATIONAL O O FAULT P004024A Operational No alarms present OPERATIONAL O FAULT p p P004197A 348 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 5 Corrective Action for the RBS 12 5 1 HDSL Modem Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position a Pow ON If the PBC is not used proceed to step 8 6 Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position 7 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 8 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the HDSL Modem P004475A Figure 283 Disconnecting the cables 1 Disconnect the cables from the HDSL Modem LZN 3
217. er the IDB has been installed 5 Using the OMT check that the PCM Parameters and the defined alarms are properly installed 6 Set the RBS in Remote mode 4 and 6 TRX configuration When a 4 TRX or 6 TRX configuration is used the IDB should only be installed in the Master RBS before switching on any Extension RBS 1 Connect the OMT to the Master RBS See Section 8 7 on page 205 Make sure that the Extension RBS s are switched off Establish a link between the OMT and the Master RBS Make sure that the Master RBS is in Local mode Install the IDB The Master RBS should remain in Local mode after the IDB has been installed 6 Switch on the Extension RBS s The Extension RBS s will now enter Local mode ig he 2 7 Wait for a few minutes then set the Extension RBS s in Remote mode 8 Using the OMT check that the Master RBS has established contact with the Extension RBS s by viewing the SW revisions for all RBSs 9 Using the OMT check that the PCM Parameters and the defined alarms are properly installed 10 Set the Master RBS in Remote mode 11 Make sure that all RBSs are in Remote mode Fault Status Reading If any fault LED is lit including the external alarms LED the fault status must be read 1 Make sure that the OMT is started and IDB read 2 Read the faults with the OMT 3 If needed see chapter Fault Handling to decode the faults in the Event Monitor field 4 Take corrective a
218. ernal AC cable For installation box 2 RPM 518 956 1 Cable with connector Display cable For installation box LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 51 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts This page is intentionally left blank 03_0211 52 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts 5 7 Packages for Repairable Products Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 RTK 994 04 1 Packaging Set For RBS 2 RTK 994 04 7 Packaging Set For PBC 3 RTK 993 4147 44 Box For HDSL LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 53 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts This page is intentionally left blank 03_0211 349 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 RBS 2302 Product Revision Information 6 RBS 2302 Product Revision Information This Chapter shows replaced or withdrawn Products LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 55 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved RBS 2302 Product Revision Information 6 1 Replaced or Withdrawn Products Old Product 6 BKC 861 0013 004 NTZ 111 45 07 RPM 513 760 1 RPM 518 954 1 RPM 518 974 1 SEB 104 19 1 56 59 Revision Information Replaced Replaced Withdrawn Withdrawn Replaced Replaced Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved New Product 24 BKC 861 0013 004 SDD 513 0120
219. ernal alarm OFF Yellow 6 Cabinet locked 7 Is the backup copy of the RBS IDB saved on a floppy disk Signature Transport of a Faulty Unit The faulty unit should be transported in the same packaging materials as the spare unit was delivered in Report of Finished Work When a maintenance procedure has been completed a report should be written including a detailed description of actions taken all observations made in accordance with local routines for work orders site log book etc Repair Delivery Note Blue Tag When a faulty unit is returned it must always be accompanied by a repair delivery note When the repair delivery note has been completed it must be attached to the faulty unit before sending it for repair The repair delivery note LZF 084 84 can be ordered from the local FSC A description of how to fill in a repair delivery note follows below Note Add as much information as possible to Field 20 on the Repair Delivery Note to make it easier for the repair center Ericsson Radio Systems AB 453 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 454 488 ERICSSON Z REPAIR DELIVERY NOTE KRC 123 456 1 RIA 15 Function description 1 Prepared T 2 Telephone No 3 Failure date yyyy mm dd 4 Failure 3 Eric Ericsson 46 8 757 3285 1999 08 16 Jsuspeciea X vertioa S 5 Country 6 Exchange code 7 State code 8 Consecutiv
220. erved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 5 18 1 Upper Sunshield P003087A Figure 101 Mounting the upper sunshield 1 Hook on the upper sunshield on the left side 2 Push it down until it snaps into position 3 Seal the two holes intended for the handle using the supplied screw plugs Note The plugs are to be screwed not pressed LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 117 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 5 18 2 Left Sunshield 30_0331B Figure 102 Mounting the left sunshield 1 Hook on the left sunshield on the left side of the cabinet 2 Push on the lower left part of the sunshield until it snaps into position 5 18 3 Lower Sunshield P003149B Figure 103 Mounting the lower sunshield 118 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 18 4 5 19 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Note The lower sunshield can only be mounted if the left sunshield is mounted 1 Hook on the lower sunshield on the left side of the cabinet 2 Push it up until it snaps into the fasteners situated in the middle of the cabinet Front Sunshield P003088A Figure 104 Mounting the front sunshield 1 Mount the short hinge p
221. es on display element D3 AC fault no mains AC DC fault DC DC overload DC DC fault Battery fault Battery disconnected Battery voltage low Overtemp active Overtemp historical 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PBC in standalone mode antenna detected Commands The table below lists the command codes used for RBS 2302 Other codes are used for Maxite Table 22 Command codes on display element D3 Code Command 5 Clear historical overtemperature alarms 6 Set PBC in stand alone mode 7 Exit PBC from stand alone mode Clear Historical Temperature Alarms There are two kinds of temperature alarms active and historical Alarm code 008 on the display indicates PBC Alarm Overtemperature historical To reset the historical alarm 1 Press Menu 2 Select code 5 on display element D3 with the Up or Down button 3 Press Enter The command is executed Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests Setting the PBC in Stand Alone Mode Note Always set the PBC in Stand alone Mode when active antenna is not used 1 Press Menu 2 Select code 6 on display element D3 with the Up or Down button 3 Press Enter The command is executed 8 7 Connecting the OMT The purpose of this chapter is to give a description of how to connect the Operation and Maintenance Terminal OMT to the RBS The configuration and fault status reading is performed with the OMT
222. ests Table 352 The indications of the LEDs LED On LED Off Steady Light Flashing Light Po or Pair 2 progress use downstream or Pair 1 progress use UA faulty configuration inconsistent settings of the DIP switches will be indicated by flashing of all three LEDs simultaneously Strapping Following tables summaries the settings of the DIP switches in different modes Table 353 The chain cascading mode strappings Line rate of master modem in fon on 2320 kbivs rs orr on 1168 bins on forr 592 kbivs orr forr reserved sa ss swe Running number of RBS in the sw O ee ee Usage of external alarm ON External alarms used by HDSL module Ericsson Radio Systems AB 227 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests Table 34 The point to point DXX proprietary mode strappings Ene rate in point to point DXX 2320 kbit s HDSL operation in point to point Proprietary mode mode Number of pairs in point to point swe Protection in point to point es ew a Modem role in point to point mode FON HSL Master or foses a ee ae Usage of external alarm External alarms used by HDSL module Note The HDSL 1 1 protection mode selection SW 6 is independent from the link type selection but is only available in 2 pair mode 228 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 15 4 8 15 5 8 16 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 S
223. ever the radio cabinet cannot be powered up with batteries 24 V DC only Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 13 1 13 13 1 14 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Product Data Earthing The mounting base has one earthing point The earthing point is a M8 bolt A suitable earthing kit must be used to connect the bolt with the lightning protection system of the site Transmission The base station can be connected to transmission interface G 703 type El 2 Mbit s or T1 1 5 Mbit s T1 is also called DS1 For El transmission interfaces different impedances are used by different network operators or in different applications such as indoor or outdoor networks The two types are unbalanced coaxial cable with 75 Q impedances or balanced twisted pair cable with 120 Q impedance For T1 transmission interfaces balanced twisted pair cable with 100 Q impedance is used In the base station there are two ports PCM A and PCM B With El and T1 transmission each port consist of one input and one output connector PCM A IN PCM A OUT PCM B IN PCM B OUT The OUT connectors transmit signals from the RBS On the IN connectors the RBS receives signal This is valid for El and T1 interfaces but not for HDSL The PCM A port shall always be connected to the transmission cable towards the BSC In cascaded configurations the PCM B is connected to the transmission cable going away from the
224. ew Replacing the front sunshield P003452A Figure 295 Replacing the front sunshield 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 357 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Note If an external antenna is used the RBS does not need to be removed from service 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode 4 Remove the antenna If the used antenna is not an external antenna see Section 12 5 4 Sector Antenna on page 367 and Section 12 5 5 Omnidirectional Antenna on page 369 5 Push up the spring locking pin located in the lower left hand corner 6 Pull out the lower part of the sunshield 7 Carefully bend out the sides at the top of the sunshield so that the sunshield snaps off 8 Mount the new front sunshield 9 Fold down the sunshield Note Make sure that no cables are bent or squeezed 10 Push the lower left hand corner towards the RBS so that the spring locking pin snaps into position 11 Set the RBS in Remote Mode 12 Close the installation box door Replacing the lower sunshield Note If the omnidirectional antenna is used it replaces the lower sunshield but the procedure of replacing it is the same ZZ gt P003080A Figure 296 Replacing the lower sunshield 358 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6
225. face E1 Network Topology Sync Source E1 Receiver Sensitivity Parameters Short Haul Long Haul The purpose of Short Haul or Long Haul Receiver Sensitivity settings is to configure the RBS for Short Haul Long Haul transmission to optimize the transmission line performance Long Haul makes it possible to use longer cables for transmission between the RBS and the Far End or between RBSs in multidrop configurations The Long Haul functionality is accomplished by high sensitivity in the receiver The receiver dynamic range is O to 30 dB at 1024 Hz for 120 ohms twisted pair cables 0 dB 6 0 Vp p With Short Haul the receiver sensitivity is 6 dB The maximum cable length is calculated as Max cable length Receiver sensitivity Cable attenuation per metre To take advantage of the Long Haul function the Far End for example a DXX Mini DXC BSC or another RBS must support Long Haul If two equipments are connected together the equipment with the least sensitive receiver determines the maximum attenuation of the cables that can be used The default value is Long Haul and can be used for all cable lengths cable attenuation 0 30 dB If cables used have an attenuation less than 6 dB Short Haul can be used to avoid noise and cross talk to interfere with the signal Define PCM Parameters T1 100 ohm The purpose is to configure the RBS for stand alone mode or cascade connection and to define the T1 transmission parame
226. feeder cables with jumpers Do not cover the connectors with sealing tape until all testing is completed 7 3 Checking the Installation C Verify that the installation is in accordance with the Radio Site Installation Documentation Check that the right cable is connected to the right antenna Check visually that no cables or connectors are damaged and that all cables feeders and jumpers are properly marked Check that connectors are properly connected and tightened Verify the directions of directional antennas against the Radio Site Installation Documentation Consider magnetic influences from LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 177 488 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests nearby metallic objects and deviation from magnetic North when using the compass Record remarks if any in the Test Record and forward them to the person responsible for the site installation 7 4 Calibrating the Antenna Tester The Site Master must be calibrated to achieve accurate results and to compensate for Test Port Extension Cables The frequency range has to be set before calibration To select frequency range look in the tables for each test setup in Section 7 5 on page 179and Section 7 7 on page 183 Note The Site Master must be calibrated each time the frequency range is changed 7 4 1 Select the Frequency Range 1 Press the FREQ DIST key 2 Pres
227. for stepping through fault codes selecting commands Table 54 Control buttons on the display panel Control button Action Up Down Menu Enter 328 488 Digit step up Digit step down Activates command selection Executes commands Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 3 4 12 3 5 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Fault Messages P003220A Figure 275 Display view if no faults are detected If there are no faults this is indicated on the alarm display as shown in Figure 275 on page 329 e If a fault occurs the relevant fault code is automatically displayed see Section 12 3 7 on page 330 To detect if there are several faults step through the fault codes using the push buttons Up and Down see Table 54 on page 328 Except for temperature alarms all alarm codes originate from present faults that is no fault history is displayed Supervision of the PBC The Power and Battery Cabinet PBC alarms supervise Main input AC power e AC DC converter DC DC converter Battery unit Cabinet temperatures Power up When the power is switched on the PBC display starts flashing The power up takes about 5 seconds then the active system status appears on the display PBC originated Alarms to the RBS All alarms transmitted to RBS are active alarms Ericsson Radio Systems AB 329 488 All Rights Reser
228. ft corner of the screen 5 When the calibration has been performed disconnect the calibration equipment from the Test Port Extension Cable After the calibration the display will show CAL ON as long as the calibration is valid Choosing SWR Test Setup The purpose of a Standing Wave Ratio test SWR is to verify that the Standing Wave Ratio is not too high and that the signal is not reflected back into the RBS Ericsson Radio Systems AB 179 488 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests This section contains test setups and information about how to connect the test equipment for an SWR Test on a RBS 2302 passive Antenna System The figure shows how to connect the Site Master and the table shows which frequency range to set 7 5 1 SWR Test Setup for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems TX antenna Jumper Feeder RX antenna Jumper Feeder Jumper TX RX P007102A Figure 197 SWR Test Setup for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems 1 Use the table below to select the frequency range 2 Perform an SWR measurement on the X2 feeder system See Section 7 6 on page 181 3 Perform an SWR measurement on the X3 feeder system Table 12 Start and stop frequencies for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems System p i Stop freq MHz GSM 900 GSM 1800 1710 1880 GSM 1900 1850 1990 180 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Meas
229. fy that the cable markings correspond before connecting cables Ericsson Radio Systems AB 35 488 All Rights Reserved Safety Instructions Faulty Electric Tools WARNING A Do not repair a faulty electric tool yourself Hand it over to your supervisor in exchange for a functioning tool Drilling WARNING A Do not drill holes in the Radio Base Station The drill bit may come into contact with live wires Always use insulated protective gloves such as the LYB 1032 when drilling where live wires might be hidden Always use eye protectors goggles when drilling Flying chips and dust may get into your eyes Thunderstorms DANGER A Avoid working on electrical installations or towers masts during thunderstorms Thunderstorms create strong electric fields For that reason and to avoid direct strokes of lightning it is essential that the equipment is properly earthed for thunderstorm conditions 36 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Safety Instructions 2 3 1 Electrostatic Discharge ESD CAUTION A N Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity Electrical charges are generated by friction when a body moves rubs against clothes slides against a chair when shoes rub against the floor and when you handle ordinary pl
230. g and Requirements Cabinet material list 1 127 11 Plant specification Installation material list 2 127 11 Plant specification Site data 127 04 Configuration data Site layout 153 38 Situating plan The earthing system must be indicated on this drawing for Site Preparation Antenna layout 153 12 Antenna placement information Acceptance certificate 179 61 Certificate of conformance to be signed by the customer and Ericsson Test report 152 83 to be filled in by the tester Site Design Documentation Changes that occur during installation are recorded on the drawings by the installer and given to Installation Engineering Installation Engineering incorporates these changes into the drawings and compiles an as built version of the Site Installation Documentation This version is now called Site Design Documentation and constitutes the reference documentation for this particular site Site Requirements This part describes in general terms the requirements for the base station site Requirements related to dimensions power and so on are described in chapter Product Data The proposed network design shows the site locations in general The exact site position depends on available space and possibilities to place a site in that area The network design will also show at which height antennas will be placed this is the same as the installation height of the RBS Ericsson Radio System
231. ge 82 6 Route the cable into the inlet and tighten the cable gland 82 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 AC am rz L L L Line N Neutral PE Protective Earth P003453A Figure 47 7 8 Connecting AC mains and protective earth Connect the AC mains cable Ensure that the protective earth PE is properly connected P004674A Figure 48 Example of use of flexible conduit Ericsson Radio Systems AB 83 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 5 10 3 Loosening the Interface Box Gland Plate P003454A Figure 49 Loosening the gland plate To simplify the mounting of the cables to the interface box the gland plate may be loosened This is done by unscrewing the 2 torx screws For example is it easier to mount the cable inlet and the cable termination block at ground level instead of at a height for example on a ladder Loosening the Termination Block P003740A Figure 50 Loosening the termination block The termination blocks may be loosened to simplify the mounting of the cables 5 10 4 Assembling and Earthing of a twisted pair cable This section describes the assembling and mounting of a twisted pair cable that is to be connected to the interface box Also different ways to earth the cable
232. ghten the four locking nuts Mounting the Installation Box Door Note This section is also applicable when a HDSL door is used P003665A Figure 35 Mounting the installation box door Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 75 488 Installation of RBS 2302 1 Hook the lower left hand corner of the door on to the installation box 2 Press down the spring locking pin on the upper right hand corner of the installation box 3 Insert the installation box door by pushing the upper left hand corner of the door into position Make sure that the spring locking pin snaps into position P003666A Figure 36 Mounting the earth cable Installation Box Door without HDSL P004477A Figure 357 Mounting the earth cable Installation Box Door with HDSL 4 Mount the earth cable on the installation box door by screwing the torx screw into position 76 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 5 8 Installation Box P003084A Figure 38 Removing the protection covers 1 Remove the outer protection cover by snapping it off and let the cover hang in its cord 2 Loosen the inner protection cover by unscrewing the 2 torx screws and let the cover hang in the earth wire The voltage selector i
233. ghts Reserved Maintenance Confirm that the battery switches on the RBS 2302 and the PBC are in the ON position Verify that no error codes see Error Code PBC are displayed on the MMI of the PBC OOOOOOO0CO white brown X5 7 DC 24V_1_RTN X5 6 DC 24V_1 P003953A Measure the voltage over plinth X5 6 and X5 7 in the interface box in the PBC to verify that the PBC supplies 24 V P003954A Examine the PSA cable by measuring that 24 V is present on the incoming connector to the PSA If there is replace the PSA If not replace the cable Table 62 External Alarms If the yellow LED indicator is lit this means either that auxiliary equipment is sending alarms e g burglar alarms alarms or similar or that an alarm is received from the PBC Use the OMT to locate the active alarm s When software BSS R7 or later is loaded the ARAE alarms PBC alarms are indicated on the LED Fault when active if the optional PBC is used 342 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 4 2 Fault Tracing Guidelines for the PBC Table 63 clk If the red LED Fault is lit but not the green See cae 2 O AUT LED Operational this means severe alarm VT rT and one or more units needs replacement o o l Use Table 64 on page 345 Fault code list to solve the problem VL wy If the red LED Fault
234. have ten seconds to reinstall the PCM terminal blocks see step 23 on page 406 Disconnect the connection board CB21 and remount the connection terminal blocks for the PCM line on the transmission board Remount the remaining connection terminal blocks Remount the cover of the interface box and tighten the screws Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws To remount the cabinet on the mounting base see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 Set to Operation 1 If the 2 3 4 5 6 7 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 406 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC Battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the Battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode Close the installation box doors Test after corrective action 1 2 406 488 Perform a MS call test to verify the function see chapter Optional Tests Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 5 17 Internal Synchronization Calibrate Oscillator Fault Localisation 7 Locate the faulty cabinet 2 Display fault information 3 Sync fault VCO fault 4 Calibrate the cabinet oscillator No N o
235. he Fan Unit cover to see Every time the RBS is controlled or repaired that it is not damaged or dirty 2 Inspect the fans to see that they are Every time the RBS is controlled or repaired clean and that no obstacles are blocking the airflow Corrective actions 6 Replace the cover if it is damaged 7 Clean the cover with a mild detergent 8 Clean the fans with a mild detergent 9 Remove any obstacles blocking the air flows Test after corrective actions Run all the three fans to see that they operative If not replace the Fan Unit according to Section 12 5 2 Fan Unit Optional on page 352 12 8 Preventive Maintenance for the PBC This chapter provides information about the units requiring regular inspection and recommended intervals Preventive Maintenance is performed to inspect and correct faults before they cause serious damage to the equipment 450 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 8 1 12 8 2 12 8 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance The interval between inspections at each RBS site varies depending upon the environmental conditions found there Outdoor sites are exposed to larger amounts of contaminants and therefore require more maintenance than indoor sites The RBS operator can decide to increase or decrease the recommended interval between inspections as required PBC Maintenance Schedule Table 71 Preventive maintenance table PBC 1
236. he HDSL alarm can be defined according to Table 27 on page 215 R6 and Table 28 on page 215 R7 ID Alarm Inlet Info Severity Level 2 Comment HDSL DEGRADATION 3 Closing Level 2 DOWNSTREAM OR PAIR 1 HDSL DEGRADATION 4 Closing UPSTREAM OR PAIR 2 Table 27 HDSL alarm for R6 Type Table 28 HDSL alarm for R7 Type ID Alarm Inlet Info 0 3 Closing Severity Level 2 Comment HDSL DEGRADATION DOWNSTREAM OR PAIR 1 0 4 Closing Level 2 HDSL DEGRADATION UPSTREAM OR PAIR 2 Define Tei When cascading two or more RBSs more than one Transceiver Group TG is connected to the same DIP Each TG which is on the same DIP must have a unique CF TEI value The TEI value must be changed with the OMT See instruction in RA OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 l Make sure that the OMT is started and IDB read 2 Define TEI see correct address in network data Make sure the BSC has the corresponding TEI value Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 215 488 Site Installation Tests 8 13 8 14 216 488 Define PCM Parameters E1 120 ohm The purpose is to configure the RBS for stand alone mode or cascade connection and to define the E1 transmission parameters using the OMT For more information about how to use the OMT see QJ OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 The following parameters must be considered when defining the PCM transmission Transmission Inter
237. he X bus carries transmit air data frames between trancievers Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Ericsson GSM System RBS 2302 Spare Parts Catalogue DA ERICSSON amp LZN 302 97 R3C Ss ERICSSON 5 RBS 2302 Spare Parts Catalogue RBS 2302 Spare Parts Catalogue Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 1 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved RBS 2302 Spare Parts Catalogue Due to continued progress in methodology design and manufacturing the contents of this document are subject to revision without notice 2 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 RBS 2302 Spare Parts Catalogue Contents 1 Preface for the Spare Parts CataloQue ccccssssseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 5 VE PROT AS IIS LOM chi is eae a das aR NG le tal eee 6 2 Spare Parts Philosophy for RBS 2302 c cccsssseeeeeseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 7 2 1 General Information ccccceceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 8 3 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable 9 Sel Radio GabineuiRBS 2302 nnne a a a teats 11 3 2 Power and Battery Cabinet PBC cccccccceeseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 3 3 Optional HDSL Unit for RBS 2302 ox crccnccwetecvenec cel tecenneveaeies ce cennteans acess 15 4 Recommended Spare
238. he control box 2 Open the Fan Unit control box by unscrewing the two screws LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 353 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P004439A Figure 289 Inspecting the fuses 3 Inspect the fuses to see if they are damaged and replace them if necessary Table 65 Fuses 100 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 6 3 AT 250 v 200 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 6 3 AT 250 v 1 Fuse according to standard EN 60127 4 Ifthe fuses were damaged proceed to Section Test after corrective action on page 356 P004441A Figure 290 Unplugging the fast connection plinths 5 Unplug the fast connection plinths for the alarm cable x2 and the AC cable x3 and disconnect the protective earth cable 354 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P004488B Figure 291 Loosening the cable feed through plate Loosen the cable feed through plate by unscrewing the two screws Pull out the alarm cable and the AC cable P004440B Figure 292 Loosening the Fan Unit 8 Loosen the Fan Unit from the bracket by unscrewing the screws on the short sides Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 355 488 Maintenance P004394A Figure 293 AC selector 9 Verify that the v
239. he earth cable on the mounting base Use earthing kit see QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 2 Connect the other end of the earth cable to the existing lightning system close to the equipment Note If there is no lightning protection system use the earthing bar see RA General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 5 10 Connecting External Cables This section describes the connections of AC mains PCM Network and the external alarm cable 5 10 1 Opening the Interface Box Before the connection procedure can begin the interface box has to be opened P003143A Figure 43 Pulling down the interface box 1 Loosen the screws securing the interface box placed underneath the RBS and pull down the interface box 80 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P003144A Figure 44 Opening the interface box cover 2 Unscrew the 8 torx screws on the interface box cover Let the cover hang in the strap 5 10 2 Connecting the AC Mains DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equippment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal DANGER A Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electrical shock Approved circuit breakers for the AC mains and the cable s cross sectional area must always be
240. he field technician must be familiar with the product and the safety aspects that are involved 1 Read chapter Safety in this User s Guide 2 Read sections Maintenance General to become familiar with the product and how to operate it Ericsson Radio Systems AB 309 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 1 2 12 1 3 310 488 3 When performing maintenance at site evaluate the fault status with help from section Fault Localization 4 Use sections Corrective Action in accordance with the information given in section Fault Localization to perform the maintenance procedures required 5 Be sure to follow the instructions given in section Concluding Routines to finish the maintenance procedure Concluding Routines The section Concluding Routines provides information on the different administrative routines that must be performed before leaving the site General Note The described units must not be opened at site All maintenance that can be performed at site is described in this chapter The RBS 2302 is administrated and controlled by the Base Station Controller BSC There is an interface between the BSC and the Base Transceiver Station BTS The BSC has an overview of the status of the radio network and its resources Fault Handling Workflow Steps one and two are automatically performed by the Base Station System BSS Step three is performed at the Operation and Maintenance Center OMC by
241. he work order the following questions must be taken into consideration to optimize the visit at the site Is preventive maintenance scheduled at this site in the near future Are there any other faults that have been reported at this site that have been postponed Are there any other reasons for sending a field technician to the site The work order must include information about the following Site location How to get to the site Special tools or equipment needed RBS identity The suspected unit Site history The field technician will now take care of maintenance at the site When the work is completed a report will be written Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 1 5 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance RBS 2302 Maintenance Process A N i Fault analysis from OMC a a a aes ee r A I I y 1 Planning of work Va To be done at the site 7 Fault analysis 2 Fault localisation Corrective action 4 Test after corrective action Passed 6 Concluding routines aa 1 v eS ee N STOP Ma i TS A 03_0189B Figure 261 Maintenance process Planning of work 1 As a result of the fault analysis a work order has been written The work order will include information about site location how to get to the site special tools and equipment needed RBS identity the Ericsson Radio Syste
242. hield 2 Connect the earth cable on the mounting base Use earthing kit see QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 3 Connect the other end of the earth cable to the existing lightning system close to the equipment Note If there is no lightning protection system use the earthing bar see QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 6 10 Connecting External Cables This section describes the connections to the PBC LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 151 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 10 1 Opening the Interface Box Before the connection procedure can begin the interface face box has to be opened P003547A Figure 157 Pulling down the interface box 1 Loosen the screws securing the interface box placed underneath the RBS and pull down the interface box 152 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003548A Figure 158 Opening the interface box 2 Unscrew the 9 torx screws on the interface box cover Let the cover hang in the strap LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 153 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 10 2 154 488 Connection the AC Mains DANGER A
243. hielding gasket LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 37 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable This page is intentionally left blank 03_0211 38 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts 5 Other Available Parts About this Chapter All spare parts in this chapter have the internal code A These parts are not recommended for Customer stock The parts are available when needed LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 39 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts 06_0395A Figure 14 40 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Other Available Parts 5 1 Battery Accessories for RBS 2302 Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 NTZ 112 86 BA01 Spare Parts Set Internal battery cover set Includes covers and screws For battery see Chapter Not Repairable LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 41 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Other Available Parts P003631A Figure 15 42 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Pos a A WO N 5 2 Product No SEB 112 1017 2 SDD 513 0100 1 SEB 114 100 2 NTM 192 08 2 NTZ 111 44 07 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20
244. hts Reserved Fault Handling Remark Remark R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later R7 only 303 488 Fault Handling AO TX internal fault map class 2A Fault Fault type Remark No 0 TX diversity fault 47 AO TX external condition map class 1 Not used AO TX external condition map class 2 Not used AO TX replacement unit map Not used See Section SO CF replacement unit map on page 296 and Section SO TRXC replacement unit map on page 299 for possible HW causing the fault AO RX internal fault map class 1A Not used AO RX internal fault map class 1B Fault Fault type Remark No 0 RXDA amplifier current fault R6 and later 1 ALNA fault 2 3 RX EEPROM checksum fault 4 RX configuration table checksum fault 5 RX synthesizer A B unlocked 6 RX synthesizer C unlocked 7 Astra Dixie communication fault 8 RX internal voltage fault 9 RX cable disconnected 10 RX initiation fault 11 CDU output voltage fault 47 RX Auxiliary Equipment Fault R7 only 304 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault Handling AO RX internal fault map class 2A Not used AO RX external condition map class 1 Not used AO RX external condition map class 2 Not used AO RX replacement unit map Not used See Section SO CF replacement unit map on page 2
245. iation from the antenna system might endanger your health Switch off the transmitter when working with antennas or near them Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily 2 Open the installation box door 3 Set the RBS to Local Mode Replacing the Omnidirectional Antenna The Omnidirectional antenna is placed underneath the radio cabinet 43_0331C Figure 308 Omnidirectional Antenna Note Make sure that all cables are properly labelled before disconnecting them 1 Disconnect the antenna cables 2 Remove the front sun shield 3 Unsnap the antenna by pressing the fasteners located in the middle on the antenna 4 Pull the antenna down and unhook it LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 369 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 5 6 370 488 Replace the old antenna with the new Reconnect the antenna cables Set the RBS to Remote Mode ont nw Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 External Antenna WARNING Radio frequency radiation The radio frequency radiation from the antenna system might endanger your health Switch off the transmitter when working with antennas or near them Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will b
246. igurations Follow the same test procedure as described for RBS 2 above 232 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 19 8 19 1 8 20 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests Battery Backup Test RBS with Internal Battery The purpose of this test is to verify that the battery is able to supply DC when the AC is off Note Make sure that the Battery Fault indicator is not active before performing any battery test This test is to be performed for each RBS The test is passed if the RBS still is running when the incoming AC for the RBS has been switched off The Local Mode indicator is on or flashing when the RBS is running Note The battery backup time is about three minutes depending on traffic for instance Test Procedure 1 Make sure that the RBS has been powered up for at least 5 minutes before starting the test After 24 hours the battery is fully charged 2 Make sure that the battery power for the RBS is switched on and the Battery Fault indicator is off Low battery voltage makes the Battery Fault Indicator light up yellow If this is the case recharge the battery 3 Switch off the incoming AC for the RBS and check that the indicator AC Power On is turned off The test is passed if the RBS still is running When the RBS is running the Local Mode indicator is on or flashing 4 Switch on the incoming AC for the RBS Ch
247. ilable Parts for PBC Internal Cables cccceeeeeeeeeteees 51 5 7 Packages for Repairable Products cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 6 RBS 2302 Product Revision Information ccccsssseececeessseeeeeeeseeseeereees 55 6 1 Replaced or Withdrawn Products cc scacanca cel ean ee 56 7 Numerical index for RBS 2302 ccssseeceeessseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeees 57 LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 3 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved RBS 2302 Spare Parts Catalogue This page is intentionally left blank 4 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Preface for the Spare Parts Catalogue Preface for the Spare Parts Catalogue The purpose of this Catalogue is to provide information necessary to order replaceable parts This information is useful for the general planning of a maintenance organisation and in building up a spare parts stock The Spare Parts Catalogue can be ordered separately but is also included in the User s Guide See tables below This catalogue describes the RBS 2302 and options Customer Library RBS 2302 LZN 302 71 Library Overview LZN 302 73 RBS 2302 User s Guide LZN 302 74 Reference Manual LZN 302 77 General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 Spare Parts Catalogue RBS 2302 LZN 302 97 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 5 59 All Rights Reserved
248. in on the left side and the long hinge pin on the right side 2 Hook on the front sunshield onto the hinges and fold down the cover 3 Press on the lower left hand corner so that the spring locking pin snaps into position 4 and 6 TRX Configuration optional The RBS configuration can supply a extension for both 4 and 6 TRX configuration That means one or two additional RBSs This is done to increase radio capacity The PCM cable is connected to the Master radio cabinet By a TXL bus cable the Master radio cabinet is connected to the extension cabinet 1 For the 6 TRX configuration a second extension cabinet extension cabinet 2 is connected The length of the TXL bus cable is 5 meters for the 4 TRX configuration and 5 5 meters for the 6 TRX configuration The RBS to PBC cabling for extension cabinet 1 and cabinet 2 is the same as for the basic RBS cabling configuration Four external alarms can be connected for each extension radio cabinet Ericsson Radio Systems AB 119 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 120 488 Follow this procedure to connect the TXL bus cable RBS RBS Extension 1 Tz P004443A Figure 105 TXL bus connection for 4 TRX configuration RBS RBS Extension 1 Extension 2 P004177A Figure 106 TXL bus connection for 6 TRX configuration 1 Open the installation box door 2 Open the front sunshield 3 Remove the protection cap from
249. ing the PCM B coaxial 75 2 cable Cascade Connection The connection cable for 75 Q coaxial cable RPM 518 974 2 can be ordered as an option The cable inlet is premounted so the only installation is to connect the termination block 92 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 OUT_GND IN_N_LINE IN_P_LINE P006411A Figure 65 The 75 82 PCM cable with DC isolation of IN wire and coaxial TNC connectors 1 Remove the 50 Q termination resistor from the PCM B temination block PCM B atelefete e eieveiele e oo ooocoocolocooog ee E telotololetele leteletololete Sloot ESD OSCOOCOOTMOCOOCCOCfOSoO eS es Se Lu LU zz E a a4 P003270A Figure 66 Connecting the 75 822 PCM cable to the termination block Cascade connection 2 Follow the procedure for the PCM A cable in Section Connecting the PCM A coaxial 75 cable on page 89to connect the PCM B cable When connecting the cables to the PCM B termination block refer to the figure above Connecting the PCM B 100 120 Q cable Cascade Connection The following section describes the procedure for connecting the PCM B twisted pair cable used for cascade connection of up to five RBSs LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 93 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 94 488 PCM B atelefete e eieieiele e
250. ing to the instructions below DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal P004395A Figure 217 Removing the control box cover on the Fan Unit 1 Remove the control box cover on the Fan Unit by loosening the 2 screws 2 Turn on the power for the Fan Unit LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 209 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests P004915A Figure 218 Location of the fan test button in the control box 3 Press the fan test button and check that all three fans are running If not replace the Fan Unit according to chapter Maintenance section Corrective Action for the RBS subsection Fan Unit Optional If the temperature is above 30 C the fans will still be running due to the hysteresis of the temperature sensor 4 Remount the control box cover on the Fan Unit and tighten the 2 screws 8 11 Check IDB Before starting any test the RBS must have an Installation Database IDB that contains correct information about the equipment and the configuration of the cabinet The IDB is essential to put the RBS into service 210 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 11 1 8 11 2 8 11 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tes
251. inst the packing list Make sure that no parts have any defects or deformity WARNING A Be confident that it is free area below during the hoisting Risk of accidents caused by falling object 5 22 2 Handling the Lifting Device 01_0361A Figure 124 Equipment Overview 1 Check the delivered equipment against the packing list EA ERICSSON E SE 164 80 Stockholm Sweden PN SXK 107 5723 1 R1A MAX LOAD 25 KG 55 LB MANUFACTURING DATE 02_0361B Figure 125 Label 2 Make sure that the lifting device is provided with a label 3 Untangle the rope to facilitate the use of the lifting device 132 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Upper cleat Lower cleat 09_0361A Figure 126 Rope wiring 4 Ensure that the rope is wired through the trolley and cleats in a suitable way P004001A Figure 127 Mounting the lifting device 5 Mount the lifting device tube bracket on the left side of the mounting plate LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 133 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 134 488 P004002A Figure 128 Locking pin position 6 Make sure that the locking pin is in the correct position P004003A Figure 129 Inserting the lifting device
252. ion of RBS 2302 and Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Also make sure that the transmission cable is disconnected If not and the software versions of the RBS and the BSC differ the BSC will copy its software version to the RBS without any warning At extremely low temperature the warming up of the RBS may take about half an hour During this time the RBSs leds in the interface box will turn off Note Always start up the PBC before starting up the RBS 1 Start up of the PBC 1 Switch on the AC power 2 Switch on the DC battery power 3 Check for PBC alarms see page 204 If alarms are located correct them before continuing 2 Start up of the RBS 1 Switch on the AC power 2 Switch on the DC battery power The RBS will automatically run a self test For information regarding optical indicators for the RBS see Section 8 3 3 on page 193 for the PBC see page 198 How to Shut down Note Always shut down the RBS before shutting off the PBC If the antenna is to be dismounted set the feeder attenuators to max value For further information see chapter Maintenance 1 Shut down of the RBS 1 Switch off the DC battery power 2 Switch off the AC power 2 Shut down of the PBC 1 Switch off the DC battery power 2 Switch off the AC power Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 6 8 6 1 8 6 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Ins
253. is damaged make an immediate complaint to the supervisor transport company Ericsson Radio Systems AB 69 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 5 5 5 5 1 70 488 Mounting the Mounting Plate 35_0331B Figure 24 Mounting the mounting plate If the installation site is at such height that work cannot be done without aid a skylift or scaffold must be used For safety reasons a step ladder should only be used as an exception 275 215 Measurement in mm P003642A Figure 25 Mounting plate and equipment contour front view Figure 25 on page 70 shows the dimensions of the equipment in relation to the mounting plate This is to determine a suitable alignment with several units or existing equipment For more information see chapter Product Data and chapter Site Planning and Requirements Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Wall 1 Place the mounting plate drilling template in the position where the RBS 2302 is to be situated Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Alternate tol P006039A Figure 26 Marking the holes 2 Check with a spiritlevel that the drilling template is placed in a horizontal position Use a pen to mark the position of the holes that are to be drilled 4 Remove the t
254. is presented 84 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Assembling the Cable Gland P003401A Figure 51 Assembling the cable gland 1 Cut the cable to appropriate length Note Remember to take into account that extra cable length is required so that the interface box can be mounted back into position in the mounting base Route the cable so the interface box can be pushed up Adjust the sealing grommet to the cable diameter Mount all cable gland details except for the last clamping cone Gre ON Remove the insulation yo P003402A Figure 52 Mounting the cable gland 6 Fold the outer braid 7 To earth the cable fit the clamping cone over the cable so that the outer cable braid is squeezed between clamping ring and clamping cone LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 85 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 86 488 8 Route the cable into the inlet and tighten the cable gland Earthing the twisted pair cable Depending on the cable there are several ways to earth a twisted pair cable The principle is that it is most satisfying to make the earth connection as near as possible to the cable gland The table below shows how to earth the cable in different cases Table 7 Eathing options for twisted pair cable Type of cable Farthing point
255. ission cable is mounted to the cabinet 5 Remount the outer protective cover Set to operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 377 2 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode Test after corrective action l1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Radio Cabinet Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 8 on page 377 6 Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position 7 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 8 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch i Pe GOS Replacing the Radio cabinet 1 Make sure that none of the LEDs are lit inside the installation box Ericsson Radio Systems AB 377 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 2 Remove the front lower left and upper sunshields PA T po a a Yo Oe 4 m 13_0334A Figure 316 Lifting device Note The lifting device is opti
256. ite Installation Tests Table 35 The point to point ETSI compliant mode strappings F 2 x 1 Mbit s asynchronous N FF FF N N N FF F Line rate point to point ETSI O compilant mode oN O 2 x 1 Mbit s synchronous OFF 2x 1 Mbit s partial HDSL operation in point to point mode CO ETSI compliant mode Reserved in ETSI compliant mode ON sd Not applicable Reserved in ETSI compliant mode ON Not applicable Oo Ow Modem role in point to point mode ON sd HDSL Master Usage of external alarm ON External alarms used by HDSL module O OF Ol O O O O O O Test of HDSL Perform the optional test for the HDSL modem according to chapter Optional Tests Start up After start up of the PBC and the RBS check that the green LED of the HDSL Modem will light steady Wait for the yellow LEDs to go from flashing to steady light One or two LEDs will light depending on the configuration according to the Table 32 on page 227 Install IDB Note The RBS has to be in Local mode to accept a new or modified IDB If necessary change mode by pressing the Local Remote button 2 TRX configuration 1 Connect the OMT to the RBS See Section 8 7 on page 205 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 229 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 17 230 488 2 Establish a link between the OMT and the RBS 3 Make sure that the RBS is in Local mode 4 Install the IDB The RBS should remain in Local mode aft
257. ith data concerning time date and name of the person who took the action s 10 Check that all tools and instruments have been removed from the site Table 42 IDB diskette label ttem Description i O lt Date gt Current date YYMMDD lt rev gt Revision state of the product lt RBS serial number gt Serial number of the RBS lt backup date gt Date of backup YYMMDD Test Record Example of test records that are to be filled in during the tests Ericsson Radio Systems AB 237 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 22 1 Site Data Site Hardware Status Site Name Cell configuration Testers Name Site Hardware Status Unit Product No Serial No Rev Manufact date RBS 1 Radio cabinet Mounting base Battery PSA HDSL RBS 2 Radio cabinet Mounting base Battery PSA HDSL RBS 3 Radio cabinet Mounting base Battery PSA HDSL PBC 1 Battery cabinet Mounting base PBC 2 Battery cabinet Mounting base PBC 3 Battery cabinet Mounting base P006057A Figure 233 Site Hardware Status 238 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 22 2 Test Result Test Checklist Site Installation Tests Test Record for Stand Alone Tests NE Commissioning Date Site No AC Mains Power Test Start up Self test check Fan Unit Test Battery Backup Test Check I
258. jumper cable to the connector labled X2 on the RBS The tightening of the nut will be done later 2 Connect the antenna jumper cable to the connector labled X3 on the RBS The tightening of the nut will be done later 114 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P005015A Figure 98 Installation of jumper cable 3 Route the antenna jumper cable between the lower sunshield and the mounting base and strap the cable according to the figure above P005016A Figure 99 Tightening of the nuts for the jumper cable 4 Tighten the nuts for the conectors X2 and X3 on the RBS according to the figure above For installation of the External Antenna see LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 115 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 For information regarding antenna configuration see allocation drawing 193 26 IPA xxxx in the Site Installation Documentation 5 18 Mounting the Sunshields 7 Left sunshield Upper sunshield E Front sunshield P003147A Figure 100 Main units 116 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Res
259. l ceeeeeeees 102 5 10 9 Closing the Interface BOX cccccceccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeensaeeeeeeees 103 5 11 Mounting the Power Supply Adapter Optional eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 104 5 12 MOUNTING the Gabihe tes i a a a 104 5 13 Connecting Internal Cables ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeensaeeeeeeees 107 5 14 Mounting the Sector Antenna optional c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 110 5 15 Mounting the Omnidirectional Antenna optional ceeeeeeeeees 111 5 16 Mounting the Multicasting Box optional eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 112 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 5 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved User s Guide RBS 2302 5 17 Connecting the External Antenna Jumpers to the RBS optional 114 5 18 Mounting the SUNSINGIAS so ceio asec des ivsgescxtisteag een cagtesss ang anecteea eccentrics 116 5 181 Upper S nshield annn EA ence 117 5 18 2 Left SUNSIUSIGs ia sheccovicn tite tetas spnecodt nnd eb diced dd cicncds eadeesoe nabs 118 5 18 3 Lower SUNSMICIC 3 sans uate ee i ee ibn ae net eee ance 118 5 184 Front SUNMSINGIC gt ccc aer e cach sos eas otal E a ae Seca 119 5 19 4 and 6 TRX Configuration Optional ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 5 20 Mounting the Fan Unit Optional 0 cece eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 121 5 21 Before leaving the Site sscscccecctsciccccccaststeshieed dad inasedece
260. l values Power Input voltage 7 V DC supply from the radio cabinet Power consumption max 3 5 W at NTU E 2P Dimension and Weight The size of the door including HDSL modem H x W x D 488 x 112 x 44 mm The total weight of the door including HDSL modem is 1 7 kg 13 3 3 Material The HDSL Modem Module consists of one kit product number ZAT 759 19 101 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 475 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Product Data This page is intentionally left blank 476 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 14 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Glossary Glossary This glossary lists abbreviations and acronyms used in texts dealing with RBS 2301 and 2302 Some basic terms and acronyms needed for cross references are included in the list In the RBS manuals terminology defined by GSM is used together with terms related to Ericsson and the CME 20 and CMS 40 projects Terms and Abbreviations An arrow gt is used to indicate a reference to another entry in this list 1 P 2 P AAU Abis AC A D converter AGW AIS ALBO ALPU AO ARAE ARFCN ARP ASIC Astra AU BCCH One Pair connection with echo cancellation 2 wires Two Pair connection with echo cancellation 4 wires Active Antenna Unit GSM interface standard defining attributes of the communication between BSC and BTS Alternati
261. lation at each site Cabinet Material Listing The ordering information document contains instructions on how to list the equipment for RBS 2302 See QJ Ordering Information for RBS 2302 and 131 62 HRB 105 112 06 Maxite Make sure that the document has the latest revision state and follow the instructions in the document The revision state can be checked in the Ericsson PRIM database Plant Specification The list of equipment selected from the ordering information is put into a Plant specification numbered with the site number Example 1 127 11 IPA 110 1001 In this case the document prefix indicates that this is part of a plant specification divided into several parts This part is the RBS equipment Ericsson Radio Systems AB 55 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements but there might also be need for a plant specification for the installation material or other auxiliary equipment 2 127 11 etc The plant specification should contain the following headings Item Product denomination Product number Quantity The plant specification is used for Site Investigation and Installation Engineering RBS equipment is factory equipped and tested to fit the actual site In this case the Plant specification is delivered to the Cabinet Assembly and Test process 4 6 2 Installation Material Based on the findings during the site investigation any additional installation material and supplem
262. le E1 Q C4 Transmision cable T1 100 Q El 120 2 C5 Transmision cable HDSL C6 Cable between BSCSim and HTU Al Attenuator 30 dB 2 W Adl Adapter See chapter Tools and Instruments for more information 9 2 3 Test using the MS and BSC Simulator Note If HDSL modem is used perform the setup and the test according to Section 9 2 4 Test through HDSL using the MS and BSC Simulator on page 246 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 243 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Optional Tests 244 488 Test Setup Procedure 2 TRX Configuration Simulator adapter TER FORESEES GSS J Si Lo gt S x oe O OANA CPA D 949 WANG Baw Ny P003695B Figure 236 Simulator adapter Kz A N ENC PEERS SEEN ON a SSO SSS NJ S P003696B Figure 237 Setup using BSC simulator T1 100 2 1 5 Mbit s and El 120 2 2 0 Mbit s Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Note Oe De ON 10 11 Optional Tests Ensure that the RBS is in Remote mode If not change to Remote mode by pressing the Local remote button on the RBS Connect cable C1 to the COM1 port on the BSC simulator and to the input inside the installation box marked OMT Always connect the BSC simulator
263. le 50 Fault code 000000000001 o fo jo fo fo fo o fo fo fo fo h Bit number 0 is set to 1 which means that replacement unit 0 is suspected of being faulty Translating this number by using the replacement unit map for SO TRXC will give us the information Suspected replacement unit is TRU Unused Decoding Table Make a copy of this table and use it as a tool when decoding fault codes and replacement unit codes Table 51 Unused decoding table 292 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 11 2 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault Handling Hex to Bin Table Hex Bin Hex Bin 0 0000 8 1000 1 0001 9 1001 2 0010 A 1010 3 0011 B 1011 4 0100 C 1100 5 0101 D 1101 6 0110 E 1110 7 0111 F 1111 SO Fault Lists Fault codes on the Abis interface are defined per MO The SO RU map and the I1A I2A fault maps should be read together The SO fault map denotes which fault it is and the RU map denotes where the fault is located An AO IIB fault has a corresponding SO I2A fault So by reading the I2A fault map and the RU map for SO CF or SO TRXC the HW that is causing the AO I1B fault can be found This is the case when BTS internal HW affects a single AO The AO is not allowed to report the HW itself since this task is assigned to the HW responsible SO One could say that the consequence is reported by the AO I1B fault map and the cause is reported by the SO ILA I2A fault
264. les to the termination block according to the figure above Note If not using a cascade connection the premounted 50 2 resistance between X32 1 and X32 2 on the PCM B termination block should not be removed 6 Remount the cable gland plate and tighten the 2 torx screws 7 Adjust the cable to the appropiate length P006567A Figure 62 Principle of connecting coaxial PCM cable 8 Connect the termination block to the plinth 9 Tighten the lower cable gland sealing nut Connecting the PCM A 100 120 cable The following section describes the procedure for connecting the PCM A twisted pair cable Ericsson Radio Systems AB 91 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 QCOOOOOC CHOC COC OO OFOCOO ee ee E l agaaaaa 50A X31 X31 X31 X31 X31 X31 X32 1 X32 2 P003405A Figure 63 Connecting PCM A cable 100 120 22 Note If not using a cascade connection the premounted 50 2 resistance between X32 1 and X32 2 on the PCM B termination block should not be removed 1 If jumper wires are preinstalled beteween X31 2 and X31 3 and X31 5 and X31 6 respectively remove them 2 Connect the PCM A 100 120 Q cable twisted pair 3 Earth the cable in one of the ways that are described in page 86 POO6561A Figure 64 The cable connected to the termination block Earthing via the cable gland and the pull relief clamp Connect
265. lockable mains switch must be provided close to the base station It is also recommended that an AC mains outlet is mounted close to the base station for installation and test equipment Supply Voltage Table 77 Supply voltages 200 250 V AC 10 50 Hz 10 60 Hz 8 100 127 V AC 210 60 Hz 8 Limiting Values for AC Mains Supply Table 78 Limiting values The mains voltage level is selected by a switch in the installation box The voltage selector can be set to a nominal voltage of 115 V or 230 V Table 79 Power consumption and heat generation Operation Power consumption VA Heat generation W Maximum 400 1 ni Both transceivers transmitting on full output power With activated heater Battery Backup The base station will survive interruptions in the mains supply for at least 3 minutes The base station will maintain full performance during the back up time if the battery is fully charged The battery will be recharged to at least 80 of its capacity within 15 hours The battery consists of two rows of nickel cadmium cells in a sealed container The size of the internal nickel cadmium cells is similar to ordinary torch battery type R14 IEC standard or C ANSI standard It is not possible to open the battery container The base station can also be powered with 24 V DC from the PBC In this case the battery container is replaced by a battery adapter see Section Batteries on page 472 How
266. m at 1359 resistive load Max cable length See Table 86 on page 474and Table 87 on page 475 Table 86 Maximum cable attenuation and length with 0 4 mm 37 nF km cable The cable attenuation is 9 1 dB km at 150 kHz 0 4 mm 37nF km 9 1 dB km no noise o O 5u V V Hz ie 6 dB 10 uV V H2 ie 0 dB line rate maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum cable attenuation cable attenuation cable length attenuation length at 150 kHz at 150 kHz at 150 kHz kbit s km dB dB dB 474 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Product Data Table 87 Maximum cable attenuation and length with 0 5 mm 40 nF km cable The cable attenuation is 6 6 dB km at 150 kHz 0 5 mm 40 nF km 6 6 dB km nonoise o 5u V Hz ie 6 dB 10 V V Hz ie 0 dB line rate maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum attenuation cable attenuation cable length attenuation at 150 kHz at 150 kHz at 150 kHz kbit s dB dB dB Note 10u V V H2 is the noise level according to the ETSI Technical Specifications TS 101 135 5uV V Hz is a 6 dB lower noise level For planning the HDSL transmission network following should be considered By using the attenuation values in the 10uV V Hz noise level column an undisturbed and reliable operation can be obtained on most connections The attenuation values in the no noise column shall be considered as theoretica
267. m the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Cables Prior to Replacement 1 0a Bal Ns SOs US Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Ericsson Radio Systems AB 425 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Replacing the cables DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal Display cable DC Data cable AC power cable P003741A Figure 381 Overview of the cables 1 Remove the outer protective cover in the installation box by unscrewing the five torx screws 2 Disconnect the internal AC cable the DC Data cable and the Display cable Connect the new cables 4 Remount the protective cover Set to operation Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode SaaS SY eS Close the installation b
268. maps and the RU map SO CF internal fault map class 1A Fault Fault type Remark No 0 Reset failed restart attempt Reset power on Reset switch Reset watchdog Reset SW fault Reset RAM fault Reset internal function change X bus fault Timing unit VCO fault Timing bus fault Indoor temperature out of safe range OMANANINUN FP WN N DC voltage out of range U Ericsson Radio Systems AB 293 488 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling 294 488 Fault No 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 47 Fault type Local bus fault RBS database corrupted RU database corrupted HW and IDB inconsistent Internal configuration failed Indoor temperature above safe range Indoor temperature below safe range SO CF internal fault map class 1B Not used SO CF internal fault map class 2A Fault No O oo NDARA UNa CO e Re AA U N Nn 16 17 18 19 20 21 Fault type Reset failed restart attempt Reset power on Reset switch Reset watchdog Reset SW fault Reset RAM fault Reset internal function change RXDA amplifier current fault VSWR limits exceeded Power limits exceeded DXU optional EEPROM checksum fault ALNA fault RX maxgain mingain violated Timing unit VCO ageing CDU supervision communication lost VSWR Output power supervision lost Indoor temperature out of normal conditional range Indoor humidity DC voltage out of range
269. may be mounted on a vertical or a horizontal pole by using different holes LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 145 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 146 488 04_0331B Figure 146 Choosing the appropriate holes A Holes to be used for vertical pole B Holes to be used for horizontal pole 1 Choose the appropriate holes horizontal vertical Recess 06_0331B Figure 147 Fastening the clamps and mounting the washers Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003561A Figure 148 Mounting the washers 2 Make sure that the washers are mounted correctly see Figure 148 on page 147 Fasten the two clamps with the screws and washers Ensure that the recess is attached at the correct place P003151A Figure 149 Placing the mounting plate correctly 4 Place the mounting base at the correct height on the pole and mount the clamp halves Make sure that the washers are mounted correctly see Figure 148 on page 147 Mount the screws and tighten them alternately right and left side in order to avoid bending the screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB 147 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 6 148 488 Moun
270. mp 7 FORCE Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT Expected result EXECUTED Ericsson Radio Systems AB 267 488 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected result Repeat for all TRX s RXBLI MO RXORX x y FORCE RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL BLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED RXESE MO RXORKX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT OUT OF SERVICE RESULT EXECUTED 4 Configure diversity parameter to RXD A for all RX s in the TG Command Expected result Repeat for all TRX s RXMOC MO RXORX x y RXD A EXECUTED 5 Bring all RX s in the TG into service and deblock the RX s and the TS s Command Printout Expected result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected result Repeat for all TRX s Command Printout Expected result Repeat for all TRX s RXESI MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT LOADED RXBLE MO RXORX x y RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED RXBLE MO RXOTS x y 0 amp amp 7 RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANUAL DEBLOCKING OF MANAGED OBJECT RESULT EXECUTED 6 Check that the cell is configured with logical channels Comman
271. ms AB 313 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance suspected unit and site history An error log will also be included if the fault is defined as logical CAUTION A Read through the chapter Safety to ensure knowledge of potential risks prior to beginning work on the RBS equipment The work order should be analyzed before personnel are sent to the site This is done in order to Select the spare parts and tools required at the RBS site Inform the OMC operator if the site visit will reduce RBS functionality Fault localization 2 The section Fault Localisation provides mapping from fault information to a faulty unit Corrective action 3 The section Corrective Action describes how to replace a faulty unit Test after corrective action 4 The subsection Test after corrective action describes how to verify that the functionality of the radio cabinet is correct with the help of chapter Site Installation Tests Test result 5 If the test has failed it will be necessary to perform a fault analysis Otherwise continue with Concluding routines 6 Concluding routines 6 The section Concluding Routines provides information on the different administrative routines that must be performed before leaving the site Fault analysis 7 Use the OMT to read fault status and translate the information received according to the Fault Code List If the fault analysis fails to give more fault
272. ms AB 33 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P003579A Figure 12 34 99 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 9 Replaceable Boards for PBC Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 NTZ 111 45 03 Spare Parts Set EMC In Board Incl screws and spacer 2 NTZ 111 45 04 Spare Parts Set DC Surge Board Incl screws 3 NTZ 111 45 05 Spare Parts Set AC Surge Board Incl screws LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 35 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable P003576A Figure 13 36 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 4 10 Fuses Screws and Installation Details for PBC Pos Product No Product Name Description 1 NTZ 112 86 FU01 Spare Parts Set Fuses for 230 V 4A size 5x20 mm slow blow 20 pcs 2 NTZ 112 86 FU02 Spare Parts Set Fuses for 115 V 8A size 6 3 x32 mm slow blow 20 pcs 3 NTZ 111 45 06 Spare Parts Set Set of screws for PBC ncludes some of the most common screws washers and fixing details 4 NTZ 111 45 01 Spare Parts Set Set for PBC Interface box ncludes terminal blocks cable glands and O rings gland plate with screws and s
273. mulator This test is to be performed when no PCM line from the BSC is available CAUTION Radio frequency RF radiation from antenna systems can endanger your health The purpose of this test is to ensure that it is possible to make calls on the base station The test is passed when a call has been made on all the TRXs The equipment used is BSCSim II a mobile station MS and a multicasting box MCB For more information regarding the BSCSim II refer to aE BSCSim II User s Guide EN LZT 123 2771 1 For tests involving the HDSL modem also the MartisDXX HTU 2M product number ZAT 759 20 101 is needed This instrument will throughout the instructions be referred to as HTU Note The HTU is not needed for tests on PCM upstream HDSL downstream configuration The HTU is used as an converter between the PCM signal and the HDSL signal 9 2 1 Test Parameters Before performing any test the appropriate parameters must be considered when configuring the BSCSim II The following parameters should be considered System type Network frequency RBS type Transmission type BTS Software Positioning of TRXs Cell LAC Diversity 242 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Optional Tests ARFCN Power 9 2 2 Cables Throughout the instructions the cables will be referred to as follows Cl OMT cable C2 MS cable C3 Transmision cab
274. n 2 Is the battery compartement free from discolouration and not deformed 3 Are the batteries still within its replacement date 4 Are the batteries leaking acid Signature Corrective actions 1 Clean the batteries and battery box with a mild detergent and a soft brush Remove oxidation and corrosion 2 Ifthe batteries are deformed or discoloured exchange the batteries If the battery poles are damaged exchange the batteries 4 Exchange the batteries if the Use before date has passed EMC Board To exchange the PBC EMC board see Section 12 6 6 on page 437 DC Surge Board To exchange the PBC DC Surge board see Section 12 6 7 on page 440 AC Board To exchange the PBC AC board see Section 12 6 8 on page 443 Concluding Routines The following checklist is not mandatory but strongly recommended Local procedures and safety regulations must be evaluated and incorporated into this checklist If the answer to any of the items is NO do not leave the site until the problem fault has been cleared or investigated Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 9 1 12 9 2 12 9 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Table 74 Checklist Checklist 1 Red fault indicator off 2 Operational indicator green LED lit La i 3 RBS in remote mode Yellow local mode on DP is off a eae a a a a i a a 4 Other yellow indicators OFF 5 Ext
275. n Radio Systems AB 459 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Product Data 460 488 275 215 Measurement in mm P003642A Figure 421 Mounting plate and equipment contour Figure 421 on page 460 shows the dimensions of the equipment in relation to the mounting plate This is to determine a suitable alignment with several units or existing equipment 700 mm 02_0330C Figure 422 RBS 2302 space requirements The maximum distance between two RBS 2302 in a 4 TRX and 6 TRX configuration is limited by the length of the TXL bus cable The maximum length of the TXL bus cable is 5 m Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 13 1 8 13 1 9 13 1 10 13 1 11 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Product Data Climatic Endurance Table 76 Climatic endurance Environmental parameter Normal condition Non destructive Temperature 33 45 40 70 Relative humidity 15 100 15 100 Solar radiation 1120 1120 Normal condition denotes the environmental conditions where all units will function as specified Non destructive range denotes environmental stress above the limits for normal operation during which no function is guaranteed and performance may degrade in an unspecified manner When the environmental stress is over and the environment has returned to normal conditions no manual intervention on the site is required to restore full
276. n page 189 7 Repeat step 1 for all antenna feeders at the base station 7 9 1 Examples of Feeder Attenuation calculations The cable data in the examples below refer to Table 16 on page 188 Example for 900 MHz Passive Antenna System Feeder type LDF 7 8 Length 63 m attenuation per m 0 038 dB Actual attenuation 63 x 0 038 2 4 dB Antenna jumper type LDF 1 2 Length 2 m attenuation per m 0 068 dB Actual attenuation 2 x 0 068 0 14 dB RBS jumper type LDF 1 2 Length 2 m Attenuation per m 0 68 dB Actual attenuation 2 x 0 68 0 14 dB Total attenuation 2 4 0 14 0 14 2 7 dB 188 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests 7 10 Test Record Test Record for Antenna System Tests Test instrument Serial Number Anritsu Site Master S Test Results Cel E Installation check Visual check Antenna direction Degrees SWR Test lt 1 4 SWR or gt 15 6 dB RL SWR Return loss DTF Test DTF Test lt 1 05 SWR P F X2 equals the path from the X2 connector on the RBS to the antenna including jumper and feeder X3 equals the path from the X3 connector on the RBS to the antenna including jumper and feeder Cable marking Signatures Responsible for the record Customer acceptance Remarks P006028C Figure 203 An example of a test record LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radi
277. n sketch included showing the mounting plate and position of the mounted equipment Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 1 4 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction Site Installation Tests New chapter Handover Test 4 TRX and 6 TRX configurations Optional HDSL modem Maintenance Manual New chapter HDSL Modem New chapter Fan Unit General Information Fault Code List updated Spare Parts Catalogue Optional Fan Unit Optional HDSL modem R3A to R4A In this release of RBS 2302 User s Guide the binder has been given consecutive page numbers Also a major structural change has been done These changes and other information of major importance that has been added are listed below Introduction Section Mobile Telephony Overview has been updated and moved here from chapter Site Planning and Product Data new name for this chapter in R4A see below Section Radio Site Implementation Process has been added Tools and Instruments The chapter Tools and Instruments has been updated Site Planning and Requirements The chapter formerly called Site Planning and Product Datahas been divided into two separate chapters Site Planning and Requirements and Product Data Site Planning and Requirements now only contains information about site specific requirements Installation of RBS 2302 Parts of the subsection HDSL Transmi
278. nd later R7 R6 and later R6 and later R6 and later Micro RBS only Micro RBS only R7 R7 only 295 488 Fault Handling 296 488 SO CF external condition map class 2 Fault No 15 Fault type RBS door RBS cabinet door open SO CF replacement unit map CONAN KRWNH oZ N NY NY NNN WN WN e RR RR RR eR YAN ONFPWNrR TO WAN DN FW WN Replaceable unit Remark DXU ECU Micro RBS CDU BFU PSU CDU_Cos BDM ACCU Active cooler ALNA A ALNA B Battery Fan Heater Heat exchanger external fan Heat exchanger internal fan Humidity sensor Temperature sensor CDU HLOUT HLIN cable CDU RX in cable CU DU FU FU CU PFWD cable Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Fault Handling No 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 47 Replaceable unit Remark FU CU PREFL cable CAB HLIN cable CDU bus Environment Local bus Power communication loop RBS DB R7 Timing bus X bus Antenna SO TRXC internal fault map class 1A Fault No CAN DUN FwWN KF OO a N e e e e ee ee e ea O OMANI HN RA UMN Fault type Remark Reset failed restart attempt Reset power on Reset switch Reset watchdog Reset SW fault Reset RAM fault Reset internal function change Timing reception fault Signal processing fault Tora Dannie communication fault DSP CPU communication fault
279. nd the aim is to ensure the proper function of the overvoltage protectors General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 RBS 2302 Overview Base Station RBS 2302 RBS 2302 is a member of the RBS 2000 family of base stations It is a small Micro base station that can be placed in both outdoor and indoor environment The base station contains one or two low power transceivers and can be equipped with integrated antennas Integrated sector or omnidirectional antennas are available for that purpose The purpose of the RBS as a stand alone product is to supply hot spot capacity in small areas Versions are available for the 900 1800 and 1900 MHz bands TRX TX1 lt RXA lt RXB TX1 Filter unit RXA Duplex lt 4 RXB TRX lt 4 RXA TX2 TX2 05_0330A Figure 15 Block diagram of RBS 2302 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 59 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements 4 9 2 60 488 Power and Battery Cabinet PBC Alarms to RBS Alarm module Mains input Alarms from PBC 2 Alarms from AAU CEU 48V to AAU CEU 48V to radio link 24V to RBS 1 24V not used P003105C Figure 16 Block diagram of Power and Battery Cabinet The Power and Battery Cabinet is an optional battery back up for RBS 2302 The PBC can supply RBS 2302 with extended DC back up PBC is also used in Maxite configuraions as a power supply and supervision unit Ericsson R
280. nel The following qualifications are minimum requirements Good understanding of radio and telephone engineering Good understanding of engineering English 6 2 Preconditions Ensure that the following conditions are met Site access permission received Ordered PBC equipment specified tools and other necessary facilities have been delivered Electrical ducting is ready and AC mains power is available Earth Point is available During bad weather conditions it may be necessary to protect the cabinet during installation e When the cabinet is mounted outdoors it must not be left without power for more than 48 hours This requirement is caused by the risk of humidity damages Always use an approved antistatic bracelet to avoid damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 139 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 140 488 P003649B Figure 138 Connecting the ESD wrist strap Preconditions for wall mounted PBC Make sure that the selected bolt is suitable for the type of wall material that the cabinet is to be mounted on e Make sure that the wall surface is even Preconditions for pole mounted PBC The pole must have the required dimension 60 114 mm in diameter Documents Ensure that the following documents are a
281. ng 193 26 IPA The base station has no space for connection of thick antenna cables It is recommended to use a short 6 mm diameter jumper cable to join the base station with external antenna systems Recommended jumper length is about 1 m longer cables will add too much attenuation especially at 1800 1900 MHz For a suitable jumper cable see Ordering Information for RA RBS 2000 Installation Material R N female or TNC male 7 16 female 1000 mm P003323A Figure 424 Jumper Cable RPM 119 87 1 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 465 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Product Data 13 2 Power and Battery Cabinet optional PEPTIC Lp o nou ou tt al How th toe We Hod dh dhe The Th ou ow oun I I oi sfl II Heol il I oil I Il Hou N ll ll oi il ll PBC Pole Mounted PBC Wall Mounted P003170A Figure 425 Power and Battery Cabinet The PBC contains power supply for the active antenna back up batteries DC DC converter for back up operation of RBS 2302 in case of power failure and alarm and control circuits for the active antenna The PBC consists of the following main units Mounting base Cabinet Batteries 4 pcs Sunshields 466 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 13 2 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 1
282. ng Current Analog to Digital converter Abis Gateway Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Line Build Out Antenna Lightning Protection Unit Application Object Antenna Related Auxiliary Equipment Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number Antenna Reference Point Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC in the TRU Antenna Unit GSM 900 CEU Passive Antenna GSM 1800 1900 AAU Broadcast Control CHannel Ericsson Radio Systems AB 477 488 All Rights Reserved Glossary 478 488 BCS BER BSC BSCSim BSS BTS Burst Cabinet CAN Cascade connections Cascading CCCH CDU Cell Ericsson Radio Systems AB Downlink only broadcast channel for broadcast of general information at a base station on a base station basis Block Check Sequence Bit Error Rate Base Station Controller GSM network node for control of one or more BTSs Base Station Controller Simulator Base Station System GSM network logical unit comprising one BSC and one or more BTSs Base Transceiver Station GSM network unit operating on a set of radio frequency channels in one cell A portion of digital information the physical content that is transferred within the time interval of one time slot The physical housing of a base station Canada Connection of several cabinets by the PCM cable Similar to serial connection gt Cascading Connection of several cabinets by the PCM cable Similar
283. ng protection Connect external cables Mount the cabinet Connect internal cables Mount the antenna e Mount the sunshields Unpacking CAUTION A TAN Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity In order to avoid damages to components due to electrostatic discharges during unpacking make sure not to come in contact with the connectors on the cabinet Ericsson Radio Systems AB 67 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 Cabinet Plugs and aN Internal AC cable fixe cable Internal transmission cable Upper sunshield D gt Left sunshield Front sunshield P004228B Figure 22 68 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Unpacking the cabinet sunshields and cables and the mounting base LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 Sector antenna Front sunshield Sector antenna 4 TRX cable Multicasting box it Jumper cables SB amp TD OMT Extended cable Installation box Installation box door door HDSL Omnidirectional antenna PCM 75 ohm E ee ae ae eee ee er P004233A Figure 23 Unpacking the optionals Unpack and ensure that the correct material has been delivered If the material
284. nnect the battery jumper cable on the plus pole of battery 4 P003686A Figure 389 Disconnecting the plus pole of battery 3 9 Disconnect the battery jumper cable on the plus pole of battery 3 and remove battery 4 P003706A Figure 390 Disconnecting the minus pole of battery 3 10 Disconnect the minus pole of battery 3 and remove the battery LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 431 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003481A Figure 391 Removing the ventilation hoses 11 Remove the ventilation hoses from battery 1 and 2 P003645A Figure 392 Disconnecting the minus pole on battery 1 12 Disconnect the battery jumper cable on the minus pole of battery 1 and remove battery 2 432 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003708A Figure 393 Disconnecting the plus pole of battery 1 13 Disconnect the plus pole of battery 1 and remove the battery P003172A Figure 394 Loosening the cabinet 14 Close the battery cabinet door and tighten one screw in each corner 15 Loosen the two screws holding the cabinet Note Sometimes the two locking parts are jammed together causing the screw to move downwa
285. nnected simulator to make a test call e Make sure that the RBS is in remote mode e Reset the CPU CPU Reset button The OMT will not define alarm e Disconnect the OMT inlets Memory Corrupted Use the OMT e For faults Non Volatile Memory Corrupted and RBS Database Corrupted Inconsistent reset by installing a new IDB e If this fault arises during Function change or Program Load wait until the Function change or Program Load is completed e If the RBS does not recover automatically check the files and repeat the Function change or Program Load Wrong IDB e install the correct IDB using the OMT PCM fails when installing BTS e Check that the PCM cables are correctly SW with simulator connected The TX cable has voltage e Shift the PCM cables Battery fault e Battery disconnected or faulty e Low battery DC voltage PSA fault e If the RBS indicates Battery Fault but the PBC shows no alarms replace the PSA The PBC cannot start up e Make sure that all cables are correctly connected and the fuses are not defective LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 289 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling 11 2 11 2 1 290 488 Fault Code List This chapter describes faults reported to the BSC and HW units suspected of causing the fault Where applicable the fault code lists indicate faults with restricted validity for product release R6 and later in CME 20 and also for
286. ntity In installation engineering the whole site is considered to be a product The site is given a product number from the ABC class IPA Plants Example IPA 110 1001 Site Documentation The build up of the site is recorded with a number of site documents The following is a list of suitable decimal classes for the site documents Decimal class Approved document name Explanation 127 11 Plant specification 127 04 Configurationdata Site data 193 38 Cell design data Cell parameters 153 12 Antenna placement information Antenna and tower arrangement 153 38 Situating plan Site layout 193 05 Floor plan drawing 193 18 Cable distribution diagram 193 20 Cabling information Power supply 193 24 Cable way drawing 179 61 Certificate of conformance 152 83 Test report A document showing the physical layout of the previous site a situating plan will be numbered as shown in the example below Example 153 38 IPA 110 1001 A base station with integrated antennas will of course not need all the mentioned documentation whereas a base station with a distributed antenna system might need a more detailed documentation Installation Planning Overview The figure below is an overview of the Installation Planning process Ericsson Radio Systems AB 51 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements Cabinet material listing Site investigation D a Installation 1 Confirmed system engineering i
287. o OFF position 7 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Ericsson Radio Systems AB 383 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 384 488 Replacing the PSA P003664A Figure 324 Replacing the PSA 1 Open the internal RBS battery compartment door by unscrewing the torx screw located on the cover Remove the faulty PSA Separate the cover from the PSA on both the faulty and new units by loosening the torx screw that hold the wire and disconnect the cables Mount the old cover on the new PSA and connect the cable Mount the wire between the cover and the new PSA with the torx screw Insert the new PSA into the battery compartment Tighten the torx screw and make sure there is no gap between the cover and the radio cabinet Set to operation 1 2 3 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 5 12 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 5 Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 7 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform a battery backup test see chapter RBS Site Integration 2 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Fu
288. o Systems AB 189 488 All Rights Reserved Antenna System Tests 7 10 1 190 488 Test Record Supplement The following illustration shows an example of a printout from the Site Master Software Tools This can be added as a supplement to the test protocol M1 1 008 VSWR 2 326 Meters Distance To Fault 0 0 50 0 Meters cal on 6 0dBm Rectangular Windowing 1 20 Antenna VSWR VSWR 1 05 0 5 10 15 20 25 Meters 30 P004921A Figure 204 An example of a display showing DTF measurement Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests 8 Site Installation Tests 8 1 Preface The radio cabinet has already been tested in the factory This chapter describes the tests that must be performed to verify the installation of the radio cabinet 8 1 1 About These Tests The tests in this chapter are described in the order in which they are to be performed When the exit criteria are fulfilled the tester should return to the flowchart for the next step in the process During the tests a test record should be filled in with the results see Section 8 22 Test Record on page 237 8 1 2 Testing Procedure The flowchart in Figure 216 on page 207 describes the recommended work order when testing a RBS 2302 cabinet The work order can be altered or tests can be removed due to local ci
289. o be defined on the remaining inlets e If HDSL modem and or Fan unit is not used Continue with step 3 e If HDSL modem and or Fan unit is used Define Fan unit and HDSL modem alarms according to Table 25 on page 214 Table 26 on page 215 Table 27 on page 215 and Table 28 on page 215 The use of external alarms for HDSL path supervision is optional and defined by the switch setting on the HDSL modem 3 Define site specific alarm Table 24 PBC alarm Alarm Inlet Info Type RBS 1 0 8 Breaking RBS 2 1 8 Breaking RBS 3 2 8 Breaking 1 Recommended order 2 To be selected ID Severity Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Comment PBC POWER WARNING PBC POWER WARNING PBC POWER WARNING Define External Alarm Fan Unit for R6 and R7 If a fan unit is used the fan alarm can be defined according to Table 25 on page 214 R6 and Table 26 on page 215 R7 Table 25 Fan alarm for R6 Alarm Inlet Info Type 2 Breaking ID Level 2 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Severity Comment FAN UNIT LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 8 11 7 8 12 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 ID Site Installation Tests Alarm Inlet Info Severity Level 2 Comment FAN UNIT 0 2 Breaking 1 2 Breaking Table 26 Fan alarm for R7 Type RBS 1 RBS 2 RBS 3 Level 2 Level 2 FAN UNIT FAN UNIT 2 2 Breaking Define External Alarm HDSL for R6 and R7 If a HDSL modem is used t
290. ock in the base station Optional equipment will occupy the following number of circuits PBC 1 alarm circuit HDSL 2 alarm circuits Fan Unit 1 alarm circuit Connections are made on terminals that will accept wires having an area from 0 5 2 5 mm The cable gland has capacity for one cable with an outer sheath diameter of 5 9 mm Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Product Data The alarm detector connected to the terminals should be isolated relay contacts A closed contact logic zero is required to be below 25 KQ and open contact logic one is required to be above 125 kQ The current through a closed 0 ohm relay contact is between 0 05 and 0 07 mA during measurements and less than 0 10 mA at all times The no load voltage between terminals is 18 to 24 V The external alarm inputs have overvoltage protection which limits the voltage to 100 V relative to ground 13 1 16 Antenna Connections Internal and external antennas are connected to connectors behind the sunshield on the base station The connectors are marked X2 and X3 Table 80 Antenna connectors Connector Duplex 1 2 TRX TXIIRXA TOR The antenna connectors are of the TNC female type according to IEC 169 8 When external antennas are used a separate document shall be created for the site and included in the Site Installation Documentation This document is numbered as an allocation drawi
291. oks Make sure that the cabinet is properly mounted by veri the mounting screws in the installation box correspond holes in the cabinet fying that to the P003482A Figure 173 Securing the cabinet X Secure the locking cleat under behind the cabinet by turning the torx screws clockwise until they stop Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 6 12 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 Ifthe lifting handle has been used remove it P003173A Figure 174 Fastening the installation box 7 Turn each of the 6 torx screws until they engage threads When all 6 screws have engaged their threads tighten them Connecting Internal Cables P003174A Figure 175 1 Position of the AC power and battery switches Make sure that the AC power and battery switches are in the OFF position Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 163 488 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 13 164 488 DC Data cable connectors Display cable connector AC power cable connector P007594A Figure 176 Connecting internal cables 2 Plug the four connectors for the AC power cable display cable and DC Data cable in to the cabinet 3 Remount the protection cove
292. oltage selector on the new Fan Unit is set to the right voltage and that the fuses are mounted 10 Mount the new Fan Unit and tighten the two screws 11 Insert the cables through the control box according to the Figure 291 on page 355 and tighten the two screws 12 Plug in the fast connection plinths for the alarm cable x2 and the AC cable x3 and reconnect the protective earth cable Set to operation 1 Set the AC switch for the Fan Unit in ON position If there is no separate AC switch for the Fan Unit continue with the steps below Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode NW FY N Test after corrective action 1 Press the button located to the left part of the AC plinth in the control box and make sure that all three fans are running 2 Mount the cover on the Fan Unit control box and tighten the two screws 3 Mount the cover on the Fan Unit and tighten it with the one screw on each side 356 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 5 3 Sunshields Upper sunshield SS Left sunshield Front sunshield P003147A Figure 294 Sunshields overvi
293. om stand alone mode Clear Historical Temperature Alarms There are two kinds of temperature alarms active and historical Alarm code 0 0 8 on the display indicates PBC Alarm Overtemperature historical To reset the historical alarm 1 Press Menu 2 Select code 5 on display element D3 with the Up or Down button 3 Press Enter The command is executed Setting the PBC in Stand Alone Mode Note Always set the PBC in Stand Alone mode when active antenna is not used 1 Press Menu 2 Select code 6 on display element D3 with the Up or Down button 3 Press Enter The command is executed 12 3 9 Shut down Sequence This is the shut down sequence for RBS 2302 Parts of the sequence are also applicable to the PBC 1 Set the RBS to Local Mode LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 331 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 332 488 BE switch AC power Battery switch P003146A Figure 276 Battery and AC power switch in the RBS DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal Note When the AC power supply is turned off with the AC power switch in the RBS there is still AC voltage both on the AC board in the interface box and on the connection board in the installation box up to the power switch 2 Swi
294. on cabinets or faults are detected in one or both extension cabinets Check the TXL cable and extension cabinets If the yellow LED is lit the radio cabinet is faulty Replace it OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Table 60 AC Power ON LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance If the yellow LED is not lit 115 230 V is not present in the radio cabinet mains p switch g oP i 7 Za AC power switch Battery switch P003943A Confirm that the main switch is in the ON position and that the AC switch on the RBS is set to ON position P003944B Switch off the Mains switch and the AC switch on the RBS Measure the resistance of the fuses with a multimeter to verify that they are undamaged The resistance should be 0 92 Then switch the power back on P003945A Measure with a voltage meter that 115 230 V is present at the incoming AC plinth on the AC board in the interface box Ericsson Radio Systems AB 339 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003946A Measure that 115 230 V is present at the upper AC plinth on the AC board to verify that the AC board is not faulty P003947A Measure that 115 230 V is present at the incoming AC plinth on the connection board to verify that the cables are not faulty
295. on the mounting base 2 Facilitate the mounting of the cabinet by aiming for the left side of the cabinet Start by holding the cabinet a few centimeters above the mounting base Make sure that the hooks are according to Figure 85 on page 106 3 Hook on the cabinet by pushing it against the mounting base and lower the cabinet on to the hooks 4 Make sure that the cabinet is properly mounted by verifying that the mounting screws in the installation box correspond to the holes in the cabinet ii N W lt 7 6 oo Ela eT Sem H Y Secure P003529A Figure 8 amp 6 Securing the cabinet LZN 302 74 R6B 106 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved 5 13 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 If the lifting handle has been used remove it Secure the locking cleat under behind the cabinet by turning the torx screws clockwise until they stop If the lifting device has been used remove it Also remove the tube bracket and the lifting handle P003083A Figure 87 Fastening the installation box 7 Tn the installation box turn each of the 6 torx screws until they engage the threads When all have engaged their threads tighten them Connecting Internal Cables EA Battery switch 2 AC power switch
296. onal 3 Mount the lifting device if it is to be used on the left side of the mounting plate Note For information regarding the use of the lifting device see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 378 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003448A Figure 4 317 Outer protective cover Unsnap the outer protective cover in the installation box and remove it Internal AC cable Internal Transmission P003457A Figure 5 Note 318 Internal cables Disconnect the internal AC cable the internal transmission cable and the TXL cable The internal transmission cable is secured with slide latches The TXL cable is secured on one end with slide latches and on the other with locking screws Open the latches and the locking screws before removing the cables Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 379 488 Maintenance 6 Remove the inner protective cover 21_0334C Figure 319 Disconnecting the Antenna cables Note Make sure that all cables are properly labelled before disconnecting them 7 If an external antenna is used disconnect the antenna cables from the radio cabinet If
297. onfiguration the BSS R7 or later is needed 4 TRX Configuration For 1x4 configuration that is one cell with two RBSs Under Cabinet Setup click New and define the first RBS Click New again to define the second RBS Under Antenna Sector Setup click New only once and define the cell sector For 2x2 configuration that is two cells with one RBS in each cell Under Cabinet Setup click New and define the first RBS Click New again to define the second RBS Under Antenna Sector Setup click New and define the first cell sector Click New again and define the second cell sector 6 TRX Configuration For 1x6 configuration that is one cell with three RBSs Under Cabinet Setup click New and define the first RBS Click New again two times and define the second and the third RBS Under Antenna Sector Setup click New only once and define the cell sector Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 11 4 8 11 5 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests For 2x3 configuration that is three cells with one RBS in each cell Under Cabinet Setup click New and define the first RBS Click New again two times and define the second and the third RBS Under Antenna Sector Setup click New and define the first cell sector Click New again two times and define the second and the third cell sector Note When using the SW Power Boost TX diversity the OMT will
298. oor Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Transmission Board Prior to replacement 1 Open the installation box door 2 Set the RBS to Local Mode 3 Switch the RBS battery switch to the OFF position 4 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 7 on page 393 5 Switch the PBC battery switch to OFF position 6 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 7 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Ericsson Radio Systems AB 393 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 394 488 Replacing the transmission board DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal CAUTION A Atad Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity P003729A Figure 336 Loosening the interface box 1 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003738A Figure 337 Loosening the interface box cover 2 Open the cover of the interface box by loosening the 8 torx screws im a J c a P003465A
299. orld Wide Telecom 27 April 1995 Issued by Phone no Jane Doe 07 19 555 1212 Address Memo id 501 Montgomery JDOEQWWT OHIOLUS Telefax no 07 419 555 1212 Heading IRXC TRU is reporting wrong fault code Product number or Document number R state KRC 13147 07 RIA Site name Site id Site status Hillfield Ohio EGA 043 Operation Trouble symptoms TRC is reporting a fault code after CPU reset Trouble Desciption E eg T Internal Fault Class 1A fault no 33 This fault code cannot be found in the fault liat Comments The TRY fault indicator is not lit 03_0179A Figure 257 Example of filled in trouble report 306 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Fault Handling Trouble Report Blank Trouble Report Company Date Issued by Phone no Address Memo id Telefax no Heading Product number or Document number Site name Site id Site status Trouble symptoms Trouble Desciption Comments 02_0179A Figure 258 Trouble report blank LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 307 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Fault Handling This page is intentionally left blank 308 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 12 1 12 1 1 L
300. orm the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 351 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 5 2 Fan Unit Optional DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal Prior to Replacement WARNING Radio frequency radiation The radio frequency radiation from the antenna system might endanger your health Switch off the transmitter when working with antennas or near them 1 Set the AC switch for the Fan Unit in OFF position If there is no separate AC switch for the Fan Unit continue with the steps below to take the RBS out of service 2 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the RBS installation box door Set the RBS to local mode Turn off the battery switch on the RBS Turn off the AC switch on the RBS Nn e If a PBC is used continue with the steps below 7 Turn off the battery switch on the PBC 8 Turn off the AC switch on the PBC 352 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Replacing the Fan Unit P004438A Figure 287 Removing the cover 1 Remove the Fan Unit cover by unscrewing the screws on each side P004395A Figure 288 Opening t
301. ot rest with a Swedish Ericsson company Reference document 1120 101 in Standard binder ST1B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 49 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements 123 ABCDE 123 4567 12345 R1A Product prefix Class designation 5 Notation of origin Type number Sequence number Suffix R status 01_0067B Figure 11 The complete product identity Documents are numbered using the decimal classification system A document number consists of a decimal class and the product number of the described product The decimal class consists of four or five digits that classify the information by activity and subject areas A decimal class is defined in a decimal class information document that describes which kind of document the decimal class is used for how the information is used and which document names are permitted These documents are numbered 0011 XXXX Uen XXXX stands for the decimal class which is of interest Decimal class information documents are filed in the central archives of the company 12 123 45 123 ABCDE 123 4567 12 Uen A H Document prefix Decimal class Product number Language notation Revision status 02_0067B Figure 12 The complete document identity 50 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements Site Ide
302. ox door 426 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 6 4 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Battery Cabinet Prior to Replacement 1 SO SOS I OY Re tS gt Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the RBS installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Open the PBC installation box door Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Remove the sunshields front lower left and upper Replacing the Battery cabinet A lifting device can be used when replacing the cabinet see chapter Product Data Note 1 The lifting device is not dimensioned for the PBC assembled with batteries Unscrew the Protective Earth from the installation box door Remove the protective cover in the PBC installation box by unscrewing the two torx screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB 427 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 428 488 Display cable DC Data cable AC power cable P003741A Figure 382 Overview of the cables 3 Loosen the DC Data cables from the cabinet Display cable
303. ox door To open the door loosen the screws and unlock with the key 326 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 3 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003174A Figure 273 Location of the control panel in the PBC Control Panel OPERATIONAL FAULT P003220A Figure 274 PBC control panel Optical Indicators The LED indicators give the following information on the current system status valid for the PBC alarms Table 55 Explanation of the LED indicators Operational Green Fault Red Classification ON OFF OK OFF ON SEVERE ON ON WARNING POWER Ericsson Radio Systems AB 327 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Alarm Display The alarms are shown as fault codes on the display The display is divided into three display elements Element 1 D1 Element 2 D2 Element 3 D3 Control Buttons Unit number The unit number is used to identify the faulty unit 0 PBC Unit numbers 1 9 are not used for RBS 2302 Alarm class The alarm is classified according to the degree of severity There are two Classified alarms and one Not classified 0 Not classified used for historical alarms 1 Severe 2 Warning Fault code from the PBC See Table 56 on page 330 or Command that will be executed See Table 57 on page 331 The control buttons on the display panel are used
304. p amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTG 1 COMB HYB RSITE SITE2 SWVER swver RXMOI MO RXOCF 1 TEI 62 RXMOI MO RXOIS 1 RXMOI MO RXOTFE 1 TFMODE SA RXMOI MO RXOTRX 1 0 TEI 0 DCP1 128 DCP2 129 amp 130 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 1 1 TEI 1 DCP1 131 DCP2 132 amp 133 RXMOI MO RXOTX 1 0 amp 1 BAND GSM MPWR 40 RXMOI MO RXORX 1 0 amp 1 BAND GSM RXD AB RXMOI MO RXOTS 1 0 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTS 1 1 0 amp amp 7 RXMOI MO RXOTG 2 COMB H YB RSITE SITE3 SWVER swver RXMOI MO RXOCF 2 TEI 62 RXMOI MO RXOIS 2 RXMOI MO RXOTF 2 TFMODESSA RXMOI MO RXOTRX 2 0 TEI 0 DCP1 128 DCP2 129 amp 130 RXMOI MO RXOTRX 2 1 TEI 1 DCP1 131 DCP2 132 amp 133 RXMOI MO RXOTX 2 0 amp 1 BAND GSM MPWR 40 RXMOI MO RXORX 2 0 amp 1 BAND GSM RXD AB RXMOI MO RXOTS 2 0 0 amp amp 7 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 279 488 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration Command RXMOI MO RXOTS 2 1 0 amp amp 7 Definition of Abis paths Command RXAPI MO RXOTG 0 DEV RBLT 1 amp amp 6 DCP 1 amp amp 6 Command RXAPI MO RXOTG 1 DEV RBLT 7 amp amp 12 DCP 1 amp amp 6 Command RXAPI MO RXOTG 2 DEV RBLT 13 amp amp 18 DCP 1 amp amp 6 Note Definition of Managed Objects DP and CON These two MO s are optional and described inSection 10 10 5 on page 283 and Section 10 10 6 on page 283 Note In this case the Transport Modules TM must be loaded with the correct data This should be done by the BTS
305. page 235 8 Check on the Master RBS RBS 1 that the fault indicator AC Power On is not flashing Flashing indicator means faulty battery for RBS 2 PBC 2 Alarm code 020 is displayed on PBC 2 9 Switch on the incoming AC for RBS 2 and PBC 2 and check on RBS 1 and RBS 2 that the indicator AC Power On lights up yellow The PBC 2 alarm 020 disappears Table 40 Switch settings during test of RBS 2 PBC 2 6 TRX configuration If 6 TRX configuration is used continue with step 10 below RBS 3 PBC 3 10 Switch off the incoming AC for RBS 3 and PBC 3 Power switch settings according to Table 41 on page 236 11 Check on the Master RBS RBS 1 that the fault indicator AC Power On is not flashing Flashing indicator means faulty battery for RBS 3 PBC 3 Alarm code 020 is displayed on PBC 3 12 Switch on the incoming AC for RBS 3 and PBC 3 and check on RBS 1 and RBS 3 that the indicator AC Power On lights up yellow The PBC 3 alarm 020 disappears Ericsson Radio Systems AB 235 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests Table 41 Switch settings during test of RBS 3 PBC 3 6 TRX configuration 8 21 Concluding Routines RBS with Internal Battery Backup 1 Save the IDB on a diskette The name of the IDB file must be site specific Label the diskette according to Table 42 on page 237 2 Disconnect all test equipment 3 Check that all cables are connected 4 Make sure that no RBS faul
306. parts in this chapter have the internal code R These parts are recommended for Customer stock They are intended to be replaced on site and disposed of after use LZN 302 97 R3C Ericsson Radio Systems AB 17 59 2000 11 20 All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable 01_0395A Figure 4 18 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Pos 4 1 4 1 1 Product No KRE 101 1556 KRE 101 1557 KRE 101 1558 KRE 101 1559 KRE 101 1560 KRE 101 1561 KRF 201 439 1 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 SDF 105 10 1 SDF 105 10 2 SDF 105 10 3 SDF 105 10 4 SDF 105 10 5 SDF 105 10 6 4 1 2 2 SDF 105 09 1 SDF 105 09 2 SDF 105 09 3 SDF 105 09 4 SDF 105 09 5 SDF 105 09 6 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Not Repairable Antennas Product Name Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Filter Unit Multicasting Box Sunshields Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Sun Shield Antennas and Front Sunshields for RBS 2302 Description Sector antenna GSM 900 Inc cables Sector antenna GSM 1800 nc cables Sector antenna GSM 1900 ncl cables Omni directional antenna GSM 900 Inc cables Omni directional antenna GSM 1800
307. r Installing the Batteries DANGER A Read Safety instructions regarding handling and connecting batteries CAUTION A Short circuits can cause injury or damage Although the battery voltage may be low the released power can be extremely high Note Batteries must comply with the product specification 1301 BKC 861 available from local Ericsson companies Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003273A Figure 177 Opening the battery compartment 1 Unscrew the 18 torx screws and make sure that the screws are disengaged 2 Open the PBC door The ventilation hose and battery jumper cables are now accessible Q A P003442A Figure 178 Battery switch position Note Ensure that the automatic circuit breaker is in the OFF position LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 165 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 166 488 P003275A Figure 179 Battery numbering eo
308. r Stand Alone Tests has been updated Maintenance In section Preventive Maintenance for the RBS the subsection Internal Synchronization has been updated R6A to R6B General Cable gland capacity has been changed throughout the document from 8 19 mm to 7 15 mm Product number of wrist strap has been removed throughout the manual DC Alarm cable has been replaced by DC Data cable throughout the manual Introduction Release History updated Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Introduction Tools and Instruments The chapter Tools and Instruments has been updated Antenna System Tests The entire chapter Antenna System Tests has been updated due to new version of Site Master Site Installation Tests New order for test sequence New instruction for installation of IDB RBS Site Integration In section Helpful Hints a section added containing an example of exchange data for 6 TRX Product Data In section Radio Base Station RBS 2302 subsection Power Supply the information regarding the power supply and heat generation has been updated In section Power and Battery Cabinet subsection Power Supply the information regarding the power supply and heat generation has been updated e In section Radio Base Station RBS 2302 subsection Vibrations information regarding base station vibration withstanding has b
309. r protective cover 6 Remove the inner protective cover by unscrewing the two torx screws Ericsson Radio Systems AB 391 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 392 488 P003742A Figure 10 11 12 Note 13 14 335 Removing the connection board Unscrew the six screws and remove the connection board Mount the new board Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the correct voltage used at the site and that appropriate fuses are mounted Mount the inner protective cover Remount the fuseholder Reconnect the internal AC cable the internal transmission cable and the TXL cable Make sure that the correct end of the internal transmission cable is mounted to the cabinet Reconnect the transmission cable and the AC cable to the interface box Remount the outer protective cover Set to operation 1 If the 2 3 4 5 6 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 392 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 5 14 LZN 302 74 R6B 7 Close the installation box d
310. r supply is turned off with the AC power switch in the PBC there is still AC voltage both on the AC board in the interface box and on the EMC board in the installation box up to the power switch 4 Switch the PBC Battery switch to the OFF position 5 Switch the PBC AC switch to the OFF position Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance OEE III P003449A Figure 267 AC mains power switch turned off Note When according to the manual the AC Mains Power switch is to be turned off it is very important that all radio cabinets and all battery cabinets are switched off 6 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Note Wait at least 20 seconds before performing any work on the AC Board so that the capacitors have sufficient time to discharge 12 2 7 Start up Sequence This is the start up sequence for the RBS 2302 OEE P003684A Figure 268 AC mains power switch turned on LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 323 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to the ON position Note Switch on all radio cabinets and all battery cabinets P003685A Figure 269 Battery and AC switch in the PBC 2 Switch the PBC AC switch to the ON position 3 Switch the PBC Battery switch to the ON position If the PBC
311. rameters for RBS 1 LBO A Short h 133 266 feet LBO B Short h 0 133 feet Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 8 14 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests LBO parameters for RBS 2 LBO A Short h 266 399 feet LBO B Short h 0 133 feet Defining Long Haul parameters Advise Code at the Network Interface signal level at the Far End known Long Haul Carrier Line att known point NI known Yes Calculate the line att between RBS and NI length x att meter Maximum No Define the LBO A parameters to ALBO 0 22 5 dB Stand define Long parameters as 0 dB Alone multidrop the LBO Haul on all RBSs LBO B Long h 0 dB Install the IDB Monitor with the OMT the Line att between Far End and the first RBS also between the RBSs ALBO mode Define the current values to the LBO A inputs Find out the line att between the RBSs Define the LBO parameters with the OMT according to line attenuation and Carrier Advise Code Manual LBO P004508A Figure 223 Defining Long Haul gt 655 feet The purpose of Long Haul is to optimize line performance Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 219 488 Site Installation Tests RBS Network
312. rately If a reference to another chapter is given more information will be found there Spare Parts Ordering Address Please use the Regional Ericsson Company or contact Ericsson Radio Systems AB Customer Services S 164 80 Stockholm Repair Delivery Address Please use the Regional Logistics Centre specified in the System Services Contract with the local Ericsson Radio Systems Company Catalogue Ordering How to order CPI Outside Ericsson The CPI can be ordered in the same way as any other Ericsson product Contact an Ericsson company to place the order The CPI is accessible on Extranet at this address https al cpi ericsson net A user identity and a password is required for accessing the Extranet from this page More detailed information can be found at the same address Inside Ericsson All manuals are available on the Intranet at the CPI Store http cpistore ericsson se Remarks External users comments or questions regarding information in this catalogue should be addressed to Spare Parts Documentation Telefax 46 8 757 1388 or as e mail to erac eraspare mesmtpse ericsson se Internal Ericsson users can e mail as above or make an MHS Trouble Report on the catalogue s Product No and R state Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 97 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable Recommended Spare Parts for Cu
313. rcumstances but if so an investigation of the consequences must be carried out If the work order is changed or tests are removed the department responsible for this manual must be notified and agree to the changes or the responsibility is automatically transferred to the person making the changes 8 2 Preconditions 8 2 1 Previous Records Collect all previous records and check that they have been filled in Antenna Test Record RF Test Record from factory 8 2 2 Software requirements In order to be able to use certain configurations the software for the BSC and the RBS must comply with the minimum requirements presented in the table below Table 17 Software requirements for different configurations Configuration Lowest BSC SW Lowest RBS SW version version required required Name displayed in the OMT RBS 2302 2 TRX BSS R6 LZY 213 431 1 R12 eee ian RBS 2302 4 or 6 TRX BSS R7 LZY 213 938 1 R7 1 mememe Tig LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 191 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 2 3 Removal of Conducting Material Note that all personal rings wrist watches and other metallic objects must be removed before working with the power system Also follow carefully the safety instructions on power in the chapter Safety Always use an approved antistatic bracelet to avoid damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies
314. rds instead of the wedge part moving up This is solved simply by striking the back LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 433 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 434 488 of the torx screwdriver with the hand when the screw has been screwed down approximately 20 mm Jo P003192A Figure 3595 Mounting the optional lifting handle 16 If the lifting handle optional is to be used mount it on top of the cabinet Figure 396 Unhooking the PBC 17 Remove the cabinet by lifting it up and away from the mounting base 18 To remount the new cabinet see chapter Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 19 Install the batteries according to page 422 Set to operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position 2 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position 3 Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Ericsson Radio Systems AB P003800A LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 6 5 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode Test after corrective action 1 Perform a battery backup test see chapter Site Installation Tests 2 Perform the antenna attenuator settings to calibrate the antenna see chap
315. ring a call in progress gt Logical Channel gt Physical Channel A physical channel on an air interface carries a defined set of logical channels A channel group is a group of dedicated logical channels to a specific MS All Rights Reserved Glossary 480 488 dBm DB DC DCC DIP Dixie DM DM DMRU Downlink DP DPX DS1 DSP DTE DTF DUT DXB DXX El EEPROM EIRP EMC EOC ES Decibel per 1 milliwatt DataBase Direct Current Digital Cross Connector Digital Path The name of the function used for supervision of the connected PCM lines ASIC in the TRU Degraded Minute Differential Mode Distributed Main Replaceable Unit If a Main RU is subordinated to the CMRU it is said to be distributed Signalling direction from the system to the MS Distribution Panel Duplexer Digital Signal Level 1 1544 kbit s Digital Signal Processor Data Terminal Equipment Distance To Fault Device Under Test Distribution Switch Board Ericsson Cellular Transmission System including NMS Short for G 703 2048 kbit s PCM link Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Effective Isotropic Radiated Power Electro Magnetic Compatibility Embedded Operations Channel Errored Second Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 ESB ESD ETS EXT FCC FDL FDU FS FSC FU GPRS GS GSL GSM GSM 9
316. ring locking pin snaps into position P005104A Figure 153 Mounting the earth cable 4 Mount the earth cable on the installation box door by screwing the torx screw into position LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 149 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 8 Installation Box P003191A Figure 154 Removing the protection cover 1 Remove the protection cover by unscrewing the 2 torx screws and let the cover hang in the earth wire P004136B Figure 155 Installing the fuses 2 Install the recommended fuses 150 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Table 9 100 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 8 AT 250 V 6 3x32 mm 200 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 4 AT 250 V 1 Fuse according to standard EN 60127 6 9 Connecting Earth and Lightning Protection EX Esz am RSS Earth P003168A Figure 156 Connecting earth and lightning protection If the site is located outdoors and is not protected from lightning by a house equipped with a lightning protection system protect the equipment as follows 1 Guide the earth cable through the cable inlet down right at the bottom of the rear suns
317. rnal Battery aeemereere nee nes mere ener ney ee sre ey ye AeP ener ne Ror err 447 T237 OOM flange S a a ca trated a a ek pt ad chet ic ed 447 12 7 4 Connection BOAIG ct ee td Ae nie a ah eed oi cena 448 12 7 5 Transmission OA Os xceetecaa conte neues stat Sot ectarers caecbbs nexiutetsetehiabecetwncaeds 448 TE ING BOA iss casei te tee coe stake cece Soh teeta reel cde teehee Sorta breath desecration 448 12 7 7 Internal Synchronization Optional ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 448 12 7 8 Fan Unit optional tec ck ag cease St ne ee ite Set atone mela aen nS cic Sas 450 12 8 Preventive Maintenance for the PBC cccceseseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 450 1281 UNSC Sts eek E A AN td RAN De She 451 12 8 2 Cooling TANG OS coerce nec beconduteceneinsiadedcnrnvhersbuerabada Wodnetavhes Woniehemeesnde 451 12 8 3 Batterie S morio e A A VEEE EAE 451 12 8 4 EMC BOA 623th oes oni ote code rach enadea accuse tate Gadgets anata tees 452 12 8 5 DC Surge BOI a citor crn Sa onto ets re edad eh rato cea 452 RA SG BOA EAE alan te tak et spre A cel tad to Sa tn en ead tanici ales 452 12 9 COMCIUGINGNROUNNGS 3 eid ck eat eet ee tie he ite Ta ee ee 452 12 9 1 Transport of a Faulty Ui aa coeeecensesctaters wake See wecect be neniatheeeee tes deseetead 453 12 9 2 Report of Finished Work sscscccteaccnlaseiceatecstaceessetsicechetiaciteersibveeiaacaeeeee 453 12 9 3 Repair Delivery Note Blue Tag eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeee
318. rpose of site visits is to collect and record on the spot all data that may have an influence on installation engineering and site preparation The following actions should be taken on site e Fill in the address location in the checklist Locate the site on the map Make a sketch of the premises rooftop including existing structures Take measurements e Indicate the north direction on the sketch Select a location for the RBS equipment If the RBS is to be located indoors make a floor plan sketch and indicate north on the sketch e If an indoor distributed antenna system is to be installed floor plan drawings must be obtained for the entire coverage area Note heights of supporting structures and buildings that are going to be used for the installation Take measurements supporting structures that are going to be used for installation Measure the length of the cable way for antenna cables if external antennas are to be used Investigate from where the mains power can be supplied and if it has capacity for the increased load Investigate from where the transmission network can be brought into the site Investigate from where the base station can be earthed Take photographs to back up the notes Site Investigation Report The Site Investigation Report consists of one or more binders with dividers for each site The report consists of two parts Site documents e Site preparation
319. s The Site Investigation Report is handed over to Design Review and will form the basis for a Confirmed System Design agreement with the customer Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 4 5 4 4 6 4 6 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements Site Documents Normally the Site documents consist of Site data 127 04 Configuration data A site layout drawing 153 38 Situating plan Antenna arrangement drawing 153 12 Antenna placement information if external antennas are to be used Cabinet material list 1 127 11 Plant specification Site Preparation The Site Preparation document describes the scope of the civil engineering works needed on each site and who is responsible for them For example it will define the following responsibilities Mounting structure for base station and antennas AC mains power Transport network Necessary permits Installation Engineering The purpose of Installation Engineering is to produce site installation documentation This documentation must correspond with the contract and the confirmed system design The site installation documentation is collected in one or more binders When a site or the project is finished the site installation documentation is updated with any changes agreed upon during the installation phase It then becomes as built documentation to show the actual instal
320. s AB 57 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements 2070 2830 Measurements in mm VELLA 1111111111 P004158A Figure 14 Total space requirements This figure shows the total space required for one RBS and one PBC mounted above each other or as an option beside each other To ensure sufficient ventilation for the cabinets these space requirements must be fulfilled Space requirements are detailed in chapter Product Data Furthermore the site must be supplied with the following facilities e Access to AC mains power Access to the transmission network e Access to earth terminal 4 7 1 Permits The need for planning permits from local planning authorities has to be investigated Since the base station is a small unit it is in most cases exempt from the need for the planning permit A lease contract or permission to install the base station has to be agreed upon with the owner of the building structure that is going to be used 58 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 4 8 4 9 4 9 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Planning and Requirements Earthing and Lightning Protection RBS 2302 must be connected to separate site earth This may consist of an existing lightning protection or an earth electrode The design of earth electrodes can be found in ae The requirement is also valid for indoor installations a
321. s AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 2 os s amp amp SS Sy P003248A Figure 160 Dismantling and mounting the cable inlet NM e w Cut the cable isolation Adjust the sealing grommet to the cable diameter Mount all cable inlet details see Figure 160 on page 155 Route the cable into the inlet and tighten the cable gland D aS ep z al Sz Z PE AC wo r gt lt gt X lt LN LL L Line N Neutral mm t PE Protective earth P003673A Figure 161 Connecting the AC mains and Protective Earth 7 8 Connect the AC mains cable Ensure that the protective earth PE is properly connected Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 155 488 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P004674A Figure 162 Example of use of flexible conduit 6 10 3 Loosening the Interface Box Gland Plate P003549A Figure 1635 Loosening the gland plate To simplify the mounting of the cables to the interface box the gland plate may be loosened This is done by unscrewing the 2 torx screws For example is it easier to mount the cable inlet and the cable termination block at ground level instead of at a height for example on a ladder 156 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserv
322. s has been updated Installation of RBS 2302 Information added that it may be necessary to protect the cabinet during installation due to bad weather conditions Ericsson Radio Systems AB 29 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction 1 4 5 30 488 New section added Assembling and earthing of a twisted pair cable New section added Connecting the PCM cable This section contains new information how to connect the PCM cable with DC isolation The product number for the 75 Q coaxial cable with DC isolation has been changed to RPM 518 974 2 Information regarding the hysteresis of the temperature sensors for the fans added Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Information added that it may be necessary to protect the cabinet during installation due to bad weather conditions Site Installation Tests Information regarding SW requirements added in section Preface The test section now contains only the tests General information necessary to perform the tests has been moved to earlier sections Example of this are sections Start up and Shut down and Connecting the OMT Other minor structural changes have also been made The flowchart in section Test Sequence has been updated Information regarding the hysteresis of the temperature sensors for the fans added in section Fan Unit Test In section HDSL Configuration the function of the leds has been updated In section Test Record the test record fo
323. s now accessible P006030A Figure 39 Checking the voltage selector LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 77 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 78 488 3 Set the voltage selector to the correct value 115 V or 230 V Compare with the Site Documentation to verify the voltage 4 Remount the inner protection cover L P006031A Figure 40 Snapping the fuses into position 5 Snap the 2 fuses onto the fuseholder Make sure that the correct fuses are used see table below Table 6 vonage ues Dota i tnd 100 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 8 AT 250 V 6 3x32 mm 200 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 6 3 AT 250 V 1 Fuse according to standard EN 60127 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 P006040A Figure 41 Snapping the fuseholder into postion 6 Snap the fuseholder into position 5 9 Connecting Earth and Lightning Protection Earth P003148A Figure 42 Connecting earth and lightning protection LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 79 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 If the site is located outdoors and is not protected from lightning by a house equipped with a lightning protection system protect the system as follows 1 Connect t
324. s the F1 soft key enter the Start frequency in MHz and press ENTER 3 Press the F2 soft key enter the Stop frequency in MHz and press ENTER 4 Check that the FREQ MHz scale in the display area indicates the new frequency start and stop values Table 11 Start and stop frequencies System Start freq Stop freq MHz MHz GSM 900 890 960 GSM 1800 1710 1880 GSM 1900 1850 1990 178 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 7 4 2 7 5 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests Perform a Calibration Test Port Extension Cable P007115A Figure 196 Connecting the calibration components Perform a measurement calibration according to the instructions below During the calibration there will be step by step instructions on the display One of the following messages Measuring OPEN Measuring SHORT Measuring LOAD appears while the measurements are in progress To perform a calibration the following calibration components are needed see figure above PRECISION OPEN SHORT LOAD For correct calibration results ensure that the Open Short Load is connected at the end of the Extension Testport Cable at the same point where the test object will be connected 1 Connect the Test Port Extension cable 2 Ensure that the correct frequency range is selected 3 Press the START CAL key 4 Follow the instructions in the lower le
325. screws back into position 2 Push the interface box upwards and screw the two torx screws situated on the mounting base back into position Mounting the Cabinet To facilitate mounting a lifting device may be used see chapter Installtion of RBS 2302 Note The lifting device is not dimensioned for lifting the PBC assembled with batteries Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet P003171A Figure 170 Mounting the cabinet Je P003192A Figure 171 Mounting the lifting handle 1 Tf the lifting handle optional is to be used mount it on the cabinet and lift the cabinet on to the mounting base Ericsson Radio Systems AB 161 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 162 488 30 40mm an L W P003193A Figure 172 Facilitating mounting the cabinet on the mounting base 2 Facilitate the mounting of the cabinet by aiming for the left side of the cabinet Start by holding the cabinet a few centimeters above the mounting base Make sure that the hooks are according to Figure 172 on page 162 Hook on the cabinet by pushing it against the mounting base and lower the cabinet on to the ho
326. se is defined by setting of a switch on the HDSL module 13 1 5 Lifting Kit optional A lifting kit is available as an option Note The Lifting Kit cannot be attached to the mounting fixture when it is mounted on a horizontal tube as shown to the left in Figure 418 on page 457 The mounting holes for the lifting kit are blocked by the pole fixture 458 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Product Data Note The Lifting Kit is designed to lift maximum 25 kg 55 Ibs It is not designed to lift the PBC cabinet assembled with batteries For more information about using the Lifting Device see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 13 1 6 Dimensions and Weight E E Ko 6 1 408 mm Figure 420 Dimensions Table 75 Weights Mounting base Wall and pole mounting details 11 lb Total weight 31 kg 69 Ib 13 1 7 Space Requirements Free space is required around the base station for installation and maintenance When more than one cabinet is installed at the same site a certain distance between the cabinets is required for antenna isolation and to provide sufficient working space Furthermore integrated antennas require that no large objects are situated in front of the antenna obstructing the radio beam The cabinet must always be installed vertically and with the cable inlets down LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsso
327. seconds to reinstall the PCM terminal blocks see step 12 on page 397 CB21 P003816A Figure 341 Dismounting the CB21 contact 12 Disconnect the connection board CB21 and remount the connection terminal block for the PCM line on the transmission board 13 Remove the ESD wrist strap 14 Remount the cover of the interface box and tighten the screws 15 Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws Set to Operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 397 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 2 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode 7 Close the installation box door Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 12 5 15 AC Board Prior to Replacement 1 Open the installation box door LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 397 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 398 488 2 Set the RBS to Local Mode 3 Switch the RBS battery switch to the OFF position 4 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 7 on page 398 5 Switch the PBC battery switch to OFF position 6 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 7 Swi
328. selected in accordance with local laws and regulations Only a qualified and authorized electrician is permitted to install and modify the electrical installation Protective Earth A reliable incoming Protective Earth must be connected to the earth terminal when connecting power supply The earth terminal is located in the interface box indicated by PE and the earth symbol LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 81 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 S Figure 45 Protective Earth The Protective Earth connection is essential Connecting AC It is not possible to loosen the gland plate for the AC cable from the interface box Thus the AC cable can not be mounted at ground level Follow the procedure below to connect the AC mains power cable Note Make sure the AC Mains is switched off before beginning the AC installation procedure 1 Route the AC mains cable so the interface box can be pushed up into the cabinet If a flexible conduit is to be used replace the AC mains cable inlet feed throught with the flexible conduit and its fastening device see Figure 48 on page 83 2 Cut the cable to the appropriate length G maan SS l s B l S i as P003248A Figure 46 Dismantling and mounting the cable inlet 3 Cut the cable isolation 4 Adjust the sealing grommet to the cable diameter 5 Mount all cable inlet details see Figure 46 on pa
329. separate antennas Antenna height based on the coverage prediction a desired antenna height is given Site Investigation The purpose of the site investigation is to investigate and record all factors that may have an influence on the project and to make a report that will be the basis for an agreement on the Confirmed System Design with the customer Preparations The preparations start once the contract has been signed and include the following activities Contact with the Network Design Department to obtain the proposed network design Obtaining permission from the customer to visit the sites Permits and other arrangements prescribed by security regulations must be requested through the customer Collection of all necessary information about the project Collection of all required equipment and documents A list of necessary survey tools is found in chapter Tools and Instruments Practical arrangements for visiting the sites Obtaining a map to mark the sites on Prepare a site visit binder with dividers for each site Prepare and insert checklists for each site An example of a checklist can be found in the binder Ericsson Radio Systems AB 53 488 All Rights Reserved Site Planning and Requirements 4 5 2 4 5 3 54 488 QJ Rules and Methods for EN LZB 119 2935 6 Installation Engineering Fill in the checklist with known data about the site Site Visits The pu
330. serfriendly way If you have any comments or questions regarding the usability or the contents please contact your local Ericsson company Help Desk E mail address to Product Line Maintenance Base Transceiver Stations helpdesk for Ericsson internal use only plmbts era ericsson se See also http gsmrbs ericsson se technical_support for more information Radio Site Implementation Process Network Planning Radio Site Implementation Process TSO Acceptance of site Installation amp Integration P004385A Figure 2 The Radio Site Implementation Process The Installation and Integration process is part of the overall Radio Site Implementation process which covers the work from the beginning stages of getting an order and planning and designing the entire network down to installing the RBS sites and integrating them into the network For further information about the specific planning process see chapter Site Planning and Requirements Ericsson Radio Systems AB 19 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction 20 488 Network Planning Process The Network Planning process consists of the following activities Dimensioning of network Dimensioning of equipment for radio transmission switching operation and maintenance Defining and ordering market adaptation products for example programs for national signalling towards the public telephone network
331. ses Prior to Replacement 1 Open the installation box door 2 Switch the RBS battery switch to the OFF position 3 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 6 on page 385 4 Switch the PBC battery switch to OFF position 5 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 6 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the fuses P003448A Figure 3525 Removing the outer protective cover 1 Remove the outer protection cover by snapping it off and let the cover hang in its cord Ericsson Radio Systems AB 385 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 386 488 D 5 4 P006031A Figure 326 Snapping the fuses into position 2 Remove the fuseholder and replace the faulty fuses with new fuses Make sure that the correct fuses are used see table below Table 66 Fuses 100 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 8 AT 250 V 6 3x32 mm 200 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 6 3 AT 250 v 1 Fuse according to standard EN 60127 P006040A Figure 327 Snapping the fuseholder into position 3 Snap the fuseholder back into position 4 Remount the outer protection cover Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 5 13 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Set to operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position
332. show 2 TRXs even though the RBS is to be considered as having only one TRX Define External Alarms for R6 Note Make sure the RBS is in Local mode 1 Make sure that the OMT is started and IDB read JA Define Alarm Inlets If PBC is not used Continue with step 3 If PBC is used Define the PBC alarm as an external alarm according to Table 23 on page 213 Other external alarms are to be defined on the remaining inlets If HDSL modem and or Fan unit is not used Continue with step 3 If HDSL modem and or Fan unit is used Define Fan unit and HDSL modem alarms according to Table 25 on page 214 Table 26 on page 215 Table 27 on page 215 and Table 28 on page 215 The use of external alarms for HDSL path supervision is optional and defined by the switch setting on the HDSL modem 3 Define site specific alarm Table 23 PBC alarm Alarm Inlet Info Type ID Severity Comment 8 Breaking Level 2 PBC POWER WARNING 1 Recommended order 2 To be selected Define External Alarms for R7 Note Make sure the RBS is in Local mode Ericsson Radio Systems AB 213 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 11 6 214 488 1 Make sure that the OMT is started and IDB read 2 Define Alarm Inlets e If PBC is not used Continue with step 3 e If PBC is used Define the PBC alarm as an external alarm according to Table 24 on page 214 Other external alarms are t
333. smission It is possible to use an ordinary 75 Q coaxial cable to assemble a cable with the same function as the pre assembled It is also possible to assemble a cable without the DC isolation function but otherwise with the same function as the pre assembled How to assemble these cables is described in Section Assembling the PCM coaxial 75 2 cable on page 88 The twisted pair cable used for 100 120 Q transmission See Section 5 10 4 on page 84 for assembling and earthing the twisted pair cable Assembling the PCM coaxial 75 Q cable It is possible to assemble a cable with the same characteristics as the premounted If the DC isolation is not required it is also possible to assemble a cable without this feature How to assemble these cable are presented below 88 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 OUT_GND OUT_N_LINE OUT_P_LINE IN_GND IN_N_LINE X IN_P_LINE P006564A Figure 57 Alternative 75 2 PCM cable if DC isolation is not required If the DC isolation is not required a 75 Q cable can be assembled by using an ordinary coaxial cable see figure above OUT_GND OUT_N_LINE OUT_P_LINE IN_GND IN_N ae ilies N IN_P_LINE P006565A Figure 58 Alternative 75 2 PCM cable if DC isolation is required If the DC isolation is required a 75 Q cable can be assembled b
334. snap the lower part of the left sunshield push it back so that it clears from the hinges and unhook the sunshield from the PBC 4 Mount the new left sunshield 5 Mount the lower sunshield 6 Close the installation box door Replacing the upper sunshield A t 4 LEZ NT P003687A Figure 357 Replacing the upper sunshield 1 Open the installation box door Remove the screwplugs Unsnap the upper sunshield by pressing on the middle Pull the sunshield up and to the right and remove it Mount the new sunshield Seal the two holes with the screwplugs So SP De US Close the installation box door Replacing the rear sunshield Note To replace the rear sunshield the PBC must first be placed on the ground 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position NS MWe BN Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position 412 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 7 Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 8 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch 9 Remove the PBC sunshields front lower left and upper 10 Remove the cabinet see page 427
335. ssesesssesnrrsssrrrrrsesrrnrrnssrrrnn net 211 8112 REAP IDB raa Ae a a a a aaa E a 211 BOLO Grele D Bison a a ae Gea aa 211 8 11 4 Define External Alarms for R6 sssssseeeeeneeeeeesseeserrnnrrrrrrrressssssrerreee 213 8 11 5 Define External Alarms for R7 000 cccccceseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeses 213 8 11 6 Define External Alarm Fan Unit for R6 and R7 ees 214 8 11 7 Define External Alarm HDSL for R6 and R7 c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 215 8 12 D fine Telsar aaa Aa a aa AE E p a a A Eaa E E 215 8 13 Define PCM Parameters E1 120 ONM cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 216 8 14 Define PCM Parameters T1 100 ONM ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeeeneees 216 8 14 1 Defining Short Haul parameterS ccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 217 8 14 2 Defining Long Haul parameterS e cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeees 219 8 195 HDS COnmea ranean 4 cs cites tose elias a thes sotaaedi es eageeaee 225 8 15 1 Link CONMQUGAN ON catcccas tandeactetn eseaticiiecestoetcettecussa diabetes eben atwcndtens 225 0 40 27 PED INGIGAOIS iiini a ia es ha tok alia ata she aaah 226 rok Bo 5 Su 2 8 011010 epee ea tr ET ed ere er mere ners EA ere 227 8154 Testor IDS ee a sk te Be eS 229 8 155 Star UD ame a mn ee oe a ee ee eee 229 S16 Install IDB wcaseccecasectocttectetecorsveettaxancte a A aoe aa EEA 229 8 17 Fault Status Reading c cccceceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeee
336. ssion Module Installation have been moved here from the chapter formerly called General Information Ericsson Radio Systems AB 25 488 All Rights Reserved Introduction 26 488 Antenna System Tests This chapter has been extracted from chapter Site Installation Tests Subsection Anritsu SiteMaster has been updated Site Installation Tests In section RBS 2302 the subsections Optical Indicators and Switches and Connectors have been updated Also the subsection Power Switches in the RBS has been moved here from section Test Sequence In section Power and Battery Cabinet the subsection Power Switches in the PBC has been moved here from section Test Sequence Section Antenna Installation Tests has been moved to a separate chapter Antenna System Tests In section Test Sequence there have been structural changes In section Test Sequence the subsection Flowchart has been updated In section Test Sequence two new subsections have been included AC Mains Power Test and Fan Unit Test In section Test Sequence the subsection MS Test Call Using BSC Simulator has been moved to the new chapter Optional Tests The section Fault Tracing Hints has been moved to the new chapter Fault Handling Optional Tests This chapter has been added in R4A The subsection MS Test Call Using BSC Simulatorhas been moved here from chapter Site Installation Tests Fault Handling This chapter has been add
337. stallation of RBS 2302 98 488 HDSL Upstream One Pair OQDOOOOOO po OCOOOOOOCHOOOOD Pp i UPSTREAM HDSL Shield P004336B Figure 71 The pair is connected to the PCM A IN i e X31 1 and X31 2 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X31 3 ground connection See page 86 for earthing options HDSL Upstream Two Pairs SA upsTREAM MSN HDSL P004403B Figure 72 One pair is connected to the PCM A IN i e X31 1 and X31 2 One pair is connected to the PCM A OUT i e X 31 4 and X31 5 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X31 3 and X31 6 respectively ground connections See page 86for earthing options Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 HDSL Upstream One pair PCM Downstream A B AMNA THNYMNTOO ee E L UPSTREAM HDSL DOWNSTREAM PCM P004633C Figure 73 One HDSL pair is connected to the PCM A IN i e X31 1 and X31 2 Shield if available is connected to the pull relief clamp or to X31 3 and X31 6 ground connections See page 86for earthing options HDSL Upstream Two Pairs PCM Downstream aoa Pair 2 UPSTREAM HDSL Shield DOWNSTREAM PCM P004405C Figure 74 One HDSL pair is connected to the PCM A IN i e X31 1 and X31 2 One
338. stomer Stock Repairable About this Chapter All spare parts in this chapter have the internal code U These parts are recommended for customer stock They are intended to be replaced on site and repaired at an Ericsson Repair Centre Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable P003569A Figure 1 10 59 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30297 R3C All Rights Reserved 2000 11 20 Pos Note 3 1 3 1 1 Product No KRC 161 31 022 KRC 161 31 024 KRC 161 31 032 3 1 2 KRC 161 31 054 KRC 161 31 056 KRC 161 31 064 3 1 3 KRC 161 31 088 KRC 161 31 090 KRC 161 31 094 The Radio unit does not include Mounting Base and Battery LZN 302 97 R3C 2000 11 20 Recommended Spare Parts for Customer Stock Repairable Radio Cabinet RBS 2302 GSM 900 Product Name Radio unit Radio unit Radio unit GSM 1800 Radio unit Radio unit Radio unit GSM 1900 Radio unit Radio unit Radio unit System standard GSM 900 GSM 900 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1800 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 GSM 1900 GSM 1900 Number Transm Intern of TRXs po N Interface Synch E1 E1 Ti E1 E1 T1 E1 T1 Ti Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Encr A5 1 A5 2 A5 2 A5 1 A5 2 A5 2 A5 2 A5 1 A5 1 Filter Type DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX 11
339. t case 2 NOT LOADED 2 Bring the managed object CF into service Command RXESI MO RXOCEF x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 3 Bring the managed object TF into service Command RXESI MO RXOTE x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 4 Bring the managed object IS into service Command RXESI MO RXOIS x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED 5 Bring the managed object CON into service Note This MO is optional and should only be brought into service if it is included in the DT Command RXESI MO RXOCON x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected result case 2 NOT LOADED LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 261 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 6 Bring the managed object DP into service Note This MO is optional and should only be brought into service if it is included in the DT Command Printout Expected result case 1 Expected result case 2 RXESI MO RXODP x a a 0 or 1 RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESUL
340. t US ISN che a tie eR eh he Se nnne 173 6 15 Before leaving the Sees eters eee seeetletweut ede biatateasonenhcnreentaniteieeet ce 173 7 Antenna System Tests sirccts cust sctssiescucennsandcleceliudsnceueis tan vactuiniitectatsansanoaeisns 175 7 1 About these TOSTS oc cscs re sd lca ene dete prmetieaten hve ch iaceaae adducts ah eel cette 175 Tees VEC ONGINONS treatin cuteihie i eae T aes b tes Cele tale a eh ee beta ana 177 3 Ghecking the STANTON sscici cs sresze cede se eea aaa A EANA 177 7 4 Calibrating the Antenna Testel ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeee 178 7 4 1 Select the Frequency Range cccccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 74 2 Performa Calibration sirri aea ie 178 7 5 Choosing SWR Test Setup ccccessccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 179 7 5 1 SWR Test Setup for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems 180 Z6 Perorming SWR eS heceds sida cet cea a a aeaaaee aa a dee eaten 181 7 7 Choosing DTF Test Set seen aes ee ed ee aeteeeaetates 183 7 7 1 DTF Test Setup for RBS 2302 passive Antenna Systems 184 7 7 2 Entering Cable Parameters lt i cc 2s athe ccitatiiaesti eee Geeta 184 7 8 Performing DTF GSU ctstcctic ti ceed oat ein aici a 186 7 9 Calculating Feeder Attenuation cccccceeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenes 187 7 9 1 Examples of Feeder Attenuation calculations cceeeeeceeeeeeneenees 188 FAs OSU PROG ON E
341. t instead Free space above the cabinet must be at least 800 mm to allow the lifting device to be installed and removed from the mounting plate Check that the conditions for the lifting device work are fulfilled and that the ordered equipment specified tools and other facilities have been delivered The lifting device serial number is on the stop ring 130 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Note Installation of RBS 2302 The lifting device may only be used by qualified field technician with good command of the English language Various Conditions Before starting any kind of work ensure that the following conditions are met Rope is undamaged Rope runs slightly through all the cleats Inner rope has a security knot with a washer Cleats are mounted and secures the rope No parts have any defects or deformity For example Hook spring Locking pin Tube bracket Mounting plate is mounted and secured See the figure below regarding maximum wall loading values 60_0331B Figure 1235 Maximum wall loading values Note LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Make a test lift before starting the real work Ericsson Radio Systems AB 131 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 Unpacking If the packaging is damaged make an immediate complaint to the transport company The delivered equipment shall be checked aga
342. t is a M8 bolt A suitable earthing kit must be used to connect the bolt with the lightning protection system of the site HDSL Modem General The HDSL High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line is an optional transmission module mounted in an extended installation box door By using the integrated HDSL transmission it is possible to connect the RBS 2302 to physical twisted copper pairs from a BSC Base Station Controller with HDSL equipment at BSC site and or to another RBS 2302 with HDSL The distance can be longer than with traditional line terminals The usage of repeaters will then be reduced which means lower transmission costs This makes the installation easier and the sites will be more landlord friendly due to integrated solution Note HDSL technology uses duplex communication on each pair The wires in a pair are polarity independent When a two pair HDSL interface is used the two pairs can be connected arbitrarily HDSL Modem Technical Specification Data Terminal Equipment Interface to BTS Device name NTU E 2P DTE bit rate 2048 kbit s Ericsson Radio Systems AB 473 488 All Rights Reserved Product Data DTE interface type G 703 1202 balanced G 704 frame structure DTE signal coding HDB3 DTE timing Co directional Line Interface HDSL Line rates 2320 kbit s 1168 kbit s or 592 kbit s automatic rate detection at slave modems Line code 2B1Q Impedance 135 Transmit level 13 5 dB
343. tallation Tests Alarms and Commands Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to give an overall description of the alarms and the alarm codes Power and Battery Cabinet PBC Supervision of the PBC The PBC alarms supervise Main input AC power AC DC converter DC DC converter Battery unit Cabinet temperatures Power up When the power is switched on the PBC display starts flashing The power up takes about 5 seconds then the active system status appears on the display PBC Originated Alarms to the RBS All alarms transmitted to RBS are active alarms Alarm terminals on the PBC The PBC has eight terminals for PBC alarms Four of these are outgoing used to connect the RBS The remaining four terminals enable connection of incoming alarms from a second PBC e Alarm connected to the RBS The PBC alarm is connected to the RBS external alarm inputs and generates the following alarm Alarm Unit POWER WARNING PBC Note The external alarm inlets on the RBS must be defined accordingly at installation see Section 8 11 3 on page 211 Stand Alone Mode The PBC must be in Stand Alone Mode as no active antenna is used To set the PBC in Stand Alone Mode see page 205 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 203 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 204 488 Alarm Codes Table 20 Alarm classes on display element D2 Not classified Severe Warning Table 21 Fault cod
344. tch off the AC Mains Power switch Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance Replacing the AC board DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal CAUTION A N Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static electricity P003729A Figure 342 Loosening the interface box 1 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 399 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P003738A Figure 343 Loosening the interface box cover 2 Open the cover of the interface box by loosening the 8 torx screws P003465A Figure 344 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 3 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box 4 Remove the pull relief clamp of the incoming AC cable Remove the connection terminal blocks connected to the AC board 400 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance AC board P003466A Figure 345 6 10 11 12 Removing the AC board Unscrew the si
345. tch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position 3 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 6 on page 334 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003174A Figure 277 Battery and AC switch in the PBC DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp items or moisture can be fatal Note When the AC power supply is turned off with the AC power switch in the PBC there is still AC voltage both on the AC board in the interface box and on the EMC board in the installation box up to the power switch 4 Switch the PBC Battery switch to the OFF position 5 Switch the PBC AC switch to the OFF position LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 333 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 3 10 334 488 P003449A Figure 278 AC mains power switch turned off Note When according to the manual the AC Mains Power switch is to be turned off it is very important that all radio cabinets and all battery cabinets are switched off 6 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch If a PBC is used it should also be switched off Note Wait at least 20 seconds before performing any work on the AC Board so that the capacitors have sufficient time to
346. te Master S331B f External Power Serial Interface Battery Changing 12 5 15V DC A RF Out Reflection 50Q eA we Back Lighting OD y Start cal RN Soft Keys Escape Clear Auto scale Mode DS ode Up Down arrow Frequency N Distance Recall setup Amplitude Sweep Marker Save setup Enter Limit Save display Run hold On Off Print System Menu Recall display P007240A Figure 194 Anritsu Site Master S331B The keys mentioned in the instructions are found in the figure above In the instructions a key is marked with the text describing its function while soft key has its text displayed on the screen next to the key Test Record The sample test record see Figure 203 on page 189 is a suggestion only and can be modified to suit the actual project 176 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Antenna System Tests Work Flowchart for Testing the Antenna System Checking the installation against the Radio Site Installation doc Calibrating the Antenna Tester Choosing SWR Test setup Performing SWR test Choosing DTF Test setup v Performing DTF Test v Calculating the Feeder Attenuation Tested all Feeders on the site No Yes Completing Test Record P007112A Figure 195 Work flowchart for testing the Antenna system 7 2 Preconditions The installation of antennas
347. tead of the wedge part moving up This is solved simply by striking the back of the torx screwdriver with the hand when the screw has been screwed down approximately 20 mm P003681A Figure 3523 Unhooking the radio cabinet 13 Grip the bottom of the radio cabinet and pull it outwards 14 Unhook the RBS by lifting the RBS upwards 15 For information on how to mount the new radio cabinet see chapter Installation of RBS 2302 382 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 5 11 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 16 Remount the battery or the PSA Set to Operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 383 2 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC Battery switch to ON position 3 4 Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position 5 Switch the Battery power switch on the RBS to ON position 6 Set the RBS to Remote Mode Test after corrective action 1 Perform a MS call test to verify the function see chapter Optional Tests 2 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 PSA Prior to Replacement 1 Open the RBS installation box door 2 Set the RBS to Local Mode 3 Switch the RBS Battery switch to the OFF position 4 Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position 5 Switch the PBC Battery switch to OFF position 6 Switch the PBC AC switch t
348. tenuation should be either calculated or measured The LBO value is calculated as follows Maximum output level Maximum input signal level at the Far End Line attenuation The LBO standard value with the next higher attenuation is chosen Example Far End permits a signal level of max 22 5 dB and the Line Attenuation has been measured to 9 dB Max output level from the RBS is 22 5 9 13 5 dB The LBO is set to 15 dB See Table 30 on page 222 RBS Far End Line att 9 dB 22 5 dB P004501A Figure 227 LBO A Long h 15 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB Table 30 Line Attenuation dB Maximum signal level at Far End dB 0 7 5 15 22 5 15 22 5 22 5 Example If none of the following are known Carrier Advise Code Line Attenuation or maximum input level at the Far End LBO A Long h 0 dB LBO B Long h 0 dB Automatic LBO for Long Haul Automatic LBO ALBO is used for T1 transmission interface in Long Haul cases If maximum input signal level at the Far End is known use this value to set the ALBO in the OMT 222 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests ALBO is to be used also when the Carrier Advised Code and Line attenuation are not known The received signal level is measured at the PCM port of the RBS The output signal from the Far End is always assumed to be 0 dB
349. ter Antenna System Tests 3 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Fuses Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position Switch the PBC battery switch to OFF position Switch the PBC AC switch to OFF position OO ON aR er a Switch off the AC Mains Power switch Replacing the fuses 1 Open the installation box door Ericsson Radio Systems AB 435 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance P004135A Figure 397 Removing the protective cover 2 Remove the protective cover by loosening the two torx screws P004136B Figure 398 Replacing the fuses 3 Replace the faulty fuses with new fuses Table 67 Fuses 100 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 8 A 250 V o 6 3x32 mm 200 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 6 3 A 250 v 436 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 6 6 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Maintenance 1 Fuse according to standard EN 60127 4 Remount the protective cover by tightening the five torx screws Set to operation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position
350. ters using the OMT For more information about how to use the OMT see QJ OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 The following parameters must be considered when defining the PCM transmission Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests Transmission Interface T1 e Network Topology Sync Source T1 LBO Parameters Short Haul Long Haul The purpose of LBO parameter settings is to configure the RBS for Short Haul Long Haul transmission to optimize the transmission line performance and to reach the signal level stated by the network operator The choice between Short Haul and Long Haul is depending on the maximum input level at the Far End Network Interface specified by the network operator and the length of the transmission line The Short Haul functionality includes the possibility to amplify the output signal This is used to adapt the line signal to optimize the transmission line performance in the range 0 655 feet The dynamic range of the receiver in Short Haul mode is 3 to 6 dB at 772 kHz The Long Haul functionality provides higher sensitivity in the receiver compared with Short Haul The receiver dynamic range is 0 to 30 dB at 772 kHz in Long Haul mode In addition the output signal can be attenuated with an LBO Line Build Out The LBO can be used in manual or automatic mode In both modes the output signal can be attenuated in standardized steps of
351. th step 5 6 9 Ifthe value is not INTE enter RXMSC MO RXOTF x TFMODE SA SYNCSRC INTE 10 Enter the command RXMOP MO RXOTF x again and make sure that the value of the parameter SYNCSRC is INTE Calibration of the 13 MHz oscillator Before starting the calibration the IDB must be checked and read with OMT Perform the calibration for futher information see QJ OMT User s Manual LZN 302 01 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB 449 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Wait until the locked LED on the frequency counter FC is lit It takes about 15 minutes before the FC is ready for operation Do not start to measure the frequency before the warm up period is ended 1 Set level trig in mode auto 2 Set sample size to 10 seconds and in mode mean 3 Measure the frequency during 5 minutes 4 Enter the mean frequency with an accuracy of 1 1000 Hz into the OMT 5 Wait 10 minutes and measure the frequency again during 5 minutes If the frequency deviate more than 208 mHz 16 ppB from 13 MHz repeat step 5 The calibration is finished Restore the BSC If the parameter SYNCSRC value was not INTE see step 8 on page 449 enter RXMSC MO RXOTF x TFMODE SA SYNCSRC original value 12 7 8 Fan Unit optional Note See Section 12 5 2 Fan Unit Optional on page 352 for taking the RBS and Fan Unit out of service Table 70 Preventive maintenance table Fan Unit 1 Inspect t
352. that the appropriate alarm appears 4 Deactivate the alarm applied in step 1 so that no faults are indicated 5 The external alarm indicator on the distribution panel will be off 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 for all alarms 8 18 2 External alarm test on RBS 1 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations 1 Activate an alarm by applying appropriate closing or breaking depending on definition The Alarm connectors are located in the interface box 2 The external alarm indicator will now be lit Check with the OMT that the appropriate alarm appears 4 Deactivate the alarm applied in step 1 so that no faults are indicated 5 The external alarm indicator on the distribution panel will be off 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 for all alarms 8 18 3 External alarm test on RBS 2 4 TRX and 6 TRX Configurations 1 Activate an alarm by applying appropriate closing or breaking depending on definition The Alarm connectors are located in the interface box 2 The external alarm indicator on RBS 1 will now be flashing and the external alarm indicator on the RBS that generates the fault will be lit 3 Check with the OMT that the appropriate alarm appears 4 Deactivate the alarm applied in step 1 so that no faults are indicated 5 The external alarm indicator on RBS 1 will stop flashing and the external alarm indicator on the RBS that generated the fault will be off 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 for all alarms 8 18 4 External alarm test on RBS 3 4 TRX and 6 TRX Conf
353. the D sub connector at the Master RBS 4 Connect the TXL bus cable connector marked Master to the RBS D sub connector and secure the connection cover with two screws 5 Pull out the cable at the frontside between the front sunshield and the first cooling flange from right when facing the cabinet 6 Route the cable to the next radio cabinet Extension cabinet 1 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 5 20 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 7 Route the cable between the front sunshield and the first cooling flange into Extension cabinet 1 and remove the protection cap from the D sub connector 8 Connect the TXL bus cable connector marked RBS EXT 1 to the RBS D sub connector and secure the connection cover with two screws If a 4 TRX configuration is used continue to step13 If a 6 TRX configuration is used continue with the instructions below to connect the Extension cabinet 2 The 6 TRX cable have two cables attached to the D sub connector marked RBS EXT 1 9 Pull out the cable at the frontside between the front sunshield and the first cooling flange 10 Route the cable to the next radio cabinet Extension cabinet 2 11 Route the cable between the front sunshield and the first cooling flange into Extension cabinet 2 and remove the protection cap from the D sub connector 12 Connect the TXL bus cable connector marked RBS EXT 2 to the RBS
354. the alarms is supplied 12 2 2 Location of the RBS User Interface The RBS user interface including optical indicators power switches and control buttons is located behind the installation box door w Cy ERICSSON zZ 39_0331A Figure 262 Sealing screws and key for the installation box door To open the door loosen the sealing screws and unlock with the key LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 315 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 12 2 3 316 488 CPU Reset A Fault OK Operational LM Local Mode CAP Reduced capacity ON AC power on CE Battery fault External alarm Local remote Test 13 MHz T1 Test result for TRX 1 T2 Test result for TRX 2 ocoooo0oo0oo0oO Q 0 O OMT Transmission Alarm C G P003450A Figure 263 RBS user interface Optical Indicators The purpose of the optical indicators is to provide a fast way of indicating the operational status of the included equipment The general principles are Red A fault is located check with OMT Yellow Operational Local Mode AC Power on Faulty Battery Fault External Alarms Reduced Capacity Green Operational Flashing indicators Wait activity in progress The optical indicators shows that a fault faults have been detected and the OMT should thereafter be used for more advanc
355. the interface box Table 43 Parameter settings in the HTU ooo s Roe NWFopot Configurations HDSLTyp HDSL upstream one pair HDSL upstream two pairs 1 OTU HDSL upstream one OTU pair PCM downstream HDSL upstream two OTU Master P_to_P pairs PCM downstream TU HDSL upstream HDSL downstream cascade PCM upstream HDSL downstream one pair PCM upstream HDSL O downstream two pairs DETSI when choosed HDSL Modem LEDs Table 44 HDSL modem LEDs indicating the current configuration Configuration HDSL modem LEDs HDSL upstream one pair On On Off HDSL upstream one pair PCM On On Off downstream HDSL upstream two pairs PCM On On On downstream Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Optional Tests HDSL upstream HDSL downstream On On On cascade PCM upstream HDSL downstream one On Off On pair pairs LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 251 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Optional Tests 9 2 5 Test Record Test Record for Optional Tests NE Commissioning GSM Cell configuration Testers Name MS CALL TEST RXA RX B RX Level RX Quality RX Level RX Quality DL UL DL UL DL UL DL UL HDSL Configuration _ Leds OK if used Remarks POO6055A Figure 243 Test Record for Optional Tests 252 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74
356. the power switch Start up and Shut down The purpose of this chapter is to give an overall description of the start up and shut down procedure For the location of power switches see Section 8 4 4 on page 200 PBC and Section 8 3 5 on page 196 RBS Start up and shut down of the RBS If a PBC is used for battery backup proceed to Section 8 5 2 on page 202 How to Start up Make sure everything is connected according to chapters Installation of RBS 2302 and Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Also make sure that the transmission cable is disconnected If not and the software versions of the RBS and the BSC differ the BSC will copy its software version to the RBS without any warning At extremely low temperature the warming up of the RBS may take about half an hour During this time the RBSs leds in the interface box will turn off 1 Switch on the AC power 2 2 Switch on the DC battery power The RBS will automatically run a self test For information regarding optical indicators on the user inteface for the RBS see Section 8 3 3 on page 193 for the PBC see page 198 How to Shut down 1 Switch off the DC battery power 2 Switch off the AC power Ericsson Radio Systems AB 201 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 8 5 2 202 488 Start up and shut down of the RBS and PBC How to Start up Make sure everything is connected according to chapters Installat
357. ting the Mounting Base P003183A Figure 150 Mounting the mounting base on the mounting plate 1 Mount the mounting base on the four screws situated on the mounting plate Ensure that the fastening screws are properly fitted in the key holes Locking Nut Fastening screws Distance Nut Inner Nut Fastening screws Locking Nut Distance Nut A Nut P003484A Figure 151 Adjusting the distance nuts 2 Alter the vertical inclination of the mounting base relative to the mounting plate by adjusting the four distance nuts This can only be done with the mounting base dismounted The locking nuts may remain on the fastening screws Note Do not loosen the inner nuts The locking nuts secure the bolts in the mounting plate 3 When the mounting base is correctly adjusted tighten the four locking nuts Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 7 Mounting the Installation Box Door P005103A Figure 152 Mounting the installation box door 1 Hook the lower left hand corner of the door on to the installation box 2 Press down the spring locking pin on the upper right hand corner of the installation box 3 Insert the installation box door by pushing the upper left hand corner of the door into position Make sure that the sp
358. tion 4 A fault report message is sent to the BSC via the PCM line This means that an external condition class 1 alarm will be raised in the BSC 5 The communication link on the PCM line is disconnected and the RBS mode is changed to Local Mode 6 The Local Mode indicator turns on The Operational indicator is also turned on if the RBS is free from class 1 faults in order to indicate that the radio cabinet is in local operation Changing the RBS from Local to Remote Mode Note The Local Mode indicator must be in mode ON before any action is done 1 Press the Local Remote button 2 The Local Mode indicator starts flashing to indicate that a change of RBS mode to Remote is in progress 3 The communication link on the PCM line is established by an order from the BSC The RBS is changed to Remote Mode immediately after the link towards the BSC has been established 4 The Local Mode indicator turns off 5 To indicate that the RBS is ready to carry traffic the Operational indicator turns on Note This will only happen if the RBS is considered operational by the BSC Aborting changing from Local to Remote Mode for the RBS If the Local Remote button is pushed while the Local Mode indicator is flashing the change of RBS mode to Remote is interrupted Note This function is only valid during a change of RBS mode to Remote 1 Press the Local Remote button 2 The attempt to enable a connection with the BSC will stop
359. tional antenna unit sector antenna unit multicasting box LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 455 488 Product Data Sunshields 7 Upper sunshield Left sunshield Cabinet eS Mountingbase Front sunshield P003106A Figure 415 Main units 13 1 1 Wall Mounting The mounting plate is used to fix the base station to a flat surface In combination with the pole fixture it is also used to install the base station on a pole P003127A Figure 416 A separate template is available to mark out holes for drilling 456 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 13 1 2 13 1 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Product Data 03_0331B Figure 417 Mounting plate Pole Mounting The pole fixture is attached to the mounting plate if the base station is to be mounted on a tubular mast or pole The pole fixture will attach to a round tube having a diameter of 60 114 mm P003151A Figure 418 Pole fixture and mounting plate mounted on a tube Optional Fan Unit A fan unit is available as an option This unit will increase the high temperature endurance for the base station to 55 C The fan unit is installed on top of the RBS cabinet It has its own mains cable th
360. to continued progress in methodology design and manufacturing the contents of this document are subject to revision without notice 2 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 User s Guide RBS 2302 Contents T Nirod ction isa wticeceeicedcaicaseateteteticleteued dia araara mamana anaana raaa na Aaa neopasan anenai 17 E E io EREKET o E E ET N 18 1 2 Radio Site Implementation Process cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 19 1 3 The Mobile Telephone System OvervieW ccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeneneeeees 22 1 3 1 Switching Systemi So se eureen eiae riain iai 22 1 3 2 Base Station System BSS sessenneeeoesseeeeesnrnreerrrtnrreserrnnnrrrrrernneeee 23 1 3 3 Operation and Support System OSS ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 l4 Release IIS LON nseni iiaiai a ienee ada dai A ea a aS oe oe 24 IARA TORIA eaaa a elastance vita a en a wadatals 24 DA SPO PAA assented nica de utente steed cuian tty wear E tel ulus tae vaste set 25 DAS 2 ATO BAA sci aye E setenv neh aasuicn sv dato er da cere ap eae oan veda ap i 27 TAA ROAN FAO Pivasce ions tees cc ice scstd ca avai a Sdanctesnce sani a A E ETE 29 1 4 5 R6A to FAG B hesiehucrnt eden cet whrontcsietacotnanaaecbriudwbleten reed cheetnon tien none rieneietiat 30 2 Safety Instructions wie sasciistencssatiaa cacti cenciecaesdneviadecsauierenuwedguveesseverddertneesacecsasies 33 2 1 WAMMINGS ienr etera e
361. ts OMT related actions Overview CheckIDB IDB Correct 1 Create IDB No y Define alarms Y Install IDB gt Y Fault status reading v External alarms test P007553A Alarms defined Figure 219 OMT related actions Read IDB Check with the OMT that the right IDB is installed in the RBS e If the IDB is correct continue with Section 8 17 Fault Status Reading on page 230 e If the IDB is incorrect a new IDB must be created see below Create IDB The purpose is to create a new IDB if the current IDB is incorrect Example of parameters to be considered Ericsson Radio Systems AB 211 488 All Rights Reserved Site Installation Tests 212 488 Note Note Transmission Parameters PCM Cabinet Type Power System Frequency Band TEI value Antenna type Site Cell Configuration TNOM parameters Alarm Inlets 1 BSS R7 or later When changing from regular RBS 2302 configuration to Maxite configuration or vice versa do not reuse the old radio parameters in the OMT window Re use Site Specific Data Make sure that the OMT has been started and the IDB read To create a new IDB the OMT must be in Disconnect mode Create IDB and define the setup parameters for the RBS The description below explains how to define these parameters for 4 TRX and 6 TRX configurations To be able to use 4 TRX or 6 TRX c
362. ts are indicated 5 Reset the RBS if the RBS is not supposed to be in traffic or make sure that the RBS is in remote mode 6 Close and lock the installation box door 7 Close and lock the interface box cover on the RBS and secure the interface box 8 If 4 TRX or 6 TRX configuration is used Repeat steps 3 to 7 for each RBS 9 Check that all actions taken have been entered into a log book with data concerning time date and name of the person who took the action s 10 Check that all tools and instruments have been removed from the site RBS with External Battery Backup PBC 1 Save the IDB on a diskette the name of the IDB file must be site specific Label the diskette according to Table 42 on page 237 Disconnect all test equipment Check that all cables are connected Make sure that no RBS or PBC faults are indicated DM eS eS Reset the RBS if the RBS is not supposed to be in traffic or make sure that the RBS is in remote mode and that the PBC is operational Close and lock the installation box door 7 Close and lock the interface box cover on the RBS and PBC and secure the interface box 8 If 4 TRX or 6 TRX configuration is used 236 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 8 22 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Site Installation Tests Repeat steps 3 to 7 for each RBS and PBC 9 Check that all actions taken have been entered into a log book w
363. ts must have the appropriate training and medical certificate Full body safety harness and safety helmet must be used Adequate protective clothing is essential in cold weather All lifting devices must be tested and approved During work on a mast all personnel in the area must wear helmets Rules and Advice for the Safe Use of Ladders Make sure that the ladder is undamaged and has been approved for use Do not overload the ladder The following types of ladders must be guyed or otherwise secured Leaning ladder longer than 5m Free standing ladder with a platform and knee support and with over 2 meters height to the platform Any other free standing ladder longer than 3m Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Safety Instructions Positioning the ladder 02_0354A Figure 9 Checking the angle The ladder s inclination should be approximately 1 4 75 Position the ladder according to its gradation indicator if there is one or check the angle with your elbow Use the ladder foot or a ladder support to reduce the risk of tipping over sideways Always attach extension legs to a ladder that is to be used on a sloping base Never prop up a ladder with boxes stones or the like Extend the ladder completely Check that all four anti slipping treads are firmly positioned on the base Climbing and using the ladder
364. ul Hints Section 10 10 on page 276 Command RXAPP MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION ABIS PATH STATUS Check the Digital Path Check that the Digital Path used towards the BTS site is working Command DTSTP DIP RBLTx Printout DIGITAL PATH STATE Connecting the RBS from the BSC Bring MO s into Service and Deblock The DT file 97xxx could be used for this There are two ways for the BSC personnel to perform this step Case 1 The BSC personnel works online with the RBS That is if the transmission is working properly and that the RBS is set in Remote mode The RBS engineer should be present on site but that is not necessary since this activity is performed from the BSC Case 2 The other way is to prepare the RBS in Local mode The MO s will then logically be taken into service and deblocked The Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration RBS engineer then sets the RBS into remote mode which will automatically configure the RBS During this procedure you can use the command RXMSP MO mo to check the current state of the MO For information about the MO s different states see Helpful Hints Section 10 10 on page 276 1 Bring the managed object TG into service Command RXESI MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT IN SERVICE RESULT Expected result case 1 LOADED Expected resul
365. unshield from the mounting base Mount the new rear sunshield and the new locking washers Remount the mounting base on the mounting plate Tighten the four nuts holding the mounting base Reconnect the earth cable to the PBC mounting base Mount the gland plate and fasten the screws Insert the AC cable and connect the Protective Earth Mount the AC cable gland Remount the remaining connection terminal blocks Remount the cover of the interface box and tighten the screws Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws To remount the cabinet on the mounting base see chapter Installation of Power and Battery cabinet Remount the batteries according to page 422 Set to Operation 1 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position Ericsson Radio Systems AB 415 488 All Rights Reserved Maintenance Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position Switch the PBC Battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the Battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode nw FY YN Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 12 6 2 Batteries Removing the batteries P003166A Figure 363 Opening the installation box door 1 Open the installation box door 416 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17
366. unting details 13 1b Total weight 59 kg 130 Ib Space Requirements Free space is required around PBC for installation and maintenance When more than one cabinet is installed at the same site a certain distance between the cabinets is required for air circulation and to provide sufficient working space The cabinet must always be installed vertically and with the cable inlets down Ericsson Radio Systems AB 469 488 All Rights Reserved Product Data 275 215 Measurement in mm P003642A Figure 431 Mounting plate and equipment contour Figure 431 on page 470 shows the dimensions of the equipment in relation to the mounting plate This is to determine a suitable alignment with several units or existing equipment 500 mm OZ 700 mm 02_0330C Figure 432 Space requirements for PBC 13 2 5 Climatic Endurance Table 8 amp 2 Climatic endurance Environmental parameter Normal condition Non destructive Temperature 33 45 40 70 Relative humidity 15 100 15 100 470 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Product Data Normal condition denotes the environmental conditions where all units will function as specified Non destructive range denotes environmental stress above the limits for normal operation during which no function is guaranteed and performance may degrade in an unspecified manner
367. urement examples Antenna System Tests m CALON LIM ON SWR SWR1 ANTENNA 259 POINTS RECALL OPTIONS CLOCK SELF TEST STATUS ElL FREQ MHz 1880 0 P007396A Figure 198 Example of an approved Antenna System SWR SWR3 BAD CONN CAL ON LIMON 259 POINTS RECALL FREQ MHz 1880 0 OPTIONS CLOCK SELF TEST STATUS LE P007398A Figure 199 jumper 7 6 Performing SWR Test 1 Press the MODE soft key Example of an unapproved Antenna System with a bad connector at antenna 2 Select FREQ SWR by using the Up Down arrow key and press ENTER LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 181 488 Antenna System Tests 3 Calibrate the Site Master for the actual test setup see Section 7 4 on page 178 4 Connect the test equipment to the the antenna system according to the actual test setup see Section 7 5 on page 179 5 Check that all connections are properly connected and tightened 6 Press the AMPLITUDE key 7 Press the TOP soft key and enter 1 5 for topscale and press ENTER 8 Press the LIMIT soft key and enter 1 4 as the limit and press ENTER Note Ensure that Limit is not in OFF mode by pressing the LIMIT ON OFF key 9 Observe the waveform and check that no SWR levels are over 1 4 15 6 dB RL see Table 13 on page 183 Enter the test result in the Test Record see Figure 203 on page 18
368. ut RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT STATUS Verification of Downloaded RBS Software This verification should be done both from the BSC and from the RBS 1 Verify the software version from the RBS use the OMT and its function Display Software Versions Make a note of the versions in the testrecord Verify the software version from the BSC Command RXMOP MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION MANAGED OBJECT DATA Compare that the software versions in the BSC and the BTS are the same If they are not the same information about unconditional download of software can be found in see Helpful Hints Section 10 10 on page 276 Activation and Check of Cell 1 Activate the cell Command RLSTC CELL cell STATE ACTIVE Printout CELL STATE CHANGE RESULT Check that the Digital Path used towards the BTS site is working Command DTSTP DIP RBLTx Printout DIGITAL PATH STATE Verify that logical channels are configured Command RLCRP CELL cell Printout CELL RESOURCES Check that all equipment has been correctly configured Command RXCDP MO RXOTG x Printout RADIO X CEIVER ADMINISTRATION CONFIGURATION DATA Make a note of which timeslots are used for the SDCCH This information will be needed during the call tests Ericsson Radio Systems AB 265 488 All Rights Reserved RBS Site Integration 10 5 5 Agree upon Parameters The BSC staff must inform the RBS staff abo
369. ut the value of the following parameters BCCHNO Absolute Radio Frequency RF channel number for Broadcast Control Channel BCCH DCHNO Absolute RF Channel Number BSIC Base Station Identity Code SDCCH Stand Alone Dedicated Control Channel These parameters will be used for call tests with TEMS 10 6 Call Tests on Air Interface The tests are performed from the BTS site and are intended to verify that calls can be made on all TRX s in all cells Two call tests must be made in each cell one to the mobile station and one from the mobile station The call tests should be performed with a TEMS mobile and using the TEMS program PC software Note The Diversity call tests should only be performed if Antenna Diversity is supported and if The Stand Alone Test has not been performed The call tests should be performed at a distance of at least 50 meter from the RBS and with the door closed 10 6 1 Call Tests using TEMS P002970B Figure 247 Connecting a PC to mobile 1 Connect the TEMS with a TEMS cable to a PC containing the TEMS program Connect the cable to COMI 266 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 6 2 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 2 RBS Site Integration Start the TEMS program and establish a connection between the MS and the PC Choose Enable connections from the Externals menu QJ TEMS Manual In the PC define the COM1 for the MS
370. vailable Filled in and approved record prepared during site preparation Site installation documentation prepared by the Installation Engineering Department QJ General Installation Instructions LZN 302 49 Tools and Instruments The tools needed for Power and Battery Cabinet installation may be found in chapter Tools and Instruments Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 6 3 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet Table 8 Recommended Torque M3 80 7 7 1 0 6 Reduced for plastic covers 190 15 16 8 1 3 Reduced for plastic covers 0 a 47 8 2 6 Battery poles Notes cabinet for battery 8 8 6 5 0 4 30 2 1 8 o eee Al 2 Overview The recommended installation procedure includes the following activities Unpack and verify against the packing list that the correct material has been delivered Mount the PBC mounting plate Mount the PBC mounting base Connect earth and lightning protection Connect the external cables Mount the cabinet Connect internal cables Install the batteries Mount the sunshields Ericsson Radio Systems AB 141 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 6 4 Unpacking CAUTION A 77N Sensitive components such as Integrated Circuits IC can be damaged by discharges of static el
371. ved Maintenance Alarm terminals on the PBC The PBC has eight terminals for PBC alarms Four of these are outgoing used to connect the RBS The remaining four terminals enable connection of incoming alarms from a second PBC Alarm connected to the RBS The PBC alarm is connected to an RBS external alarm input and generates the following alarm Alarm Unit POWER WARNING PBC Note The external alarm inputs on the RBS must be defined accordingly at installation see chapter Site Installation Tests 12 3 6 Stand Alone Mode The PBC must be in Stand Alone mode as no active antenna is used To set the PBC in Stand Alone mode see Section 12 3 8 Commands on page 331 12 3 7 Fault Codes Table 55 Alarm classes on display element D2 Code Alarm class 0 Not classified 1 Severe 2 Warning Table 56 Fault codes on display element D3 Code Fault AC fault no mains AC DC fault DC DC overload DC DC fault Battery fault Battery disconnected Battery voltage low Overtemp active Overtemp historical o ON OA FW N O PBC in standalone mode antenna detected 330 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance 12 3 8 Commands Table 57 on page 331 lists the command codes used for RBS 2302 Other codes are used for Maxite Table 57 Command codes on display element D3 Code Command 5 Clear historical temperature alarms 6 Set PBC in stand alone mode 7 Exit PBC fr
372. view Figure 142 on page 144 shows the dimensions of the equipment in relation to the mounting plate This is to determine a suitable alignment with several units or existing equipment For more information see chapter Product Data and chapter Site Planning and Requirements Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Wall 1 Place the mounting plate drilling template in the position where the PBC is to be situated ORL L TEMPLATE FOR WALL BRACKET Recomendeg holes Alternate holes P006039A Figure 143 Marking the holes 2 Check with a spiritlevel that the drilling template is placed in a horizontal position 3 Use a pen to mark the position of the holes that are to be drilled LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved Installation of Power and Battery Cabinet 4 Remove the template and drill the holes for the fasteners best suited for the wall material Note The mounting plate must not be used as a drilling template in order not to damage the rust protection surface 35_0331C Figure 144 Mounting plate 5 Mount the mounting plate and secure it into position with all screws 6 Unscrew the four nuts on which the mounting base is to be hung until only a few threads remain 6 5 2 Mounting the Mounting Plate on a Pole Bo P003699A Figure 145 Mounting alternatives The mounting plate
373. visor or manager who will take further action such as consulting the FSC Test after corrective action Perform the recommended tests Replacing the cabinet For information on how to replace the cabinet see page 377 Test after corrective action 1 If the calibration of the optional reference oscillator has been done make an MS call test to verify the radio cabinet See chapter Optional Tests If the cabinet has been replaced perform all tests in chapter Site Installation Tests except the Transmission Test as well as the tests in chapter Antenna System Tests Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 12 6 12 6 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Corrective Action for the PBC Sunshields Maintenance 7 Battery Interface box Front sunshield Lower sunshield a e Upper sunshield Left sunshield vanme Installation box Mounting base Figure 353 Sunshields overview Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved P003439A 409 488 Maintenance Replacing the front sunshield P003646A Figure 354 Replacing the front sunshield 1 Open the installation box door 2 Push up the
374. witch the PBC AC switch to OFF position 8 Switch off the AC Mains Power switch oY ee Oe Replacing the mounting base DANGER A High voltage is used in the operation of this equipment Both direct contact with the mains power and indirect contact via damp or moisture can be fatal 1 Remove the sunshields 2 Remove the radio cabinet see page 377 402 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance P003729A Figure 346 Loosening the interface box 3 Loosen the two torx screws on the cover of the interface box and pull down the interface box 4 Open the cover of the interface box by loosening the 8 torx screws P003465A Figure 347 Connecting the ESD wrist strap 5 Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation box LZN 302 74 R6B Ericsson Radio Systems AB 403 488 2000 11 17 All Rights Reserved Maintenance 404 488 Note You have ten seconds to perform step 6 on page 404to maintain the PCM link between the BSC and the other RBS that are cascade connected This step is only valid when the PCM B is used in a cascade connection P003816A Figure 348 Mounting the CB21 connection board 6 Remove the connection terminal blocks for the PCM lines and mount the connection board CB21 on the two PCM terminal blocks
375. with the correct data Make sure that the RBS is in remote mode The RBS commissioning staff must have contact with the BSC staff Transmission Test The purpose of this test is to ensure that the connection between RBS and BSC is working correctly Transmission Test E1 Note This test does not include the transmission through the Mounting Base The test is performed only when the RBS is directly connected to the BSC The test is not performed if a transmission network is used 1 Remove the PCM A cable plug from the transmission filter located in the interface box 2 Connect the PCM A cable plug to the loopback socket on the connector board CB21 see Figure 246 on page 257 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 4 10 4 1 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 RBS Site Integration P003815A Figure 246 CB21 connector board 3 Request the BSC operator to check the digital path on the active RBLT An appropriate command for this procedure is lt DTSTP DIP RBLT XXX Transmission Test T1 A transmission test can be performed in two ways A Perform the test according to Section 10 3 1 on page 256 B Request the BSC operator to use CSU functionality The parameter is set and cleared with the OMT The function is initiated during restart of the CMRU For further information refer to QJ Reference Manual LZN 302 7
376. x torx screws holding the AC board and remove the AC board Replace the AC board and remount the six screws including the Protective Earth Tighten the screws Remount the two AC connection terminal blocks Remount the pull relief clamp of the incoming AC cable Remove the ESD wrist strap Remount the cover of the interface box and tighten the screws Push up the interface box and secure it in the upper position with the two torx screws Set to Operation 1 If the PBC is not used proceed to step 4 on page 401 Switch the PBC AC switch to ON position 2 3 4 5 6 7 Turn the AC Mains Power switch to ON position Switch the PBC battery switch to ON position Switch the AC power switch on the RBS to ON position Switch the battery power switch on the RBS to ON position Set the RBS to Remote Mode Close the installation box doors Test after corrective action 1 Perform the checklist in Section 12 9 on page 452 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 401 488 Maintenance 12 5 16 Mounting Base Prior to Replacement 1 Inform the OMC operator that the RBS will be removed from service temporarily Open the installation box door Set the RBS to Local Mode Switch the RBS battery switch to the OFF position Switch the RBS AC switch to the OFF position If the PBC is not used proceed to step 8 on page 402 6 Switch the PBC battery switch to OFF position 7 S
377. y using an ordinary coaxial cable with a 33 nF voltage tolerance 400 V capacitor mounted between IN_N_LINE and IN_GND see figure above Connecting the PCM A coaxial 75 2 cable The connection cable for 75 Q coaxial cable RPM 518 974 2 with DC isolation can be ordered as an option The cable inlet is premounted so the only installation is to connect the termination block Ericsson Radio Systems AB 89 488 All Rights Reserved Installation of RBS 2302 OUT_GND OUT_N_LINE IN_N_LINE IN_P_LINE P006411A Figure 59 The 75 922 PCM cable with DC isolation of IN wire and coaxial TNC connectors 1 Remove the existing cable gland from the gland plate POO6566A Figure 60 Mounting the cable gland with the optional 75 822 PCM cable in the gland plate 2 Run the cable through the inlet on the cable gland plate 3 Mount the cable gland on the gland plate and tighten the upper nut 4 Loosen the lower cable gland sealing nut a few turns so it is possible to adjust the cable length 90 488 Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 30274 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 LZN 302 74 R6B 2000 11 17 Installation of RBS 2302 OQ SS SOSOSHOSOSOSSS QOOOOOCOOC CHOCO OOCOC OWOC OO ee ee Lee agaaaaa 50A C errrerre NA moo od DO KKK KKK KK P003405A Figure 61 Connecting the 75 822 PCM cable to the termination block 5 Connect the cab
378. ynchronization optional The purpose of calibrating the 13 MHz oscillator is to aviod the high risk of traffic disturbances This has to be done every third year It is not necessary to take the RBS out of service in order to perform the calibration Tools and Instruments For information about required test equipment and tools see chapter Tools and Instruments Test preparations The RBS must be loaded with BSS R7 SW or higher and must be Operational e The cell must have been in active state for at least one hour The RBS contains an owenoscillator that has to be warmed up to become stabil Ericsson Radio Systems AB LZN 302 74 R6B All Rights Reserved 2000 11 17 Maintenance Se Be Se hod Frequency Counter BSC P006232A Figure 412 Testbed configuration 5 Connect the OMT cable C1 from a PC COM port to the RBS according to the figure above 6 Connect the cable RPM 113 77 2 from port A on the frequency counter to the 13 MHz port in the User Interface according to the figure above The MO TF RBS must be syncronised to the optional reference oscillator This is done by preforming step 3 6 7 Enter the command RXMOP MO RXOTF x 8 Read the value INTI INTE PCM or DEFAULT of parameter SYNCSRC an write it down If the value is INTE proceed with Section Calibration of the 13 MHz oscillator on page 449 else proceed wi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sensing - Measurement Sensors  06204 MAXFLOW 500 ESP  User Manaul - Vreelin Engineering Inc.  Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB  instrucciones de seguridad  SÉRIE EGX PRO. UN PAS EN AVANT DANS LA GRAVURE.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file